The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink AboutPermit D13-226 - AVEDA - TENANT IMPROVEMENTAVEDA 211 SO UTH CENTER MALL D13-226 City offkukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206-431-3670 Inspection Request Line: 206-431-2451 Web site: http://www.TukwilaWA.gov DEVELOPMENT PERMIT Parcel No.: 9202470010 Address: 211 SOUTHCENTER MALL TUKW Suite No: Project Name: AVEDA Permit Number: D13-226 Issue Date: 08/19/2013 Permit Expires On: 02/15/2014 Owner: Name: WESTFIELD PROPERTY TAX DEPT Address: PO BOX 130940 , CARLSBAD CA 92013 Contact Person: Name: GARY PALMER Address: PO BOX 23534 , EUGENE OR 97492 Contractor: Name: DAVID A NICE BUILDERS INC Address: 4571 WARE CREEK RD , WILLIAMSBURG VA 23188 Contractor License No: DAVIDNB044QL Lender: Name: SELF FUNDED - AVEDA Address: 7671'11-'1'H AV , NEW YORK NY 10153 Phone: 541-603-4191 Phone: 757 566-3032 Expiration Date: 04/18/2015 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: NEW TENANT: DEMO EXISTING INTERIOR SPACE AND REMODEL FOR NEW TENANT/RETAIL SPACE. TO INCLUDE NEW PARTITIONS, ELECTRICAL, FIRE SYSTEM, PLUMBING, HVAC MECHANICAL AND RELATED EQUIPMENT WITH ADDING CASHWRAP AND SINK. Value of Construction: $178,000.00 Fees Collected: $3,592.59 Type of Fire Protection: SPRINKLERS International Building Code Edition: 2012 Type of Construction: II -B Occupancy per IBC: 0019 Electrical Service Provided by: PUGET SOUND ENERGY **continued on next page** doc: IBC -7/10 D13-226 Printed: 08-19-2013 Public Works Activities: Channelization / Striping: N Curb Cut / Access / Sidewalk / CSS: N Fire Loop Hydrant: N Number: 0 Flood Control Zone: Hauling: N Start Time: End Time: Land Altering: Volumes: Cut 0 c.y. Fill 0 c.y. Landscape Irrigation: Moving Oversize Load: Start Time: End Time: Size (Inches): 0 Sanitary Side Sewer: Sewer Main Extension: Private: Public: Storm Drainage: Street Use: Profit: N Non -Profit: N Water Main Extension: Private: Public: Water Meter: N Permit Center Authorized Signature: Date: a-1ct" r 3 I hereby certify that I have read and examined this permit and know the same to be true and correct. All provisions of law and ordinances governing this work will be complied with, whether specified herein or not. The granting of this permit does not presume to give authority to violate or cancel the provisions of any other state or local laws regulating construction or the performanc o ork. I am authorized to sign and obtain this development permit and agree to the conditions attached to this permit. Signature: Print Name: � UQI C& a ai c)_e_k,c 0 tv Date: i( 13 This permit shall become null and void if the work is not commenced within 180 days from the date of issuance, or if the work is suspended or abandoned for a period of 180 days from the last inspection. PERMIT CONDITIONS: 1: ***BUILDING DEPARTMENT CONDITIONS*** 2: No changes shall be made to the approved plans unless approved by the design professional in responsible charge and the Building Official. 3: All mechanical work shall be inspected and approved under a separate permit issued by the City of Tukwila Permit Center (206/431-3670). 4: All permits, inspection records, and approved plans shall be at the job site and available to the inspectors prior to start of any construction. These documents shall be maintained and made available until final inspection approval is granted. 5: New suspended ceiling grid and light fixture installations shall meet the non -building structures seismic design requirements of ASCE 7. 3: Partition walls that are tied to the ceiling and all partitions greater than 6 feet in height shall be laterally braced to the building structure. ioc: IBC -7/10 D13-226 Printed: 08-19-2013 7: All construction shall be done in conformawilkwith the approved plans and the requireme f the International Building Code or International Residential Co nternational Mechanical Code, WashingtonWe Energy Code. 8: There shall be no occupancy of a building until final inspection has been completed and approved by Tukwila building inspector. No exception. 9: Remove all demolition rubble and loose miscellaneous material from lot or parcel of ground, properly cap the sanitary sewer connections, and properly fill or otherwise protect all basements, cellars, septic tanks, wells, and other excavations. Final inspection approval will be determined by the building inspector based on satisfactory completion of this requirement. 10: Manufacturers installation instructions shall be available on the job site at the time of inspection. 11: All plumbing and gas piping work shall be inspected and approved under a separate permit issued by the City of Tukwila Building Department (206-431-3670). 12: All electrical work shall be inspected and approved under a separate permit issued by the City of Tukwila Building Department (206-431-3670). 13: VALIDITY OF PERMIT: The issuance or granting of a permit shall not be construed to be a permit for, or an approval of, any violation of any of the provisions of the building code or of any other ordinances of the City of Tukwila. Permits presuming to give authority to violate or cancel the provisions of the code or other ordinances of the City of Tukwila shall not be valid. The issuance of a permit based on construction documents and other data shall not prevent the Building Official from requiring the correction of errors in the construction documents and other data. 14: ***FIRE DEPARTMENT CONDITIONS*** 15: The attached set of building plans have been reviewed by the Fire Prevention Bureau and are acceptable with the following concerns: 16: The total number of fire extinguishers required for an ordinary hazard occupancy with Class A fire hazards is calculated at one extinguisher for each 1,500 sq. ft. of area. The extinguisher(s) should be of the "All Purpose" (2A, 20B:C) dry chemical type. Travel distance to any fire extinguisher must be 75' or less. (IFC 906.3) (NFPA 10, 3-2.1) 17: Portable fire extinguishers, not housed in cabinets, shall be installed on the hangers or brackets supplied. Hangers or brackets shall be securely anchored to the mounting surface in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. Portable fire extinguishers having a gross weight not exceeding 40 pounds (18 kg) shall be installed so that its top is not more than 5 feet (1524 mm) above the floor. Hand-held portable fire extinguishers having a gross weight exceeding 40 pounds (18 kg) shall be installed so that its top is not more than 3.5 feet (1067 mm) above the floor. The clearance between the floor and the bottom of the installed hand-held extinguishers shall not be less than 4 inches (102 mm). (IFC 906.7 and IFC 906.9) 18: Fire extinguishers shall not be obstructed or obscured.from view. In rooms or areas in which visual obstruction cannot be completely avoided, means shall be provided to indicate the locations of the extinguishers. (IFC 906.6) 19: Extinguishers shall be located in conspicuous locations where they will be readily accessible and immediately available for use. These locations shall be along normal paths of travel, unless the fire code official determines that the hazard posed indicates the need for placement away from normal paths of travel. (IFC 906.5) 20: Fire extinguishers require monthly and yearly inspections. They must have a tag or label securely attached that indicates the month and year that the inspection was performed and shall identify the company or person performing the service. Every six years stored pressure extinguishers shall be emptied and subjected to the applicable recharge procedures. If the required monthly and yearly inspections of the fire extinguisher(s) are not accomplished or the inspection tag is not completed, a reputable fire extinguisher service company will be required to conduct these required surveys. (NFPA 10, 4-3, 4-4) 21: Egress doors shall be readily openable from the egress side without the use of a key or special knowledge or effort. (IFC 1008.1.8.3 subsection 2.2) 22: Dead bolts are not allowed on auxiliary exit doors unless the dead bolt is automatically retracted when the door handle is engaged from inside the tenant space. (IFC Chapter 10) 23: Door handles, pulls, latches, locks and other operating devices on doors required to be accessible by Chapter 11 of the International Building Code shall not require tight grasping, tight pinching or twisting of the wrist to operate. (IFC 1008.1.8.1) 24: Exit hardware and marking shall meet the requirements of the International Fire Code. (IFC Chapter 10) 25: Aisles leading to required exits shall be provided from all portions of the building and the required width of the aisles shall be unobstructed. (IFC 1013.4) doc: IBC -7/10 D13-226 Printed: 08-19-2013 26: Maintain sprinkler coverage per N.F.P.A• Addition/relocation of walls, closets or parts may require relocating and/or adding sprinkler heads. (IFC 901.4) 27: Sprinklers shall be installed under fixed obstructions over 4 feet (1.2 m) wide such as ducts, decks, open grate flooring, cutting tables, shelves and overhead doors. (NFPA 13-8.6.5.3.3) 28: All new sprinkler systems and all modifications to existing sprinkler systems shall have fire department review and approval of drawings prior to installation or modification. New sprinkler systems and all modifications to sprinkler systems involving more than 50 heads shall have the written approval of Factory Mutual or any fire protection engineer licensed by the State of Washington and approved by the Fire Marshal prior to submittal to the Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau. No sprinkler work shall commence without approved drawings. (City Ordinance No. 2327). 29: A fire alarm system is required for this project. The fire alarm system shall meet the requirements of N.F.P.A. 72 and City Ordinance #2328. (ALL FIRE ALARM COMPONENTS TO BE TIED TO THE MAIN MALL FIRE ALARM PANEL.) 30: Maintain fire alarm system audible/visual notification. Addition/relocation of walls or partitions may require relocation and/or addition of audible/visual notification devices. (City Ordinance #2328) 31: All new fire alarm systems or modifications to existing systems shall have the written approval of The Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau. No work shall commence until a fire department permit has been obtained. (City Ordinance #2328) (IFC 104.2) 32: An electrical permit from the City of Tukwila Building Department Permit Center (206-431-3670) is required for this project. 33: The maximum flame spread class of finish materials used on interior walls and ceilings shall not exceed that set forth in Table No. 803.5 of the International Building Code. 34: Post address on storefront per approved Westfield standards. 35: Contact The Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau to witness all required inspections and tests. (City Ordinances #2327 and #2328) 36: Any overlooked hazardous condition and/or violation of the adopted Fire or Building Codes does not imply approval of such condition or violation. 37: These plans were reviewed by Inspector 511. If you have any questions, please call Tukwila Fire Prevention Bureau at (206)575-4407. ioc: IBC -7/10 D13-226 Printed: 08-19-2013 CITY OF TUKWILA Community Development Department Public Works Department Permit Center 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100 Tukwila, WA 98188 http://wwvv.TukwilaWA.gov Building Permit No. b 3 �le Project No. C - O gI Date Application Accepted: / -›*----k Date Application Expires: \,— L1 (For office use only) CONSTRUCTION PERMIT APPLICATION Applications and plans must be complete in order to be accepted for plan review. Applications will not be accepted through the mail or by fax. **Please Print** SITE LOCATION 1 King Co Assessor's Tax No.: Site Address: c, htc1t-t CC --r 76-2. . C 4.1,-)t t_')- Suite Number: (o 3 �P Tenant Name: A�� PROPERTY OWNER Name: Address: II (601 W 1v-LS141( MAIZ 0144' Ft- . City: L...40S p\Kt,c,..L State:e_fr Zip: gam, CONTACT PERSON - person receiving all project communication Name: l `ti ? /).'t_vv.L`VL Architect Name: '1C-r�-NitS T Imk-ruxo-L_ c r Address:,?,LI ')uX 2_3 slT Address: City: GGC� State: b&. U� Zip: i `% t{�,j1 Phone: 5zi.t ` 6 Di .,419 I Fax: Email: d r GENERAL CONTRACTOR INFORMATION Company Name: ---t-15� � Architect Name: '1C-r�-NitS T Imk-ruxo-L_ Address: (0 0.-,.> , 1_ L) x`57 t S l Cr '-% 0 Address: Phone: 6Iri.uS ..14tcFax:g'1?.4n .t73'7r1 Email:A l n : �+ i cP r,24,1LAe. tick, 6.,rc I cj_e_d . c.ow\s City: State: Zip: Phone: Fax: Contr Reg No.: Exp Date: Tukwila Business License No.: H:1Applications\Forms-Applications On Line\2011 Applications\Permit Application Revised - 8-9-11.doss Revised: August 2011 bit New Tenant: Floor: l Yes ❑ „No ARCHITECT OF RECORD Company Name: -1.) 1 1M 15,41....0-I4t.cC�C.� Architect Name: '1C-r�-NitS T Imk-ruxo-L_ Address: (0 0.-,.> , 1_ L) x`57 t S l Cr '-% 0 City: .44....0 rst rem State: Zip: r% to tor) Phone: 6Iri.uS ..14tcFax:g'1?.4n .t73'7r1 Email:A l n : �+ i cP r,24,1LAe. tick, 6.,rc I cj_e_d . c.ow\s ENGINEER OF RECORD Company Name: L 4 `I...5 1_Lete \ l N_L Engineer Name: ' Xn 1c '��r- `Cc_ Address: '-i O 1/3 ? ?.tes7. ` 5+-w/2:1 City.: v4 h+` L1 . °( State: v1.0 Zip:(et.F[ b$ Phone: 811 ti,q9 16D, Fax: gtit, Al7.g1 Goa Email: G 4',,a n . 4,6LAvs_s e ?Gsson6n02AIN, c LENDER/BOND ISSUED (required for projects $5,000 or greater per RCW 19.27.095) Name: PI,1 CJ Address: r1 & r7PiN.L�_ City: ,.,,, vtZ,v(-- State: h Zip:10► s3 Page 1 of 4 BUILDING PERMIT INFORMATION — 206-431-3670 Valuation of Project (contractor's bid price): $ t 7't o6 -O 6 ' Existing Building Valuation: $ Describe the scope of work (please provide detailed information): "re.-re.0v1 �bC � C�cts,,37-r-ek frk seoc e t'. &z) T hl4. r/ &rf(4_ SP; - �o l lv e �� ger ArC-t J �.rtvt=�I Tt 00-5 El C -c --r, CkC12i'c' 54-rS 1i ` P t - u. wt6 1-1 LvtCCN./ l A-NU4_'C- Will there be new rack storage? ❑ Yes [r] No If yes, a separate permit and plan submittal will be required. Provide All Building Areas in Square Footage Below PLANNING DIVISION: Single family building footprint (area of the foundation of all structures, plus any decks over 18 inches and overhangs greater than 18 inches) *For an Accessory dwelling, provide the following: Lot Area (sq ft): Floor area of principal dwelling: Floor area of accessory dwelling: *Provide documentation that shows that the principal owner lives in one of the dwellings as his or her primary residence. Number of Parking Stalls Provided: Standard: Will there be a change in use? Compact: Handicap: 0 Yes 0 No If "yes", explain: FIRE PROTECTION/HAZARDOUS MATERIALS: Er Sprinklers 0 Automatic Fire Alarm 0 None 0 Other (specify) Will there be storage or use of flammable, combustible or hazardous materials in the building? 0 Yes [►� No If 'yes', attach list of materials and storage locations on a separate 8-1/2"x 11" paper including quantities and Material Safety Data Sheets. SEPTIC SYSTEM 0 On-site Septic System — For on-site septic system, provide 2 copies of a current septic design approved by King County Health Department. H:\Applicauons\Forms-Applications On Lme\2011 Applications Permit Application Revised - 8-9-I l.docc Revised: August 2011 bh Page 2 of 4 Existing Interior Remodel Addition to Existing Structure New Type of Construction per IBC Type of Occupancy per IBC l" Floor �'- g'73-0 Sr- . e--, l L ..13 2"d Floor 3`d Floor Floors thru Basement Accessory Structure* Attached Garage Detached Garage Attached Carport Detached Carport Covered Deck Uncovered Deck PLANNING DIVISION: Single family building footprint (area of the foundation of all structures, plus any decks over 18 inches and overhangs greater than 18 inches) *For an Accessory dwelling, provide the following: Lot Area (sq ft): Floor area of principal dwelling: Floor area of accessory dwelling: *Provide documentation that shows that the principal owner lives in one of the dwellings as his or her primary residence. Number of Parking Stalls Provided: Standard: Will there be a change in use? Compact: Handicap: 0 Yes 0 No If "yes", explain: FIRE PROTECTION/HAZARDOUS MATERIALS: Er Sprinklers 0 Automatic Fire Alarm 0 None 0 Other (specify) Will there be storage or use of flammable, combustible or hazardous materials in the building? 0 Yes [►� No If 'yes', attach list of materials and storage locations on a separate 8-1/2"x 11" paper including quantities and Material Safety Data Sheets. SEPTIC SYSTEM 0 On-site Septic System — For on-site septic system, provide 2 copies of a current septic design approved by King County Health Department. H:\Applicauons\Forms-Applications On Lme\2011 Applications Permit Application Revised - 8-9-I l.docc Revised: August 2011 bh Page 2 of 4 PERMIT APPLICATION NOTES — Value of Construction — In all cases, a value of construction amount should be entered by the applicant. This figure will be reviewed and is subject to possible revision by the Permit Center to comply with current fee schedules. Expiration of Plan Review — Applications for which no permit is issued within 180 days following the date of application shall expire by limitation. The Building Official may grant one or more extensions of time for additional periods not exceeding 90 days each. The extension shall be requested in writing and justifiable cause demonstrated. Section 105.3.2 International Building Code (current edition). I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT I HAVE READ AND EXAMINED THIS APPLICATION AND KNOW THE SAME TO BE TRUE UNDER PENALTY OF PERJURY BY THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF WASHINGTON, AND I AM AUTHORIZED TO APPLY FOR THIS PERMIT. BUILDING OWNER OR AUTHORIZED AGFNT Signature: fMh 13A-LC✓L .wi Print Name: Fecal. 'i. Date: %// t)-0) Day Telephone: SLi (. (eb`3 . Lf(9 Mailing Address: PD Clxvx a'ss IL( C C City H:\Applications\Forns-Applications On Line\201 I Applications \Permit Application Revised - 8-9.1 l.docx Revised: August 2011 bh State Zip Page 4 of 4 • City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206-431-3670 Fax: 206-431-3665 Web site: http://www.TukwilaWA.gov RECEIPT Parcel No.: 9202470010 Permit Number: D13-226 Address: 211 SOUTHCENTER MALL TUKW Status: APPROVED Suite No: Applied Date: 07/02/2013 Applicant: AVEDA Issue Date: Receipt No.: R13-02387 Payment Amount: $2,179.10 Initials: WER Payment Date: 08/19/2013 09:29 AM User ID: 1655 Balance: $0.00 Payee: DAVID A NICE BUILDERS INC TRANSACTION LIST: Type Method Descriptio Amount Payment Check 177476 2,179.10 Authorization No. ACCOUNT ITEM LIST: Description Account Code Current Pmts BUILDING - NONRES 000.322.100 STATE BUILDING SURCHARGE 640.237.114 Total: $2,179.10 2,174.60 4.50 Printed• 08-19-2013 • City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206-431-3670 Fax: 206-431-3665 Web site: http://www.TukwilaWA.gov RECEIPT Parcel No.: 9202470010 Permit Number: D13-226 Address: 211 SOUTHCENTER MALL TUKW Status: PENDING Suite No: Applied Date: 07/02/2013 Applicant: AVEDA Issue Date: Receipt No.: R13-02042 Payment Amount: $1,413.49 Initials: WER Payment Date: 07/02/2013 01:58 PM User ID: 1655 Balance: $2,179.10 Payee: GARY R PALMER (PHONE) TRANSACTION LIST: Type Method Descriptio Amount Payment Credit Crd VISA Authorization No. 055796 ACCOUNT ITEM LIST: Description 1,413.49 Account Code Current Pmts PLAN CHECK - NONRES 000.345.830 1,413.49 Total: $1,413.49 D.... .1. A7. AO.OAIQ INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. PERMIT NO. CITY .OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 431-2451 Project: Type of Inspection: Address: 1 1 S0 01r I1 Date. Called: Special Instructions: Date Wanted: I C -.2 5-- 1."2 aarn. m.. Requester: Phone No:, 1,,.rI.7.Sri3 _y) 3 C - Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS:,,,,v�N€_( Priv+1 cpoe t.tP4&J2y r ec`or:Date: Io -L5-1- R INSPECTION FEE REQU FED. Prior tnext inspection, fee must be pd at 6300 SouthcenterBlyd:, Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Y INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with' permit,Dl 3-22 INSPECTION NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 431-2451 Project: I'AU1A Type of Inspection: !- 1v.iAL, Address: ZI t Se)CIk7t A (l Date Called: Special Instructions: Date Wanted: Requester: Phone No: ElApproved per applicable codes. 'Corrections required prior to approval. 7 COMMENTS: G L-Azi.1 - U s -fir, y w tri ct E, L o r;tn ( tiAL - tvfgclf Date: NSPECTION FEE REQ !RED. Prior to next inspection, fee must be at 6300 Southcenter = lvd.. Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6- 6300 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 431-2451 Project: AUE. A- Type of Inspection: .. SSS . c_E` L, 46 Addr ss: % Date Called: Special Instructions: Date Wanted/ 1 S '_/ 1 , jt p.m. Requester:.../97- Phone ( 1 — 5q3— - 13k! Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: J `#' -e 9.A ( j NA3V�.._11Te P, Datl:0 3 n REINSPECTION FEE ' EQUIRED."Prior to next inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd.. Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy, with permit PERMIT NO. INSPE1tTION NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 431-2451 Orl Project:CC Type of Inspection: Address: X11 S.. C. .TALL Date Called: Special Instructions: Date Wanted: a. rr Requester: Phone No: pproved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: Inspor: .44/1/7 ate: INSPECTION FEE REQ IRED. Prior to next inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 S: uthcenter lvd.. Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. 7) INSPECTION NO. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit .PERMIT NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION 63.00 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 431-2451 Projec`t: ikJEh Type oLInspection: t-�tuAIlki4 Address: a_t t S_0. M A11 Date Called: Special Instructions: Date4a ted: Crnfi Request : Phone No: W17-553-4413-, a pproved per applicable codes. El Corrections required prior to approval. 4 COMMENTS: REI pai .4W-1 .J /J 1/\(.4.ti cs SPECTION FEE RE UIRED. Prior to next inspection. fee must be at 6300 Southcenter'Blvd.. Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. Dtte: vl /3 INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTION NO. PERMI NO. CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION C-- 6300 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 (206) 431-3670 Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 431-2451 Project: PAN-A Type of Inspection: F1ZAMIt)C, Address:Date r?, 1 1 ' ! IM A t( Called: Special Instructions: . Date Wanted:a:m: -- 10 -- ( ---- Requester: i 1 L'i P --71.-- 7 T �i`c' Phone No: 2t) L. i /I L. • zApproved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: — A— . i 1 L'i P --71.-- 7 T �i`c' - Q e-it 2t) L. i /I L. �— ,\ J J n ector: Dat V REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. Prior to next inspection, fee must be paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule reinspection. INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit INSPECTI N NO. 1 PERMIT NO. _.., At CITY OF TUKWILA BUILDING DIVISION C-- ' 6300 Southcenter Blvd., #100, Tukwila. WA 98188 9 (206) 431-3670 r Permit Inspection Request Line (206) 431 -2451 V --!-- D i 3 -2210 Project. Type of Inspection:A, Address: 2, 1 ( S C__ AA A—i ( Date Called: r)k- 6 eA-4:''S il A.• ill - A ov,1-1 LA.1114 i b 4I Special Instructrons:: Date Wanted: 5 qi (aim: — , Requester: Phone MIL -4 11/-- S93-4113,6 Approved per applicable codes. ElCorrections required prior to approval. / COMMENTS: ' r . 14, £ . r)k- 6 eA-4:''S il A.• ill - A ov,1-1 LA.1114 i b 4I , 5 4 - e_Lr -7'u frl? e.tii LAJ A-€1 L-09 der 4‘k 0( 1411J -e it- 5 - 1)( s ge p3rr r J -r -J ire Date:i p 1 REINSPECTION FEE R QUI ED. Prior to next inspecticiee must be , paid at 6300 Southcenter Blvd., Suite 100. Call to schedule, Rinspection. 1 INSPECTION NUMBER INSPECTION RECORD Retain a copy with permit Di 3- z2.6 I3 -P-2% PERMIT NUMBERS CITY OF TUKWILA FIRE DEPARTMENT 444 Andover Park East, Tukwila, Wa. 98188 206-575-4407 ProjeQ c ed►or J Date: „he/6 Te of Inspection: / KI dl- Ftp r,-,4, , Address: Suite#: 2//SC ,v t Contact Person: Special Instructions: Phone No.: y. Approved per applicable codes. Corrections required prior to approval. COMMENTS: Date: „he/6 Sprinklers: F/ // 1-,c.._ I / /e Hood & Duct: Monitor: Pre -Fire: ere.- r:401/ — l0i4-7 p4 4-e Occupancy Type: - con 6,J»- 40 se pie/ i c- s • - ' 010/14`i/r' 1- _ p1i Dia-- _.. r!C ex I�iHL/4 ... L%CGT'i'ic_u SG eoi /C..- pciii - move 5, 'rn G �/ ti c. 1,3 --Loc. c.1 jj /apaP'Y) Needs Shift Inspection: Yrs Date: „he/6 Sprinklers: Fire Alarm: ke5 Hood & Duct: Monitor: Pre -Fire: Permits: Occupancy Type: Inspector ,41 5y Date: „he/6 Hrs.: v r $100.00 REINSPECTION FEE REQUIRED. You will receive an invoice from the City of Tukwila Finance Department. Call to schedule a reinspection. Billing Address Attn: Company Name: Address: City: State: Zip: Word/Inspection Record Form.Doc 6/11/10 T.F.D. Form F.P. 113 July 22, 2013 Gary Palmer PO Box 23534 Eugene, OR 97492 • City of Tukwila Jim Haggerton, Mayor Department of Community Development Jack Pace, Director RE: Correction Letter #1 Development Permit Application Number D13-226 Aveda — 211 Southcenter Mall Dear Mr. Palmer, This letter is to inform you of corrections that must be addressed before your development permit can be approved. All correction requests from each department must be addressed at the same time and reflected on your drawings. I have enclosed comments from the Building Department. At this time the Fire, Planning, and Public Works Departments have no comments. Building Department: Allen Johannessen at 206 433-7163 if you have questions regarding the attached comments. Please address the attached comments in an itemized format with applicable revised plans, specifications, and/or other documentation. The City requires that four (4) sets of revised plans, specifications and/or other documentation be resubmitted with the appropriate revision block. In order to better expedite your resubmittal, a `Revision Submittal Sheet' must accompany every resubmittal. I have enclosed one for your convenience. Corrections/revisions must be made in person and will not be accepted through the mail or by a messenger service. If you have any questions, I can be reached at (206) 431-3670. Sincerely, Bill Rambo Permit Technician File No. D13-226 W:IPermit CenterlCorrection LetterslDl3-226 Correction Letter #1.docx 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 • Tukwila, Washington 98188 • Phone 206-431-3670 • Fax 206-431-3665 Tukwila Building Division Allen Johannessen, Plan Examiner Building Division Review Memo Date: July 16, 2013 Project Name: AVEDA Permit #: D13-226 Plan Review: Allen Johannessen, Plans Examiner The Building Division conducted a plan review on the subject permit application. Please address the following comments in an itemized format with revised plans, specifications and/or other applicable documentation. (GENERAL NOTE) PLAN SUBMITTALS: (Min. size 11x17 to maximum size of 24x36; all sheets shall be the same size. New revised plan sheets shall be the same size sheets as those previously submitted.) (If applicable) Structural Drawings and structural calculations sheets by a registered engineer shall have a current signed stamp -seal. Architectural design sheets and documents by a registered architect shall also have a current signed stamp -seal. 1. Provide a completed 2012 Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code lighting summary form. 2. Revise cover sheet to reflect compliance with all current 2012 building and energy codes with 2009 ANSI codes. Should there be questions concerning the above requirements, contact the Building Division at 206-431-3670. No further comments at this time. PERMIT COORD COPY' PLAN REVIEW/ROUTING SLIP ACTIVITY NUMBER: D13-226 DATE: 07-31-13 PROJECT NAME: AVEDA SITE ADDRESS: 211 SOUTHCENTER MALL Original Plan Submittal X Response to Correction Letter # 1 Response to Incomplete Letter # Revision # After Permit Issued DEPARTII(IENJS: J�1nJ U. Building Division a Public Works Fire Prevention Structural n Planning Division CI n Permit Coordinator OR DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS: (Tues., Thurs.) Complete Incomplete DUE DATE: 08-01-13 Not Applicable n Comments: Permit Center Use Only INCOMPLETE LETTER MAILED: LETTER OF COMPLETENESS MAILED: Departments determined incomplete: Bldg 0 Fire 0 Ping 0 PW 0 Staff Initials: TUES/THURS ROUTING: Please Route Structural Review Required No further Review Required REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: Approved n Approved with Conditions Notation: DUE DATE: 08-29-13 Not Approved (attach comments) REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: Permit Center Use Only CORRECTION LETTER MAILED: Departments issued corrections: Bldg 0 Fire 0 Ping ❑ PW 0 Staff Initials: Documents/routing slip.doc 2-28-02 PLAN ' 'VW/ "�SUTING SLIP ACTIVITY NUMBER: D13-226 DATE: 07 -02 - PROJECT NAME: AVEDA SITE ADDRESS: 211 SOUTHCENTER MALL X Original Plan Submittal Response to Correction Letter # Response to Incomplete Letter Revision # After Perm! Issue DEPPAR MENT : 4Tdin iv sion P is Wo` ksv uo- i 3 AtA AW c 1- H 3 D1- o1,, Fire Prevention Planning Division Structural Permit Coordinator a DETERMINATION OF COMPLETENESS (Tues., Thurs.) Complete Comments: Incomplete DUE DATE: 07-09-13 Not Applicable Permit Center Use Only INCOMPLETE LETTER MAILED: LETTER OF COMPLETENESS MAILED: Departments determined incomplete: Bldg El Fire ❑ Ping ❑ PW ❑ Staff Initials: TUES/THURS ROUTING: Please Route Structural Review Required REVIEWER'S INITIALS: No further Review Required DATE: n APPROVALS OR CORRECTIONS: Approved Notation: Approved with Conditions DUE DATE: 08-06-13 Not Approved (attach comments) REVIEWER'S INITIALS: DATE: aPermit Center Use Only CORRECTION LETTER MAILED: "7 -,?-)---11) Departments issued corrections: Bldg Fire El Ping ❑ PW ❑ Staff Initials: Documents/routing slip.doc 2-28-02 • • PLAN REVIEW CHECKLIST - (Nonstructural) By: Date: 7—,2 �f Permit App. D/.7---/%24 IBC Edition ‘,2 & State Amend. Project title: U E0 +++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ Classify the building or portion thereof in accordance with Chapter 3 Determine the type of construction of the building in accordance with Chapter 6. Determine if the location of building on the site and clearances to property lines and other buildings on the site plan are in accordance with code provisions. Review for conformity with. General building height and area limitations in accordance with Chapter 5. L_-1eview for conformity with special detailed requirements based on use and Occupancy. ®/Review for conformity with Type of Construction requirements of Chapter 6. eView for conformity with Fire and Smoke protection features of Chapter 7. eview for conformity with requirements of interior finishes of Chapter 8. Review for conformity with requirements for fire protection systems of Chapter 9. @./Review for conformity with requirements for means of egress requirements of Chapter 10 (13 ---Review for conformity with requirements of accessibility in accordance with Chapter 11, and ICC A117.1 Review for conformity with Washington State Energy Code. ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++ ✓ In circle = topic has been reviewed for the application. X In circle = topic is not relevant to proposed scope of work. City of Tukwila Department of Community Development 6300 Southcenter Boulevard, Suite #100 Tukwila, Washington 98188 Phone: 206-431-3670 Fax: 206-431-3665 Web site: http://www.ci.tukwila.wa.us Revision submittals must be submitted in person at the Permit Center. Revisions will not be accepted through the mail, fax, etc. Date: pl - J' Plan Check/Permit Number: D13-226 ❑ Response to Incomplete Letter # ® Response to Correction Letter # 1 ❑ Revision # after Permit is Issued ❑ Revision requested by a City Building Inspector or Plans Examiner Project Name: Aveda Project Address: 211 Southcenter Mall Contact Person: 10t0-14 L -M Q-- Phone Number: 56S -114-$1216 Summary of Revision: ALT- ..O•Wt.A1114C.t C.oc2 .-C 6I2 ' t P1 :,i_r , .► V k , Summary of Revision: Included 2012 Washington State Energy Code forms in lieu 2009 forms previously submitted. Also, track lighting current limiter sizes were reduced to comply with the new requirements. RECEIVE silIt CITY OF TUk `, Sheet Number(s): 'T- I . c- F.2 1 a "Cloud" or highlight all areas of revision including date of revision Received at the City of Tukwila Permit Center by: 10 --Entered in Permits Plus on JUL 3 1 2 PERMIT CEN i cn \applications\forms-applications on line\revision submittal Created: 8-13-2004 Contractors or Tradespeople Prier Friendly Page • General/Specialty Contractor A business registered as a construction contractor with L&I to perform construction work within the scope of its specialty. A General or Specialty construction Contractor must maintain a surety bond or assignment of account and carry general liability insurance. Business and Licensing Information Name DAVID A NICE BUILDERS INC UBI No. 601735264 Phone 7575663032 Status Active Address 4571 Ware Creek Rd License No. DAVIDNB044QL Suite/Apt. License Type Construction Contractor City Williamsburg Effective Date 11/13/1996 State VA Expiration Date 4/18/2015 Zip 23188 Suspend Date County Out Of State Specialty 1 General Business Type Corporation Specialty 2 Unused Parent Company Business Owner Information Name Role Effective Date Expiration Date NICE, DAVID A Cancel Date 01/01/1980 Bond Amount NICE, DEBORAH L 4 01/01/1980 09112629 MOORE, CECILG Agent 01/01/1980 01/01/1980 Bond Information Page 1 of 2 Bond Bond Company Name Bond Account Number Effective Date Expiration Date Cancel Date Impaired Date Bond Amount Received Date 4 Fidelity Et Deposit Ins Co of Maryland 09112629 08/13/2013 Until Cancelled $12,000.00 06/06/2013 3 TRAVELERS CAS & SURETY 103067203 04/10/2002 Until Cancelled 08/13/2013 $12,000.0004/18/2002 Assignment of Savings Information No records found for the previous 6 year period Insurance Information Insurance Company Name Policy Number Effective Date Expiration Date Cancel Date Impaired Date Amount Received Date 16 Travelers Property Cas Co of A dtco125d2594phx1 07/01/2013 07/01/2014 $1,000,000.00 08/12/2013 15 Travelers Property Cas Co of A DTC0125D2594TIL1207/01/2012 07/01/2013 $1,000,000.0007/10/2012 14 Travelers Property Cas Co of A DTC0125D2594T1L1107/01/2011 07/01/2012 $1,000,000.00 07/29/2011 13 TRAVELERS PROPERTY CAS INS CO DTC0125D2594TIL 07/01/2010 07/01/2011 $1,000,000.00 07/27/2010 12 TRAVELERS PROP CAS CO OF AMER DTC0125D2594TIL0807/01/2008 07/01/2009 $1,000,000.0007/02/2009 11 TRAVELERS PROP&CAS CO OF AMER 125D2594TIL07 07/01/2006 07/01/2008 $1,000,000.00 07/09/2007 Summons/Complaint Information No unsatisfied complaints on file within prior 6 year period Warrant Information No unsatisfied warrants on file within prior 6 year period https://fortress.wa.gov/lni/bbip/Print.aspx 08/19/2013 THE ART AND SCIENCE OF PURE FLOWER AND PLANT ESSENCES Westfield Southcenter, Space No. 636, Level 1 2800 Southcenter, Tukwila, WA 98188 AVEDA - THE ENVIRONMENTAL STORY The Aveda difference is realized not just in Aveda products, but in Aveda's environments as well. Aveda has made and will continue to make every effort to ensure that its facilities have as little negative impact on the environment as possible. Aveda will stay committed to its mission by searching for the state-of- the-art in ecologically friendly materials and construction techniques. To that end, Aveda requires its contractors and suppliers to meet and/or exceed Aveda's mission by only using environmentally friendly materials that emit no or very little Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs) into the atmosphere and are solvent and formaldehyde free. Materials shall be made from rapidly renewable resources. Where hardwood or hardwood veneers are specified, they shall be FSC Certified (Forestry Stewardship Council certified wood from sustainably managed forests). Veneers shall be applied to agrifi b er board, commonly known as Wheatboard, an agriculturally based composite panel product. Paints and finishes shall be virtually free of VOCs. Tile, carpet, etc. shall be made wherever possible from recycled materials and installed with adhesives that are VOC free. PROJECT DIRECTORY GENERAL: AVEDA STORE DESIGN Jamie Sneed Director - Global Store Design & Planning 4000 Pheasant Rdge Drive Blaine, MN 55449 T: 763.951.4256 E: jsneed@ateda.com ESTEE LAUDER - Store Construction Nezifa Danishgar Corporate Store Planning & Development Estee Lauder Com pani es, Inc. 575 Broad wanly, 2nd floor New York, NY10012 1 646.613.6684 F. 646.613.6130 E: ndanishg©estee.com Erin Marcheski 1 648,613.6680 E: emarches@estee.com ARCHITECT DTM Architect 6031 1-20 West, 8ulte 260 Arlington, TX 76017 Dennis T Mitchell NCARB, AIA 1 817.265.2415 R 817.483.7377 E: OfficeReply@DtmArchitect.com DESIGN CONSULTANT Wayne Covington 304 Hudson Street, 6*' Floor New York, N Y 10013 T. 212.807.1011 x316 F. 212.807.9944 E: wcoqngtonala1iremarch .com MEP ENGINEER Larson Binkley, Inc. 310 West 20th Street, Floor 2 I<ensas City, M064108 Adrian Franks T. 816.9 97.9601 Ijn ei n) T: 816.997,9616 (direct) F. 816.997.9602 E: Adrian.Franks©larsonbinkley.oam GENERAL CONTRACTOR TBD SITE SUPERINTENDENT TBD TENANT COORDINATOR Westfield ,Southcenter 2800 Southcenter Mall Beattie, WA98188 Wayne Johnson 1 206.246.0423 0: 206.714.3485 E: w jah nson © westfield .com ESTEE LAUDERTELEPHONE Dat Pope T: 212.277.2445 E: telecomsg+estee.com ESTEE LAUDER DATA Jeff Hutson T: 631531.1226 F: 631.531.1449 E: putson@estee.com TELECOM INSTALLER B ack Box Networks Services Tony Labash National Project Manager T. 952.352.4308 F: 952.352.1719 E: ELC@blackbax.com ESTEE LAUDER LOSS PREVENTION Dierdre Lange T: 631.847.8593 F: 631.847.8590 E: dilange@estee.com Christine Plotke T: 631.847.8591 E: cplotke gestee.com OWNER VENDORS: FIXTURE CONTRACTOR TBD SIGNAGE AND STOREFRONT GRAPH ICS Si gntech D ectrical Advertising, Inc. Melissa Saltsg aver T: 619.398.1639 F: 866.618.8042 E: mseltsgaver@signtechusa.com Tracey Pichierri T: 619.778.8110 E: tpichierri @signtechusa.com LANDLORD REQUIRED VENDOFI: FIRE ALARM CONTRACTOR Guardian Security 1743 1st Ave South Seattle, WA98124 T: 888 932 2907 SPRINKLER CONTRACTOR Crown Fire Protection P.O. Box 12113 Mill Creek, WA98082 T: 425 481 7669 F: 425 481 8695 REQUIRED VENDOR LIST: NO SUBSTITUTIONS ACCEPTED A,UDIONISUAL R ayN etwork Kris Kirwvarl 1 425.629.2718 E: kkirwan ©playnetw+ark.com BARRICADE GRAPHICS Peeq Media. 30-30 47th Avenue Long Island City, NY 11101 Hare y Schneider 1 718.707.8500 C: 516.965.5 699 DOOR LOCI< HARDWARE L.I. Locksmith & Alarm Co., Inc. 85 South Terminal Drive Rain Ve , NY11803 Rch Schantz T: 516.931,2273 x124 P 516.931.2369 E: richsQIilocksmith.com LI G HTIN C Cpl tel Ught 13 Garabedian Drive Salem , NH 03079 Iiim DiMauro 1 866.419.4455 F. 775.908.9651 E: kdi m aura © Capi toI Lig ht.com LIGHT BOXES /POSTER BOXES / MISSION STATEMENT GRAPHIC Styim ark Brad Lunning T: 507.437.3 952 0: 612.803.1663 E: UUunningcgistimark.cam PAINT Glidden Paints Stephanie Litchkowski Architectural Rep 1 973.461.3467 SECURITY SYSTEMS COORDINATOR Nutech National ,Jackie Rcardo T. 800.873.2580 x1401 E: Buckie©nutechnational.com STYLING STATION CURTAIN Circle \isual Inc. 225 West 37th Street, 161h Floor New York, N Y10018-8207 Sergio Magana T: 212.719.5153 F. 212.704.0918 SALES FLOOR TILE Architectural Flooring Resource, Inc. 135 West 27th Street, 6th Floor New York, N Y10001 Sue Adam s T: 212.290.0200 P 212.290.2855 E: sue ©afrn ycom WALL PANELS Smith & Fong Com pen y 375 Oyster Point EI W . 4-3 South San Francisco, CA94080 Angus Stocks 1 866.8 35.9 859 E: angus@plyboo.com CODE ABSTRACT BUILDING: 2012 International Building Code with Washington state amendments ACCESSIBILITY: ICCMANSI A117.1 -2009, Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities, with statewide amendents ELECTRICAL: 2012 National Bectricei Code (NFPA70) with Washington state amendments MECHANICAL: 2012 International Mechanical Code with Wash ing ton state amendments PLUMBING: 2012 Uniform Rum Bing Code wish Washington state amendments FIRE: 2012 International R re Code with Washington state amendments ENERGY: 2012 Washington State Energy Code CONSTRUCTION TYPE: ISO CLASS 3, ISO TYPE II -B OCCUPANCYTYPE: M, MERCANTILE SUMMARY: NO CHANGE IN "USE' OR "EGRESS'. TENANT TO TEN ANT FIRE SEPARATION: ONE HOUR SALES/STOOK SEPARATION: NONE REQUIRED SPRINI<LER SYSTEM: FULLY SPRINT<LERED SPRINKLER SYSTEM SHALL BE FILED UNDER SEPARATE PERM IT, FIRE ALARM SHALL BE FILE UNDER SEPARATE PERMIT OCCUPANCY CALCULATIONS OCCUPANT LOAD FACTOR: 30SF BASEMENT OR GRADE FLOOR AREAS OPEN TOTHE PUBLIC 60SF AREAS ON OTHER FLOORS OPEN TO THE PUBLIC 300 SF STORAGEr'STOCI< AREAS NOT OPEN TO THE PUBLIC 100 SF OFFICE SPACE SALES FLOOR: 555 NET SF /30 SF = 19 OCCUPANTS STOCK + TOILET ROOMS: 187 NET SF /300 SF = 1 OCCUPANT TOTAL OCCUPANTS = 20 OCCUPANTS MINIMUM NO. OF EXITS: 1 REQUIRED AS OCCUPANCY IS LESSTHAN 50 PERSONS AND MAXIMUM TRAVEL DISTANCE IS LESS THAN 75 FEET. NOTE: 2 EXITS PROVIDED. MINIMUM CLEAR ABLE 'U111TH FURNISHINGS, ETC. ON ONE S IDE: 36" MINIMUM CLEAR AISLE WITH FURNISHINGS, EEC. ON BOTH SIDES: 44" ONE UNISEX TOILET HAS BEEN PROVIDED FOR EMPLOYEE USE ONE PLUMBED WATER DISPENSER SHALL BE PROVIDED. SEPARATE PERMIT REQUIRED FOR: tMechanical I!rElectrical lePlumbing C..4°6 --as Piping r':-/ of Tukwila E;tr'_.."' DIVISION SITE PLAN Westfield Southcenter 2000 SouthC rater, Tukwila, WA 93100 KEY Y P LAN N r AVEDA Space No. 636, Level 1 REVISIONS No changes shall be made to the scope of work without prior approval of Tukwila BuildingDivision. I'�rT`�: ncvisions will require new plan submittal may include additional plan review fess. INDEX TO DRAWINGS ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS T-1.0 COVER SHEET T-2.0 SCHEDULES T-2.1 RESPONSIBILITY SCHEDULE T-3.0 SPECIFICATIONS T-3.1 SPECIFICATIONS T-3.2 SPECIFICATIONS T-3.3 SPECIFICATI ON S T-3.4 SPECIFICATIONS D-1.0 DEMOLITION PLAN Ari .0 CONSTRUCTION PLAN M.1 FINISH AND POWER PLAN Ar1.2 FIXTURE PLAN A-1 .3 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN A-2.0 STOREFRONT ELEVATION AND DETAILS A-2.1 STOREFRONT DETAILS A-3.0 INTERIOR ELEVATION S A-3.1 STOCK, MANAGERS AREA& TOILET ROOM A-4.0 PARTITIONS AND INTERIOR DETAILS A-4.1 CEILING AND INTERIOR DETAILS A-4.2 SEISMIC CEILING DETAILS MEP DRAWINGS M1.0 MECHANICAL PLAN M2.0 MECHANICAL NOTES & DETAILS El .0 POWER PLAN E2.0 LIGHTING PLAN 53.0 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS E4.0 ELECTRICAL NOTES& DETAILS E5.0 EN ERG Y C OD E COM PLI AN CE FORMS P1.0 PLUMBING PLAN P2.0 PLUMBING NOTES & DETAILS FP1.0 FIRE SPRINKLER HEAD PLAN FIW COPY Permit No. kl.217 piftn rr,v&w approval is subject to errors and omissions. °.::.. .. of construction documents does not authorize t'r; roc tli"► of arty adopted code or ordinance. Receipt +�1 LvdroVGEi Field Copy + s .. Dl'a s is acknowledged: By .iliaVII l ,la Date: City Of lbkwila BUILDING DIVISION CORRECTION LTR# REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED AUG 0 2 2013 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA JUL 3 1 2013 PERMIT CENTER ARCHITECT TIJAP.CHITECT ALL RIGHTS RESERuED. 'NCI P.u,: f0F THESE DRPJ UINGSO R SP ECIFIC:A;fID NS MAYBE COP IED, REP FD DUCED OR USED IN CD NNECM N I IJITHANYIWORK, OTHER THEN THE SP ECIFIC PROJECT FORWHICH THE'i. F1,iiEBEEN PREPARED, UUITHOUT PRM i R WRITTEN AUTHORIZATION FROIA THE ARCH ITEC:T. r!14scr3 STATE OF WASMOTON 767 FIFTH AV E N U E NEW Y0 RK, NY '10153 AVEDA Westfield Southcenter 2800 Southcenter Space No. 636, Level 1 Tukwila, VVA 08188 DRAWING TITLE COVER HEEiT S I) l,i D703.13 EST FOR L+I.HDl:' RD REuEU'Jk PEFRIFB. BIG Mal .13 FilE FO R PA 'LUND FIX PRM::NV 140. DATE REUTM? 11 DRAM F(Y: DIM 1 1i EC: Kit BY: D114 0 RUG . DATE 7.3'.13 R.EA. DATE: 062.113 JD B 114 . 133] Ell EEr MI . BBLDIMO PERN T110. ABBREVIATIONS CERTAIN ABBREVIATIONS USED ON THE DRAWINGS MAY NOT BE LISTED BELOW. CONTRACTOR SHALL REQUEST CLARIFICATION FROM THE ARCHITECT IF IN DOUBT TO THE MEANING OF ANY ABBREVIATIONS if 0 ABV AC ACC ACOUST ACT AD ADD ADD'L ADH ADJ AFF ALT ALUM ANCH ANN ANOD AP APPROX APRVD ARCH ASC B/0 BAL BD BETW BKR BLDG BLKG BO BOT BRKT BTW BW C/C CEM CG CH CHAN CHR CHS Cl R CI RC CITG CJ CL CLG CLKG CLO CLR CLR OPG CM U CO COL CON CONC COND CONN CONSTR CONT CONTR CORR CSS CT CTR CW CWR CWS D DB DEG DEMO DET DF DIAM DIFF DIM DISP DIV DN DPR• DR DS DTL DWG(S) EA EB El FS EJ EL ELEC ELEV EM EM ER ENCL ENGR ENT ENTR EQ EQUIP EWC EWH EXG EXH EXIST EXP EXPN EXT EXTR FA FABR FACP FAST FD FE FEC FF FFE FF&E FGL FGR FHC FIN FIXT FL FLASH FLEX FLR FLUOR FM FO FOF FOS FP FRT FSC FSK FT FUR FURR GA GALV GB GC G FCI G FRC GL GND GR GRND GT GWB HO HD HDR HDW HDWD HEX HGR HGT HM HORIZ HR HT HTG HTR HV HVAC HVY HWH HWS ID INCAND INCL INSUL INT J -BOX JOT JST At Number; Pound Diameter; Round Above Air Conditioning Access Acoustical Acoustic Ceiling Tile Access Door; Area Drain Addendum; Addition Additional Adhesive Adjust; Adjustable; Adjacent Above Finished Floor Alternate Aluminum Anchor; Anchorage Annunciator Anodized Access Panel Approximate Approved Architect; Architectural Above Suspended Ceiling Bottom (of) Balance; Ballast Board Between Breaker Building Blocking By Others Bottom Bracket Between Back Wrap Center to Center Cement Corner Guard Coat Hook Channel Chilled Water Return Chilled Water Supply Circle; Circular; Circuit Circumference Clear Insulating Tempered Glass Control Joint Centerline; Closing; Closet Ceiling Caulking Closet Clear Clear Opening Concrete Masonry Unit Clean-out Column Construction Concrete Condenser, Conduit Connection Construction Continuous; Continue Contractor Corridor; Corrugate Countersunk Screw Ceramic Tile Center; Counter Cash Wrap Condensate Waste Return Condensate Waste Supply Deep; Depth; Drop; Drain Door Bell; Decibel Degree Demolish; Demolition Detail Drinking Fountain Diameter Diffuser Dimension Dispenser; Display Division Down Damper Door; Drain Disconnect Switch; Door Switch Detail Drawing(s) Each Expansion Bolt Exterior Insulation and Finish System Expansion Joint Elevation; Elevator Electrical Elevator; Elevation Emergency Emergency Enclosure Engineer Entry Entrance Equal Equipment Electric Water Cooler Electric Water Heater Existing Exhaust Existing Exposed Expansion Exterior Extrude Fire Alarm; Fresh Air Fabricate Fire Alarm Control Panel Fastener; Fasten Floor Drain Fire Extinguisher Fire Extinguisher Cabinet Finished Floor Finished Floor Elevation Fixtures, Furnishings & Equipment Fiberglass Fiberglass Reinforced Fire Hose Cabinet Finish; Finished Fixture Floor Flashing Flexible Floor Fluorescent Fixture Manufacturer Finished Opening; Face Of Face Of Finish Face Of Studs Fireproof Fire Retardant Treated Forestry Stewardship Council Field Sketch Foot; Feet; Fully Tempered Furred Furring Gauge; Gage Galvanized Grab Bar; Glass Block General Contractor Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter Glass Fiber Reinforced Concrete Glass Ground Grade; Grille Ground Grout Gypsum Wall Board Hollow Core; Handicapped Accessible Head; Heavy Duty Header Hardware Hardwood Hexagonal Hanger Height Hollow Metal Horizontal Hour Height; Heat Heating Heater High Voltage Heating, Ventilation & Air Conditioning Heavy Hot Water Heater Hot Water Supply Inside Diameter Incandescent Incline; Include Insulate; Insulation Interior; Internal Junction Box Junction Joist KO KP L LAM LAV LB LD LEV LH LINO LL LN LOC(S) LP LS LT LTG LVR LWC MAINT MARB MAS MATL MAX MDF MECH MED MEMB MFG MFR MIN MIR MISC MM MOV MTD MTL MULL MWC MWK N NEUT NIC NOM NTS OA OC OD OFF OH OPNG OPP OR OUT P.LAM PARTN PB PBD PERF PERIM PERP PFN PH PL PLYWD PLUMB PNL POL POS PR PREFAB PRI PROT PRSTR PT PTD PVMT PWR QUAL QTY R RA RAD RCP RD REBAR RECEPT REF REFL REFR REG REINF RELOC REQ'D RES RET REV RF RG H RH RM RO S SALV SAN SBO SC SCHED SE SEAL SEC SECT SEL SF SHT SIM SK SOH SPEC(S) SPK SPKLR SQ SS STC STD STL STO STRUCT SUSP SW SYM T TIO T&G TBD TEL TEMP TERM THK THRESH THRU TOG TOS TR TRANS TS TSL TSTAT TYP UC UL UNFIN UNO UON US VAR VB VENT VERT VEST VFY VIF VNR VOC VOL VR W W/ W/O WAINS WB WC WD WF WH WIN WP WR WRSTP WSCT VVT Knockout Kickplate Angle; Length; Long Laminate; Laminated Lavatory Pound (weight); Lag Bolt Linear Diffuser Level Left Hand Linoleum Landlord Length Locate; Location(s) Lighting Panel Loud Speaker Ught Lighting Louver Light Weight Concrete Maintenance Marble Masonry Material Maximum Medium Density Fiberboard Mechanical Medium Membrane Manufacturing Manufacturer Minimum Mirror Miscellaneous Millimeter Movable Mounted Metal Mullion Millwork Contractor Millwork North Neutral Not In Contract Nominal Not To Scale Outside Air; Overall On Center Outside Diameter Office Overhead Opening Opposite Outside Radius Outlet Plastic Laminate Partition Pull Box; Push Button Particle Board Perforated Perimeter Perpendicular Prefinished Phase; Phone Plate; Plastic Laminate Plywood Plumbing Panel Polish; Polished Point Of Sale Pair Prefabricated Primary Protection; Protective Prestressed Paint; Point Painted Pavement Power Quality Quantity Radius Return Air; Registered Architect Radius; Radiator Reflected Ceiling Plan Roof Drain; Round Reinforcing Bar Receptacle Refrigerator Reflected; Reflector Refrigerator Register; Regular Reinforce Relocate; Relocated Required Resilient Return; Retaining Reverse; Revise; Revision Roof Rough Right Hand Room Rough Opening South; Sealant; Supply Salvage Sanitary Supplied By Owner Solid Core Schedule Structural Engineer Sealant Security System Section Select Square Foot Sheet Similar Sketch; Sink Same Opposite Hand Specification(s) Speaker Sprinkler Square Stainless Steel; Set Screw; Service Sink Sound Transmission Class Standard Steel Storage Structural Suspended; Suspension Switch Symmetrical Tread; Thermostat Top (of) Tongue & Groove To Be Determined Telephone Temporary; Tempered (glass) Terminal; Terminate Thick; Thickness Threshold Through Top of Grade Top of Slab Tread; Transom Transformer, Translucent Time Switch Top of Slab Thermostat Typical Undercut Underwriters' Laboratories Unfinished Unless Noted Otherwise Unless Otherwise Noted Underside Varies Vapor Barrier Ventilate; Ventilator Vertical Vestibule Verify Verify In Field Veneer Volatile Organic Compound Volume Vapor Retarder West; Width; Watt With Without Wainscot Wood Base Water Closet Wood Wide Flange (structural steel) Water Heater; Wall Hung Window Waterproof Water Resistant Weatherstripping Wainscot Weight AVEDA ROOM FINISH SCHEDULE ROOM NAME FLOOR BASE WALLS CEILING REMARKS SALES C-03 B-1 P-6 P-7 /13-8 SEE PLANS AND ELEVATIONS FOR CLARIFICATION. SPRAY PAINT ALL NEW AND EXISTING AIR GRILLES (IF ANY) TO MATCH CEILING. STOCK C-04 B-2 P-1 ACT -1 See detail 3/ sheet A-4.0 for more information. TOILET ROOM 0-02 C-02 C-02 / P-1 ACT -1 SEE ELEVATIONS FOR CLARIFICATION AVEDA DOOR SCHEDULE DOORDOOR NO. LOCATION DIMENSIONS TYPE BUCK DETAIL FINISH (DOOR &JAMB) HARDWARE SET REMARKS 1 STOREFRONTTEMPERED (SWING) (2) 3I-0" x10-0" GLASS SEE SHT.A-2.0 GL -1, SS -1 A METAL FINISH FOR RAILS: SS -1 2 STOCKROOM (SWING) 3'-0" x 8'-8" x 1 3/4" H.M.SEE 1 /A-4.1 P-5 B 8'-10" TO TOP OF FRAME 3 TOILET ROOM EXISTING H.M. EXISTING P-4 C-1 UNDERCUT 1" ABOVE SADDLE 4 SERVICE CORRIDOR EXISTING H.M. EXISTING P-4 STOCK SIDE D-1 ENSURE DOOR COMPONENTS ARE IN PERFECT WORKING ORDER. 5 CLOSET (2)11 -5" x 8'-10" x 1 3/4" FSC - CERTIFIED SOLID CORE WD. SEE 2/A-4.1 P-6 E GR -2 Sanded Grout AVEDA HARDWARE SCHEDULE NOTES: 1. G.0 MUST ORDER CONSTRUCTION CORES AND KEYS FROM LI. LOCKSMITH AND COORDINATE RECEIPT. THIS IS AN OWNER EXPENSE. ORDER DURING FIRST WEEK OF CONSTRUCTION OR PRIOR TO STOREFRONT ORDER CONFIRMATION. 2. G.C. SHALL COORDINATE RECEIPT OF FINAL CORES AND KEYS FROM LI. LOCKSMITH PRIOR TO TURNOVER. THIS IS AN OWNER EXPENSE. 3. AT TURNOVER, G.C. SHALL REPLACE ALL CONSTRUCTION CORES WITH FINAL CORES AND KEYS. 4. WITH THE EXCEPTION OF CONSTRUCTION CORES/KEYS AND FINAL CORES/KEYS, ALL OTHER HARDWARE IS A G.C. EXPENSE. PLEASE CALL RICH SCHANTZ AT LONG ISLAND LOCKSMITH., TEL. 516-931-2273 EXT. 124 FOR MORE INFORMATION. LOCATION HARDWARE REMARKS HARDWARE SET "A" STOREFRONT SWINGING DOOR PIVOTS: C.R. LAURENCE, BRUSHED STAINLESS, SEE SHEET A-2.0 FOR MORE INFO RAILS: C.R. LAURENCE, BRUSHED STAINLESS, SEE SHEET A-2.0 FOR MORE INFO LOCK: BOTTOM RAIL LOCK CYLINDER THAT MUST ACCEPT MEDECO SERIES 31 6 -PIN IC CORE, W/ THUMB TURN ON INTERIOR. STRIKE: COMPATIBLE DUST -PROOF STRIKE, FLUSH WITH FINISHED FLOOR. FINISH: SS -1. QUANTITY: 2 PER DOOR (OPEN AND CLOSED POSITIONS) PULLS: 2 PAIR C.R. LAURENCE 12" BACK-TO-BACK DOOR PULL, #CM12X12BS, BRUSHED STAINLESS STOPS: 2 IVES FS436 US26D TRANSITION:. SCHLUTER STRIP (SCHIENE). , FINISH: SS -1 REQUIRED CYLINDER: MEDECO 31-0175-260 SEE SHEET A-2.0 FOR MORE INFO. HARDWARE SET "B" STOCKROOM SWINGING DOOR LOCK: MARKS LEVER - ENTRY FUNCTION 195-RAB-F109-26D OR LEVER THAT MUST ACCEPT MEDECO SERIES 31 INTERCHANGEABLE CORE. HINGES: (2) PAIR STANLEY BUTT HINGES FBB179 US26D CLOSER: LCN 4011DA ALUM FINISH STOP: IVES WS407CVX WALL BUMPER US26D SILENCERS: 3 CONTACT LI. LOCKSMITH FOR REQUIRED CYLINDER. HARDWARE SET "C-1" EXISTING TOILET ROOM DOOR EXISTING HARDWARE TO REMAIN. CLEAN AND REPAIR AS REQUIRED TO LIKE -NEW CONDITION. 1 Lifemaster® No VOC Interior Paint Color: Quiet Hideaway 81YY 81/016 Finish: Flat GP 9100N HARDWARE SET "D-1" EXISTING SERVICE CORRIDOR DOOR REPLACE EXISTING MORTISE LOCKSET WITH NEW STOREROOM FUNCTION MORTISE LOCKSET WITH MEDECO 31-0176-260 CYLINDER AND LEVER HANDLES. CLEAN AND REPAIR ALL OTHER HARDWARE TO LIKE - NEW CONDITION. ENSURE HARDWARE ACCEPTS MEDECO SERIES 31 6 -PIN IC CORE. HARDWARE SET "E" FLUSH CLOSET DOOR. LOCK: NONE HINGES: SOSS CONCEALED HINGES, SIZE AND QUANTITY AS REQ'D. FOR DOOR SIZE AND WEIGHT PULL: (2) SUGATSUNE SND -120/M EDGE PULL MIRROR FINISH STOPS: (2) COMPATIBLE OVERHEAD STOPS MOUNTED ON CLOSET SIDE AND SET AT 90 DEGREES. CATCH: (2) IVES 326 HEAVY DUTY MAGNETIC CATCH 673 FINISH Required Primer: Lifemaster® No VOC Interior Primer GP 9116-1200 P-5 STOCK ROOM ACCESSORIES COAT HOOK STRIPS BOBRICK B-232 X 24 24" 3 HOOK SATIN STAINLESS, SURFACE MTD., QTY: 2 P-6 TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES NOTE: ALL FINISHES SHALL BE SATIN STAINLESS STEEL ITEM MANUFACTURER! MODEL REMARKS COAT HOOK BOBRICK B-2116 INSTALL AT BACK OF DOOR, SEE ELEVATIONS GRAB BARS -- EXISTING TO REMAIN HAND DRYER XLERATOR Lifemaster® No VOC Interior Paint Color: Wentworth White 90YY 83/036 Finish: Rat GP 9100N RECESSED, PROVIDE POWER AS REQ'D. MIRROR -- Sherwin-Williams® EXISTING TO REMAIN MOP HANGER BRACKET BOBRICK B-223 X 24 24", SURFACE MOUNTED SANITARY NAPKIN DISPOSAL BOBRICK B-270 P-11 - NOT USED SURFACE MOUNTED SOAP DISPENSER -- P-15 EXISTING TO REMAIN SS SHELF BOBRICK B-295-18 Required Primer: Lifemaster® No VOC Interior Primer GP 9116-1200 SURFACE MOUNTED TOILET PAPER HOLDER -- EXISTING TO REMAIN TOILET SEAT COVER DISPENSER 1 -- EXISTING TO REMAIN REVIE CODE C APP AUG City o BUILDIN AVEDA FINISH SCHEDULE SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR ADDITIONAL NOTES hi 1/ DESIGNATION MATERIAL MANUFACTURER SPECIFICATION REMARKS CEILING ACT -1 Seismic Acoustic Tile x 5/8" system Armstrong® Seismic Rx® code compliant Suspension eav-Duty typet ystem - Prelude® XL® 15/16" HRC Exposed Tee System, %Mt Dune #1774 HRC ceng tiles NO SUBSTITUTIONS ALLOWED. G.C. must install per manufacturer provided instructions conforming with ASCE/SEI 7-05 and all other local codes. BASEB-i Recessed Aluminum Fry Reglet 4" tall x 5/8" deep DRMB-625-400 recessed base, shop primed, paint P-6 See detail 3/ sheet A-4.0 for more information. B-2 Resilient Rubber Johnsonite® 4" Traditional Wall Base with Standard Toe, Color: 028 Medium Grey See detail 3/ sheet A-4.0 for more information. WALL W-2 Bulletin Board Forbo Frameless Marmoleum® Bulletin Board, Color: 2067 See sheet A -3.i for quantity and size. Wall mounted with high strength mastic, canvas surface towartis wall. No visible fasteners. W-3 NAUF MDF Regionally sourced within 500 miles of job site. No Added Urea -Formaldehyde (Formaldehyde -free MDF) NO SUBSTITUTIONS ALLOWED. W-4 Vertical Grain Deco Palm Panels Durapalm®, Smith & Fong 3/4" x 6" x 48" Reclaimed sugar deco palm wall panels, SP-648PPN-SG. Provide finished trim as required for all exposed edges. Flame spread rating: Class B Ensure color and finish of all panels match. Panels with deviations in color shall be replaced. Fixture manufacturer must order through Aveda portal. SF -i Applied Clay Finish American CIa/ Finish: EnjarreTM, Custom Color: #128 (Aveda) Subcontractor must be trained clay installer. G.C. to coordinate with American Clay. Provide 2 coats penetrating sealer, see specifications for more information. GLASS ____________ GL -i Storefront Glass Regionally sourced within 500 miles of job site. Low -iron tempered glass Mth polished edges Glass thickness as required, 1/2" mm. See specifications for more information. FLOORING 0-01 - NOT USED 0-02 Toilet Room Thin Set Tile Daltile® Colour SchemeTM Solid Field Tile, Color: Desert Gray B905 Floor I Wall: 6" x 6" nominal Base: 6" x 12" Cove Wall Base Wainscot: 3" x 12" Bullnose Grout: GR -2 0-03 Sales Floor Tile Impronta Ceramiche / Italgraniti 12" x 24" Urbana UR0463 Rectified tile, Color: Wenge Grout: GR -i, ii8 max. grout lines. 0-04 Linoleum Forbo Marmoleum® Composition Tile MCT 3048, Color: Graphite NO SUBSTITUTIONS ALLOWED. GR -i Cementitious Grout LATICRETE® LATICRETE® PermaColorTM Grout, Color: #22 - Midnight Black NO SUBSTITUTIONS ALLOWED. 1,8" max. grout lines. Provide packaing to Architect during punch visit. Immediately after drying, flooring must be covered with kraft paper and masonite for duration of the project. GR -2 Sanded Grout Bostik® Hlroment Ceramic Tile Grout (Sanded) Standard Series Color: Shadow Toilet Room. PAINT P-1 Paint Glidden ProfesslonalTM Lifemaster® No VOC Interior Paint Color: Quiet Hideaway 81YY 81/016 Finish: Eggshell GP 9300 Required Primer: Lifemaster® No VOC Interior Primer GP 9116-1200 P-2 - NOT USED P-3 Paint Glidden ProfessionalTM Lifemaster® No VOC Interior Paint Color: Quiet Hideaway 81YY 81/016 Finish: Flat GP 9100N Required Primer: Lifemaster® No VOC Interior Primer GP 9116-1200 P-4 Paint Glidden ProfessionalTM Lifemaster® No VOC Interior Paint Color: Quiet Hideaway 81YY 81/016 Finish: Semi -Gloss GP 9200N Required Primer: Lifemaster® No VOC Interior Primer GP 9116-1200 P-5 Paint Glidden ProfessionalTM Lifemaster® No VOC Interior Paint Color: Bark 70YR 09/086 Finish: Semi -Gloss GP 9200N Required Primer: Lifemaster® No VOC Interior Primer GP 9116-1200 P-6 Paint Glidden ProfessionalTM Lifemaster® No VOC Interior Paint Color: Bark 70YR 09/086 Finish: Eggshell GP 9300 Required Primer: Lifemaster® No VOC Interior Primer GP 9116-1200 P-7 Paint Glidden ProfessionalTM Lifemastee® No VOC Interior Paint Color: Bark 70YR 09/086 Finish: Flat GP 9100N Required Primer: Lifemaster® No VOC Interior Primer GP 9116-1200 P-8 Paint Glidden ProfessionalTM Lifemaster® No VOC Interior Paint Color: Wentworth White 90YY 83/036 Finish: Rat GP 9100N Required Primer: Lifemaster® No VOC Interior Primer GP 9116-1200 P-9 Shop Finish Sherwin-Williams® SHER-WOOD® Pigmented Conversion Varnish Color: Warm White H66W28 Finish: Low Gloss Must be odorless when delivered to site. MDF must be presealed with vinyl sealer reduced 50-100% prior to the application of the required primer: Kemvar® Primer Surfacer E63W5 P-10 Paint Glidden ProfessionalTM Lifemaster® No VOC Interior Paint Color: Forest Black 30YY 10/038 Finish: Flat GP 9100N Required Primer: Lifemaster® No VOC Interior Primer GP 9116-1200 P-11 - NOT USED P-12 - NOT USED to b P-13 - NOT USED P-14 - NOT USED P-15 Paint Glidden ProfessionalTM Lifemaster® No VOC Interior Paint Color: Cielo Blanco 43YY 81/051 Finish: Eggshell GP 9300 Required Primer: Lifemaster® No VOC Interior Primer GP 9116-1200 METAL AL -1 Clear Anodized Aluminum SF -2 Powder Coated Brake Metal Powdercoat color: #RAL 8028 Finish: To match Benjamin Moore Pearl finish Storefront brake metal panels, .063 MIN. THICKNESS. G.C. must provide sample for approval prior to fabrication. SS -1 Non -directional brushed Stainless Steel All storefront hardware and rails. SS -2 Stainless Steel with low luster clear coat FURNISHING Anti -Fatigue Mat Polypropylene Fiber Mat The Matworks Company LLC Matworks Preference Eze, with ADA beveled border, Color: Chocolate Mat shall be full length of cashwrap. Depth determined by locating 1" from kick of millwork bases. Styling Station rtain & Track Flame Retardant Fringe Curtain Circle Visual Inc. Curtain: Single layer tan fringe curtain with button holes @ 8" O.C. and within 1" of each curtain end, Treated with FlamecheckTM Flame Retardant. Conforms to NFPA 701 Small Scale, Class A, ASTM E84, and CA Technical Bulletin 117E per manufacturer. Provide certificate once the curtain has been treated, if required. Height of curtain to be 1/4" above finished floor when installed. G.C. to field cut with very sharp scissors. One curtain required, with a width of 2x the curtain track length @ styling station. See RCP for track length and location. NOTE: LEAD TIME 16 6-8 WEEKS. ciTyRjugi!IEolizu D FOR MPLIANC; OVED 2 2013 Tukwila DIVISIO Anodized Aluminum Curtain Track www.Curtain- Tracks.com Track: RECMAR 3120 Extra Heavy Duty SIideRiteTM curtain track with black end cap, Finish: 84- Black anodized Carriers: RECMAR 7140 large double wheel carriers with RECMAR 7142 stainless steel curtain hooks, 20 each NOTE: PROVIDE FLAME SPREAD RATING CERTIFICATE FOR ALL COMBUSTIBLE MATERIALS. PERMIT C: D WILA 2013 NTER ARCHITECT iilf\kl,e-MARCHITECT ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. NO PART OF THESE DRAWINGS OR SPECIFICATIONS MAYBE COPIED, REPRODUCED OR USED IN CONNECTION WITH ANY WORK, OTHER THEN THE SPECIFIC PROJECT FOR WHICH THEY HAVE BEEN PREPARED, WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN AUTHORIZATION FROM THE ARCHITECT. AVEDA THE ART AND SCIENCE OF PURE FLOWER AND PLANT ESSENCES 767 FIFTH AVENUE NEW YORK, NY 10153 DRAWING TITLE SCHEDULES FZ EN/ I 3I C) NJ AVEDA Westfield Southcenter 2800 Southcenter Space No. 636, Level 1 Tukwila, WA 98188 DRAWING TITLE SCHEDULES FZ EN/ I 3I C) NJ 06.28.13 ISSUE FOR LANDLORD REVIEW PERMIT & BID 06.21.13 ISSUE FOR MILLWORK PRICING NO, DATE REVISION DRAWN BY: DTM CHECKED BY: DTM ORIG. DATE: 06.28.13 REV. DATE: 06.28.13 JOB NO. 1330 SHEET NO. T 2 0 BUILDING PERMIT NO. RES PO i •GSI LIT I ScH GIJULE UNLESS BE THE ANY A BID. COORDINATE DRAWINGS SPECIFICALLY STATED RESPONSIBILITY OF THE DISCREPANCIES BETWEEN ANY DISCREPANCIES MEANING ALL OWNER'SVENDORS AND NOT PER VENDORS IN THIS SCHEDULE, THE RE GENERAL CONTRACTOR (GISCOPE OF DOCUMENTS C ) R CIFICATIONS R ADD TIONAL IINFORMATION.ITHE G C F NDS SHALL . EFERTO S EO THIS SCHEDULE AND THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS, NOTIFY OWNER OR ARCHITECT PRIOR TO SUBMITTING THE MORE EXPENSIVE) NOT CLARIFIED SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OFTHE G.C.. THE G.C. SHALL AND SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE TO INSTALL ALLVENDOR ITEMS AS INDICATED ON CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS. IF DISCREPANCIES OCCUR, G.C. SHALL STOP VENDOR AND CONTACT OWNER OR ARCHITECT. h ITEM OWNER FURNISH OWNER INSTALL G.C. FURNISH G.C. INSTALL F.M. FURNISH F.M. INSTALL REMARKS :C: - I o w ITEM OWNER FURNISH OWNER INSTALL G.C. FURNISH G.C. INSTALL F.M. FURNISH F.M. INSTALL REMARKS ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. NO PART OF THESE DRAWINGS OR SPECIFICATIONS MAYBE COPIED, REPRODUCED OR GENERAL Receiving & unloading millwork items FOR WHICH THEY HAVE BEEN PREPARED, WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN AUTHORIZATION FROM THE ARCHITECT. NO. X REVISION FIXTURING, MILLWORK, FURNISHINGS, &EQUIPMENT Perimeter millwork fixtures on sales floor ORIG. DATE: 06.28.13 REV. DATE: 06.28.13 JOB NO. 1330 SHEET NO. 1.1112 ■ X X G.C. to provide final plumbing and power connection, and all F.R.T. blocking,requiredper etc. as to install code. & unloading Owner furnished items X Permits & Fees X X Allpermits, fees, etc. shall be direct billed to Owner without mark-up. Freestanding floor fixtures on sales floor X X Wall mounted graphics at sales floor X X By Owner vendor. Vendor shall verify w/ Owner prior to fabrication. Shop drawings & Submittals X X Professional Cleaning X X G.C. shall be responsible for cleaning all work of all trades, including Owner provided work before turning over project to Owner. USE ONLY ENVIRONMENTALLY GREEN PRODUCTS THAT ARE EITHER GREEN SEAL OR GREENGUARD APPROVED. Anti -Fatigue mat [AFMAT] X X At cashwrap. See finish schedule. Coordinate size w/ fixtures.. Curtain, curtain track & hardware X X At styling station. See finish schedule. Wall panels X X F.M. to order from Owner vendor. G.C. to coordinate install and provide F.R.T. blocking, finished GWB substrate, etc, as required. Trash removal / Dumpsters X X Aroma diffuser N/A Weekly digital site photos X Photos showing previous week's work shall be emailed to the Architect for distribution on each Monday. Manager's desk X X F.R.T. blocking, etc. as required to install. All stockroom and storage closet shelving X X F.R.T. blocking, etc. as required to install. Safe X X G.C. to bolt safe to floor. Refrigerator & microwave X X Metal lockers X X DEMOLITION Demolition X X See sheet D-1.0 for more info. Recycling bins X X Protection from the elements N/A Plumbed water cooler X X X G.C. to provide plumbing and power connection, final connection by Owner vendor. Barricade graphics X X ByOwner vendor: G.C. to coordinate install. See sheet D-1.0 for more info Bulletin board [W-2] X X Temporary barricade X X Stockroom ladder X X Removal of temporary barricade X X Stockroom coat rack X X See sheet T-2.0 Removal of small window graphics N/A Toilet room accessories X X See sheet T-2.0 Removal of large visual graphics N/A ROOFING Any and all roofing / deck work required for HVAC, including roofing repair and patching as required for HVAC / plumbing, etc. X X See MEP and Structural drawings for more info. G.C. must use Landlord required contractors. PLUMBING & SPRINKLERS (SEE MEP DRAWINGS) Water service X X All connections to water service as required. Rough -in & all final connections X X Water meter X X See Mechanical drawings for location, if required. Water heaters (tank / instantaneous) X X STOREFRONT Entrance system/ doors & all related hardware X X All piping & connections X X Storefront glazing & hardware X X See sheet A-2.0 for more info. All plumbing fixtures & hardware within millwork fixtures at sales floor X X G.C. to provide final plumbing connection, and all work as shown on sheet P1.0. Roll -down security grilles N/A Steel for sliding doors N/A All other plumbing fixtures & hardware X X Including lavatory, toilet, mop sink, spigot, etc. Concrete curb N/A Sprinkler main X G.C.'s sprinkler subcontractor shall submit to DoB for permit upon award of contract. Signage X X X By Owner's sign vendor. G.C. to coordinate install and provide power where required; Vendor responsible for final connection. Sprinkler heads & branch lines X X G.C.'s sprinkler subcontractor to be approved by Landlord. All shop drawings, permitting, etc. by G.C. Window graphics X X By Owner's sign vendor. Blade sign X X Sprinkler pump X X See Mechanical drawings for location, if required.' All steel / light gauge framing X X All other work as indicated on Engineer's drawings X X Blocking / metal grounds X X All wood used as blocking shall be Fire -Retardant Treated Brake metal panels & base X X Applied clay finish [SF -1] X X ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS) Electrical service X X From landlord connection, see Electrical drawings. Walk -off mat at entry N/A quipment rough -in &finish X X Transition strips / saddles X X Current limiter panel X X Patching / repairing of all Landlord elements X X Including bulkhead, floor finish, neutral pier, etc. so like -new. Telephones, wiring & terminations X X Provide conduits & pull -strings. Light fixtures, lamps, track & all track com p components X X Owner vendor to furnish only, see light fixture schedule on Electrical drawings. G.C. to provide all final hook-ups, power, etc. INTERIOR Gypsum board ceilings X X See sheets A-4.1 &A-4.2 for more info. Access doors & panels X X Finish by G.C. to match adjacent surface. Hand dryer X X In toilet room, Owner vendor to furnish only ACT ceilings X X See sheets A-4.1 & A-4.2 for more info. Aiming of light fixtures X X As directed by Owner at turnover. Metal grounds for all Trades X X As required for blocking above ceiling, or where shown. Audio system wiring, speakers & equipment X X X By Owner vendor. G.C. to coordinate install and provide conduits and pull -strings where indicated, and F.R.T. blocking as required to install per code. Miscellaneous metals X X As required to meet design intent. Partitions / Metal studs X X Includes demising walls, see sheets A-1.0 & A-4.0 Video screens & equipment N/A Furred walls X X Power outlets & light switches / dimmers X X See Electrical drawings. Insulation (sound / thermal) X X See specifications. Security system X X X G.C. to coordinate install and provide backer boxes & conduits. Fireproofing & Firestopping X X As required. Waterproofing membrane X X Turned up 6" at all adjoining walls. Computer system wiring X X Self -leveling flooring/ underlayment under all tile X X Provide across entire sales floor for level finish. P.O.S. equipment X X G.C. to provide conduits & pull strings where indicated. All concrete work X X G.C. to provide all work (trenching / core drilling, cutting, patching & repairing, etc.) required for installation of floor boxes, conduit, plumbing, etc Power receptacles & boxes X X See drawings for receptacles within F.M. provided millwork. g p G.C. to provide stub -ups, wiring and final hook-up. Re -grading of storefront concrete for floor slope X X Doors must swing unimpeded. See sheet A-2.0. All tie-ins to mall systems X X As required. Expansion joints & covers N/A All other work as indicated on Engineer's drawings X X Sales floor tile X X ' G.C. to order from Owner vendor. All other flooring X X Wall base throughout X X LIFE SAFETY Fire alarm system & all devices X X See Mechanical drawings for location, if required.) G.C. responsible for shop drawings, permitting, etc. Finish concrete surfaces N/A Painting X X All other work as indicated on Engineer's drawings X X All interior doors, frames & hardware X X Rough & finish carpentry X X Fire extinguishers, FE. cabinets & signage X X Per drawings, or as required by local authorities. Handicap accessibility signage X X H.V.A.C. (SEE MEP DRAWINGS) HVAC ductwork & Air balancing X X Air Balancing by independent contractor. Building Department required signage X X Thermostats X X Programmable with clear plastic lockable cover. All work related to supports required for fixtures, storefront entry, etc. X X All wiring &controls X X HVAC equipment & all accessories X X All supports required for HVAC & Electrical installation X X Smoke detectors X X ¢" ' . EVIEWED E COMPLIAN FOR shown, or as required by code. Hangers, etc. X X f, - APPROVED Insulation X X N AUG RECEIVED STRUCTURAL All work related to structural supports required for fixtures, storefront entry, etc. X X Diffusers, Grilles, Exhaust fans, etc. X if X < 0 2 2013 CITY OF TUKWILA All other work as indicated on Engineer'sX drawings g X k t., ¢� City of ILDING Tukwila DIVISION JUL U 2 2013 PERMIT CLENTER All structural work required to complete HVAC & Electrical installation X X t ell ".11.2"" T4) (19 SEAL ' WNER AV E DA THE MT AND SCIENCE OF PURE FLOWER AND PLANT ESSENCES 767 FIFTH AVENUE NEW YORK, NY 10153 AVEDA Westfield Southcenter 2800 Southcenter Space No. 636, Level 1 Tukwila, WA 98188 DRAWING TITLE RESPONSIBILITY SCHEDULE RE` 'ISI'DN8 ARCHITECT d ti g h a C] r+ V U co`Rr-M w d - off t - I— :C: - I o w z�' off. " 1— - Cr6 I-UJM NO_' a: ic ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. NO PART OF THESE DRAWINGS OR SPECIFICATIONS MAYBE COPIED, REPRODUCED OR USED IN CONNECTION WITH ANY WORK, OTHER THEN THE SPECIFIC PROJECT FOR WHICH THEY HAVE BEEN PREPARED, WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN AUTHORIZATION FROM THE ARCHITECT. NO. SEAL ' WNER AV E DA THE MT AND SCIENCE OF PURE FLOWER AND PLANT ESSENCES 767 FIFTH AVENUE NEW YORK, NY 10153 AVEDA Westfield Southcenter 2800 Southcenter Space No. 636, Level 1 Tukwila, WA 98188 DRAWING TITLE RESPONSIBILITY SCHEDULE RE` 'ISI'DN8 06.28.13 ISSUE FOR LANDLORD REVIEW, PERMIT & BID 06.21.13 ISSUE FOR MILLWORK PRICING NO. DATE REVISION DRAWN BY: DTM CHECKED BY: DTM ORIG. DATE: 06.28.13 REV. DATE: 06.28.13 JOB NO. 1330 SHEET NO. 1.1112 ■ BUILDING PERMIT NO. SPECIFICATIONS: ENVIRONMENTAL GOALS FOR THE PROJECT A. Overall project goals: The Owner has established the following environmental goals for the Project based on Aveda's Mission: "Our mission at Aveda is to care for the world we live in, from the products we make to the ways in which we give back to society. At Aveda, we strive to set an example for environmental leadership and responsibil- ity, not just in the world of beauty, but around the world." Aveda's Environmental Sustainability Vision is based on the belief that profit and environmental responsibil- ity will increasingly work together as more industries find out that Mature works" for both sustainability and the bottom-line. At Aveda, we see the sustainability challenge as one of protecting biodiversity. The following six issues as the main threat to protecting biodiversity: Global climate change Water pollution Habitat destruction Air pollution Toxins in the environment Waste generation The specifications and guidelines that follow address one or more of how the building construction industry can positively affect one or more of these six issues. Notify Owner and Architect if conflicts arise between performance of the work and environmental goals. This specification is not intended to limit alterna- tive means of achieving these goals. Creative and cost-effective solutions, suggestions and input from the Contractor(s) for implementing these goals are encouraged. 1. Use resources effectively. The construction, operation, and ultimately reuse or removal of the building should be optimized to eliminate unnecessary use of energy, water, and raw materials. As such, the tenant improvement s have been designed to: a. Require a minimum of imported, nonrenewable energy. b. Require a minimum of imported or mined water. c. Support occupant efforts to recycle and reuse materials. d. Be durable and consistent with expected current and future uses. e. Utilize materials and construction methods that require a minimum of energy, water, and raw materi- als. f. Be reusable and or recyclable in whole or in component parts. 2. Provide a healthy and productive indoor environment to the extent that the building can affect their experience, occupants should be enlivened, relaxed, and stimulated when they are in the building. To this end, the building has been designed to: a. Minimize the potential for water accumulation in conditions in which mold and mildew can flourish. b. Utilize daylight as a primary source of illumination, while minimizing glare and extreme contrast, wheneverpossible. ossible. c. Provide optimal amounts of clean, fresh air to occupied spaces, whenever possible. a d. Release a minimum of unhealthy pollutants from building components, fixtures, and furnishings. e. Evacuate effectively any pollutants generated by occupant activities in the building. f. Provide views and experiences of nature. g. Provide an aural environment that is relaxing and supportive. 3.Enhance, restore, and protect the site the insertion of the building into the site should support and enhance the natural systems on and around the affected area. To this end, the building, infrastructure, and landscaping have been designed to: a. Support and utilize natural water flow patterns and minimize the need for intrusive storm water management systems. b. Support native plants and the habitat they create for beneficial insects, birds, and animals. c. Minimize the release of harmful emissions into the soil, water, and air. 4. Enhance, restore, and protect the global environment the building is designed to minimize releases of pollutants that affect the global environment and to avoid the need for materials that are polluting to man- ufacture. These measures include: a. Minimizing the release of carbon dioxide (CO2) from fuels burned on site or fuels burned off site to supply electricity to the building b. Avoiding the release of ozone-depleting compounds, such as HCFC's from refrigerants or foam insulation materials c.Selection of building materials that, based on an overall life -cycle assessment, are the least damaging to the environment in their extraction, processing, use, and ultimate, disposal B.Material selection and construction process goals: In support of the overall goals listed above, the follow- ing goals have been identified for the material selection and construction process. These are also general in nature and should be considered as a guideline in the event of a conflict, any specific requirements in techni- cal specification sections take precedence. Tradeoffs and compromises are inevitable in the pursuit of these goals, but everyone working on the project is expected to take all reasonable actions to further these goals. Notify Owner and Architect of any performance requirements that conflict unnecessarily with these goals. 1. Use resources effectively: a. Reuse existing buildings and materials, whenever possible. b. Select materials that use resources effectively. c. Use construction practices that achieve the most efficient use of resources and materials. d. Recycle or reuse job -site waste. e. Select recycled -content materials. f. Select materials that can be reused or recycled. 2. Avoid scarce, irreplaceable, or endangered resources: a. Select materials from abundant, well-managed resources. b. Select materials that are replaceable, renewable, or can be replenished. c. Select materials that minimize damage to natural habitats. 3. Use durable materials: a. Select materials with the longest usable life. b. Select materials that can be reused. c. Select materials with the least burdensome maintenance requirements. 4. Create spaces that are healthy for occupants: a. Select low -toxic products and materials. b. Select materials without toxic maintenance requirements. c. Specify mechanical equipment that will provide fresh air and will not trap water or pollutants. 5. Use energy efficiently: a. Select materials with low embodied energy. b. Select materials that save energy during building operations. c. Select products and equipment that save energy during building operations. 6. Use water efficiently: a. Use construction practices that achieve the most efficient use of water. b. Select water -conserving appliances and equipment. c. Landscape for water conservation. d. Capture and utilize rainwater. 7. Select materials that generate the least amount of pollution. Consider pollution and toxins generated during harvesting, mining, manufacturing, transport, installation, use, and disposal. 8. Protect/restore natural habitats. I. ENVIRONMENTAL GOALS IMPLEMENTATION A. Contractor shall designate an on-site party (or parties) responsible for instructing workers and overseeing the Environmental Goals for the Project. B. Distribution: The Contractor shall distribute copies of the Environmental Goals to the Job -Site Foreman, each Subcontractor, the Owner, and the Architect. C. Meetings: Environmental Goals shall be discussed at the following meetings: 1. Pre-bid meeting 2. Pre -construction meeting 3. Regular job -site meetings II. CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT ENVIRONMENTAL CONSIDERATIONS A. Qualities: Most building materials are highly recyclable. B. Problems 1. Construction waste accounts for 35% of materials going into our USA landfills. 2. A new retail project typically generates over 10 pounds of waste per square foot. C. Recommendations 1. Provide a Waste Management Plan to reduce, salvage and recycle construction waste. 2. Separate all valuable construction materials listed below. 3. Contract with a recycling contractor if required. A hauler should be hired that separates recyclables off site and provides a report as to how much was recycled and where it went, usually measured in volume or weight. 4. Partner with local or regional not -for profit or for profit architectural salvage organizations 5. Partner with local or regional industrial recycling companies D. RESOURCES 1. Business for Social Responsibility: www.bsrorg/BSRServices/Environment.cfm 2. Grass Roots Recycling Network, promotes zero waste initiatives: www.grrn.org 3. Salvaged Building Materials Exchange (Sellers and Buyers): www.grenguide.com/exchange 4. Used Building Materials Association represents firms nationwide that deconstruct retail used building materials. For current contact information: www.ubma.org 5. The ReUse Center: deconstruction and donation based resale business: www.greeninstitute.org 6. National Recycling Coalition: www.nrc-recycle.org 7. WasteSpec, Triangle J Council of Governments, PO Box 12276, Research Triangle Park, NC 27709: www.tjcog.dstnc.us/cdwaste.htm 8. U.S Environmental Protection Agency's C&D Debris Web pages: www.epa.gov/epaoswer/non-hw/ debris 9. AIA Masterspec Section 01524, ARCOM, 332 East 500 South, Salt Lake City, UT 84111-3309; 800- 424-5080; www.arcomnet.com E. RELATED T .FFD TM CREDITS Materials & Resources -- Credit 2 -- Construction Waste Management Materials & Resources -- Credit 3 -- Resource Reuse III. WASTE MANAGEMENT GOALS FOR THE PROJECT PART 1- GENERAL A. The Owner has established that this Project shall minimize the creation of construction and demolition waste on the job site. [Contributing factors include over -packaging, ordering error, poor planning, improper storage, breakage, mishandling, and contamination.] Recycle as many of the waste materials as economically feasible. Minimize waste sent to landfills. B. Diversion Goals: A minimum of 70% of total project waste shall be diverted from landfill. The following waste categories, at a minimum, shall be diverted from landfill: 1. Clean dimensional wood, pallet wood 2. Plywood, OSB, and particleboard 3. Concrete 4. Bricks 5. Concrete Masonry Units (CMU's) 6. Ceramic tile 7. Stone flooring tile 8. Cardboard, paper, packaging 9. Metals 10. Gypsum drywall 11. Paint 12. Glass (float, tempered) 13. Plastics 14. Carpet and pad 15. Beverage containers 16. Cabinetry, built-ins 17. Architectural hardware and accessories 18. Light fixtures 19. Aluminum conduit 20. PVC coated copper (electrical wires) 21. Insulation 22. HVAC duct work, grilles, diffusers 23. Plumbing fixtures, rough -ins, valves, pipes. C. G.C. to provide a breakdown recycling report, showing the percentage and weight/volume of recycled materials and their final location. IV RELATED SECTIONS A.Section 2 Demolition/Dismantling/Salvage V. SUBMITTALS A. Waste Management Plan: Prior to any waste removal, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner a Waste Management Plan. The Plan shall contain the following: 1. Designation of the party who will implement the plan 2. Analysis of the estimated job -site waste to be generated, including types and quantities (use Appendix A Waste Material Estimating Sheet) 3. Proposed Alternatives to Landfilling: a list of each material planned to be salvaged or recycled during the course of the Project and the proposed destination of each material (use Appendix A - Waste Material Estimating Sheet) B. Progress Reports: Submit monthly, a Waste Management Progress Report. The report shall contain the fol- lowing information: 1. Project title, name of company completing report, and dates of period covered by the report 2. Amount (in tons or cubic yards) of material landfilled from the Project and identity of the landfill 3. For each material recycled or salvaged from the Project, provide the following: a. Amount (in tons or cubic yards) b. Date(s) removed from the job site c. Receiving parties d. Cost: Bin rental, hauling, and facility fees e. What was done with the material 4. Include legible copies of on-site logs, manifests, weight tickets, and receipts. Manifests shall be from recycling and/or disposal site operators who can legally accept the materials for the purpose of reuse, recycling, or disposal. VI. PROJECT MEETINGS A. Waste management plans and implementation shall be discussed at the following meetings: 1. Pre-bid meeting 2. Pre -construction meeting 3. Regular job -site meetings VII. PRE -QUALIFIED CONSTRUCTION WASTE RECYCLING SERVICES A. GC shall inquire with the Landlord and Local Building Department Authorities for local recyling services, waste processors, etc. and shall engage their services and use their facilities as is required. [List waste proces- sors who can meet the project's requirements. VIII. WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN IMPLEMENTATION A. Coordinate waste materials handling and separation for all trades, and document results of the Waste Management Plan. B. Provide separation, handling, transportation, recycling, salvage, and landfilling for all demolition and waste materials. C. Designate a specific area for separation of material for salvage and recycling. Recycling and waste bin areas are to be kept neat and clean and clearly marked in order to avoid contamination or mixing materials. D. Maintain an on-site log, which includes for each load of materials removed from site: type of material, load volume and/or weight, recycling/hauling service, date accepted by recycling service or landfill, and facility fee. Use Appendix B - Landfill Log and Appendix C - Waste Diversion Log. E. Do not handle, separate, store, salvage, or recycle hazardous materials with other materials. Follow mate- rial -specific instructions any hazardous materials. Contact Project Manager if no instructions are evident. DIVISION 1: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS I. GENERAL: A. The MA General Conditions of the Contract for Construction and the Owner's Project Manual and' Supplementary General Conditions shall be part of these documents. These General Requirements are intended to supplement and, where more stringent, supersede the "General Conditions" and "Supplementary General Conditions". B. The Work of this Project is to be performed under separate contracts in accordance with Section II below. Where "Contractor" is referred to in the "General Conditions," the "Supplementary General Conditions" and the "General Requirements" it shall refer to each prime Contractor unless specifically noted otherwise. C. The General Contractor shall be solely responsible for obtaining and paying for all required permits,controlled inspections, other agency approvals and shall schedule all required inspections and obtain all required final sign -offs for project completion. Copies of all transactions shall be forwarded to the Architect. D. All Work, procedures and materials shall comply with applicable codes and regulations. E. All Work, procedures and materials shall comply with the requirements of the Lease. It is the Contractors' responsibility to obtain a copy of such requirements. Where requirements conflict with those herein, the more strin- gent and/or expensive shall apply. F. All Work shall be installed in accordance with the Contract Documents, manufacturers' latest printed instruc- tions, and accepted trade standards, unless more stringent methods are specified herein or shown on the Drawings. Work shall be installed in an environmentally safe method as described above and within these specifications. G. Prior to submitting a bid, the Contractor shall thoroughly examine the site of Work, including access thereto, to familiarize himself with all relevant existing conditions. Lack of familiarity with such conditions will not be grounds for "extras" during construction. H. After construction begins, the General Contractor shall provide weekly digital site photos on each Friday show- ing previous week's work along with the construction schedule reflecting any revisions made during the week. I. The contactor shall have an authorizied respresentative present at the project site who shall be responsible for receiving all materials delivered in connection with the Project. The Owner, Landlord nor Building Management shall have no responsibility for such deliveries. J. Supervision by the Contractor: The contractor shall be represented at the Project Site by a qualified superinten- dent who shall be empowered to act on behalf of the Contractor. The superintendent shall not be changed during the Project except at the request of the Owner. The superintendent shall be experienced in directing Work comparable to the Project. The superintendent shall be responsible for: management of all aspects of the work, including a weekly meeting to review job progress; establishing and maintaining a clean and safe working environment; transmiting all Field Directives and instructions issued by the architect; complying with all Federal, State and local code and/or regulations; layout and complete coordination of Contractor and Owners Vendor's work, including all Mechanical and Electrical trades; confirming exectured work complies with the contract documents; removal and replacement of work installed which does not comply with the contract documents. II. SEPARATE CONTRACTS AND OWNER'S WORK: A. B. C. D. E. The Work of this Project shall be performed under two prime contracts: "General Construction Contract" and "Fixture Contract". The Contractor for General Construction is referred to as the "Contractor", "General D. Contractor" or "GC". The contractor for Fixture Construction is referred to as the "Fixture Manufacturer", "FM.", "Millwork Contractor" or "MWC". All Work described in the Contract Documents shall be included in the General Construction Contract unless specifically indicated otherwise on the Responsibility Schedule or elsewhere in the documents. The GC shall be solely responsible for coordination and sequencing of all Work. A. The Fixture Manufacturer and the Contractor shall coordinate their work with the Owner's contractors as required to incorporate and integrate the Work into the Project, including but not limited to coordination of B. schedule to ensure that all wiring runs are concealed. Provide cutouts and plywood panels as required to mount C. and recess Owner's equipment. The Contractor & Fixture Manufacturer shall each fully coordinate his work with the work of the other and with D. the work of the Owner. The GC shall have the ultimate responsibility to coordinate, schedule and sequence all the work. E. Responsibility Schedule: Unless explicitly stated in this schedule or by note within these Construction Documents, the entire scope of Work represented by these Construction Documents is the sole responsibility of F. the General Contractor. G. be followed: 1. Notify the Landlord and obtain the Landlord's written permission. 2. If required by the Landlord, use Landlord approved sub -contractors. 3. Match existing adjacent construction. Provide a complete, watertight installation, including but not limited to roofing, flashing, & pitch pockets, that will not affect the guarantee on the existing roof or new roof over storefront/entry (if applicable). 4. See M.E.P. drawings for additional notes. Miscellaneous Non-structural Patching: 1. Patch all disturbed surfaces to match existing adjacent surfaces. VIII. RUBBISH REMOVAL III. SUBMITTALS: A. B. C. D. E. F. G. The General Contractor shall provide adequate numbers of heavy duty containers and locate as appropriate for collection and removal of waste materials, rubbish and debris for all contractors from the job site. The General Contractor shall leave the site broom -cleaned daily. The General Contractor at no time shall use the Landlord trash compactors or containers. Coordinate with the Landlord on the location of a trash containers. The GC shall be responsible for supplying all dumpsters and shall be responsible for obtaining all permits required. The use of any dumpsters shall be in strict accordance with Landlord and municipal regulations. All waste shall be appropriately handled and disposed of in accordance with all rules, regulations and laws hav- ing jurisdiction. The General Contractor shall notify the disposal company to remove the container immediately after use. The VOC levels of all materials shall have minumum to zero VOCs in accordance with Green Guard and/or Green Seal certification. IX. MISCELLANEOUS CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES: Shop Drawings, samples, manufacturer's literature, and any other type of submittal called for shall conform to this section, to the Supplementary General Conditions, and to the individual "submittals" articles of each section. A. SUBMITTALS NOT IN CONFORMANCE WITH THESE SECTIONS WILL BE REJECTED WITH- B. OUT REVIEW. Each submittal shall be labeled with the name of the project, the date, the nature of the submittal, and the name, address and telephone number of the subcontractor submitting it. All submittals must be received by the Architect six full business days before the Contractor needs them C. returned. Unless otherwise noted, submit three of each submittal, one of which will be returned to the Contractor. Shop Drawings shall be submitted on single rolled sheets of white bond paper, (sized as required to clearly rep- D. resent the submittal) with a 5" x 5" blank space for the Architect's stamp. Submit two copies of photocopy -size drawings (11" x 17" max) when this size is appropriate. When sending 11 x 17 shop drawings, please make E. .PDF files and email them to the architect. Samples F. 1. Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall submit two 12" x 12" samples to Architect and two samples G. to Owner simultaneouslyof each material,color or finish required bythe Specifications within the established �l p schedule or as required not to delay the Project. H. 2. Where custom finishes are specified, submit samples bracketing the finish in order to expedite the review process. L 3. After selection or approval of samples bythe Architect and Owner,the Contractor shall submit additional PP P samples as directed. If the Contractor wishes to substitute a product, material, detail or procedure for one specified herein or shown J on the Drawings, he shall submit supporting documents, materials, samples, etc., as needed to demonstrate its equality to that which was specified. The Architect and Owner reserve the right to reject any substitution. K. G.C. to provide a breakdown recycling report, showing the percentage and weight/volume of recycled materials and their final location. IV. DEFINITIONS: A. "Furnish" and "Supply" are used interchangeably, and mean purchase and deliver to the Job site. Unloading shall be part of "installation." B. "Install" means unload, safely store, protect, assemble, set in place, secure and connect as required to complete the Work. C. "Provide" means furnish and install. D. "Landlord" means the building Owner's designated representative. V. TEMPORARY FACILITIES, SERVICE INTERRUPTIONS AND BARRICADE: A. In accordance with Landlord requirements (if applicable), the GC shall arrange for and provide all temporary utilities and facilities required to perform the Work, including but not limited to lighting, power, water, tele- phone, fax machine (separate line), and temporary HVAC. The GC shall be responsible for all expenses related to the above items. B. GC shall maintain sufficient levels of lighting to permit the installation and inspection of such work as architec- tural fixture, storefront work, floor finishing, painting, etc. If in the opinion of the Owner or Architect there is insufficient light to inspect or perform the Work, the GC shall provide additional temporary lighting. The GC will not be permitted to use the Owner's lamps. C. General Contractor shall maintain climatic conditions at the site for the acclimation and installation of the fix- ture until the HVAC system is fully operational. Provide heaters, dehumidifiers, or other means necessary to maintain the proper conditions so that temperature and relative humidity match the conditions of the finished project. D. A full -height secure and weathertight barricade shall be provided in accordance with all governing regulations. The GC shall be responsible for obtaining any and all permits should they be necessary. Supply necessary smooth barricade surface in order to receive paint and Barricade Graphics. Barricade must be in place for all construction procedures. Any damage to Landlord surfaces shall be patched by Contractor so as to be indistin- guishable from adjacent Landlord materials. Adjustments and removal shall occur during non -business hours as directed by the Landlord and the Owner. Remove the barricade upon completion of work and repair any dam- aged surfaces as required to match adjacent finishes. E. All required temporary partitions, barricades and dust -proof bathers shall be provided by GC and must remain intact at all times during the Project. Should any panel be removed, torn or otherwise displaced or damaged, it shall be promptly reattached or repaired by GC. The GC shall be responsible for supplying and installing the Barricade Graphics and maintaining and or replacing it during construction should it become damaged. F. Provide, erect and maintain catch platforms, weather protection, warning signs, and other items as required for proper protection of people and property. G. Services to occupied areas, including but not limited to electricity, water, air conditioning, plumbing, sprin- kler, and telephone, shall be maintained at all times. When service interruptions are unavoidable they must be arranged in advance with the Landlord in accordance with Landlord regulations. All such interruptions shall be planned to minimize their duration. H. Sprinkler shut -downs shall be arranged in advance with the Landlord. The Contractor shall include all overtime or night work required to perform work during shut -down periods. The Contractor shall also include in his Work the cost of afire watch if required. VI. START-UP PROCEDURES: A. B. C. D. E. Prior to commencement of construction, the GC shall have on the job site one set of Drawings approved by the ]_andlord; one set of Drawings and other applicable documents approved by local authorities having jurisdiction; one copy of the Landlord's construction procedures; at least one legible, complete and current set of the "Issued for Construction Drawings" (in addition to those mentioned above), and any other documents required by the Landlord or authorities having jurisdiction. No work shall begin before the Contractor receives the Owner's notification to proceed. No construction shall begin until a permit has been secured and all required Certificates of Insurance have been delivered to the Landlord and the Owner. Prior to commencing Work, Contractor shall verify all dimensions and conditions in the field and report any dis- crepancies to the Architect. By commencing the Work the Contractor is accepting the condition of the site. Prior to starting construction, comply with the Landlord's start-up procedures. VII. CUTTING AND PATCHING The General Contractor is responsible for, and shall include in his price, all cutting and patching of new and existing structural and non-structural elements required to complete the Work and to maintain the required fire ratings, whether or not such cutting and patching is shown on the Drawings or mentioned herein. Patching work shall include patching of existing and new openings, trenches and holes in new and existing work. Structural Work: Where cutting, channeling, core -drilling, or patching of existing slabs, decks or other structural elements is required, the following procedures shall be followed. 1 Notify the Landlord and obtain the Landlord's written permission to perform the work. 2 Contractor shall follow all work as indicated on Structural Drawings provided by the Engineer. 3 If required by the Landlord or by job conditions, x-ray the slab or other structural elements. X-ray of the slab will be required at the following locations: a. 6" diam. holes or larger in the "column strip" (area of the thickened slab above the mushroom columns) to ensurre that no rebar will be disturbed. b. 8" diameter holes or larger no in the "column strip" to ensure that no rebar will be disturbed. 4 Provide temporary bracing, shoring, etc. if required. Engage and pay for an engineer to design such bracing or. shoring should the Structural drawings provided not indicate this. 5, Do no cutting, channeling, core -drilling, etc. that will in any way weaken or compromise the structure.. 6, Comply with the Drawings where cutting and patching work is specified. Roofing Work (if indicated on the attached drawings): Provide all cutting and patching of roof required to per- form the work. Where cutting, patching of existing roofing or flashing is required, the following procedures shall A. B. C. L. M. N. All work to be performed shall be coordinated with the Landlord and Owner's vendors. All work shall be confined to the job site unless otherwise specifically noted. This includes all equipment tools, materials, etc. At no time shall Contractor unload his materials, tools, etc., into any other space without written approval of the Landlord. The Contractor shall be responsible at this own costs for warehousing of all materials to be installed under this contract, Minding Owner supplied items. Contractor shall not attach or cause to be attached to any wall or structural member any equipment that may, by virtue of its size or weight, cause structural damage. Contractor shall not do anything that might in any way affect the structural integrity of the building. All hangers for utilities, ceilings, etc. shall be anchored to beams and joists, not to the slab or deck, u.o.n. on drawings. Protect existing building from damage throughout the construction period. Repair any such damage to match existing construction. Patch all disturbed surfaces to match existing adjacent surfaces. All openings in floor construction and in rated walls and partitions shall be properly firestopped in compliance with Code and Landlord Procedures. All doors shall be made secure the completion of each work day. The Contractor shall be responsible for the security of the site. Do not close or obstruct streets, sidewalks, corridors, stairs, Landlord common areas or any other type of public way. Material or debris shall notplaced y b e p a ed o r stored in or on such public ways. Conduct operations so as to interfere as little as possible with normal activities outside of the construction site. The contractor shall maintain on site "hard-hats" as required for use by the designated field representatives of the Tenant, T andlord, Architect and their guests. Contractor shall maintain on-site at least one legible, complete and current set of Drawings for reference, in addition to those sets required by individual trades. In addition, Contractor shall maintain on-site all Sketches (SKs), Field Sketches (FSKs), approved Shop Drawings, samples and submittals, memoranda, and other relevant communications. Drawings, submittals, and documents shall be maintained in an orderly fashion. All sets of Drawings shall be kept current. No superseded Drawings shall be used on-site. At no time shall drawings be "scaled". Any clarifications or information required shall be furnished by the Architect. Contractor shall submit request for clarification in writing via a drawing. Telephone inquiries will not be permitted. The Contractor shall not proceed with any work which the Contractor expects additional compensation beyond the contract amount without written authorization from the Owner or Architect. Failure to obtain written autho- rization shall invalidate any claims from the Contractor for additional compensation. All removals, construcion substrates, finished materials, adhesives, etc. shall be handled in an environmentally sound manor. All materials shall be installed in an environmentally sound fashion with materials and installa- tion procedures that will not emit excessive vapor, dust, etc. Materials shall have miniumum to no VOCs. This applies to all sections of this specification. X. PROJECT CLOSE-OUT: A. B. C. D. E. The GC shall turn over to the Owner two bound sets of operating, maintenance and spare parts manuals for all mechanical, electrical and similar equipment. In addition, the Contractor shall provide operating instructions in the form of a demonstration to the Owner's staff for all such equipment. Prior to turnover of Project to the Owner, remove all unused materials, equipment and debris. Prior to turnover, thoroughly clean and dust all surfaces including but not limited to flooring, toilet fixtures, windows, mirrors, storefront, glass and fixtures. Remove all proprietary labels from the Work except where required by code to remain. USE ONLY ENVIRONMENTALLY GREEN PRODUCTS THAT ARE EITHER GREEN SEAL OR GREENGUARD APPROVED. Prior to turnover, the GC shall submit the following: 1. Provide copies of the Certificate Of Occupancy as issued by the Building Department to the Owner's repre- sentative and the Architect. 2. Provide a copy of the completed Landlord Punchlist to the Architect. 3. Provide a List Of Sub -contractors with phone numbers and contact persons for all sub trades utilized on this project, including general contractor information, with copies to the Owner's Representative and, the Architect. 4. Provide a copy of the air balance report to the Architect. 5. The GC shall provide the proper care instructions for all items installed in the store as stipulated in Article 4.8 of the AIA Owner/Architect agreement. These items should include (but not be limited to) items such as; floor cleaning and maintenance (rubber, wood, ceramic tiles, concrete, linoleum, etc.), fixture cleaning and mainte- nance, glazing care, plastics care, horizontally sliding security grille, vertically rolling security grille, HVAC controls, time clock, hot water heating units, special features, audio/video equipment, etc. All information shall be provided to AVEDA. in a neatly organized binder and provided to the Owner's Representative prior to the turnover of the Project. The Architect and Owner's Punchlists for GC and FM (should a FM contract be awarded) work shall be com- pleted as indicated within the Instructions to Bidders and Fixture Contract. A hand written punch list shall be issued at the Substantial Completion/ Punch List walk-through site visit with the Owner and Architect, and shall be subject to the following conditions: 1. A representative of the GC and FM (should an FM be used on this project) shall be present at this Substantial Completion site visit. 2. The Project will not officially Turnover to AVEDA until punch list work has been completed per the sched- ule within the Instructions for Bidders and Fixture Contract. At Turnover, a representative of the GC and FM (should an FM be used on this project) shall be present at this Punch List Completion Verification walk through, with the Owner or Architect, to confirm that all Punchlist items have been corrrected. 3. Should Punchlist work not be completed by Turnover, only pre -scheduled night work will be allowed. Sufficient notice must be given to AVEDA prior to scheduling work to allow time to make arrangements for site security. Any sub -contractors arriving unannounced, will be turned away. It is the GCs responsibility to sched- ule all workers in the most efficient manner to complete all punchlist work as soon as possible and with the least amount of disruption to store operations. F The Contractor shall comply with Landlord's close-out requirements. G. Contractor shall provide Owner with a complete set of as -built drawings, including architectural, mechanical and electrical. H. GC shall provide digital copies of all of the above close-out documents and submit on a CD Rom with close-out package. DIVISION 2: SITE WORK 2A. DEMOLITION ---- 2.2 I. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: A. BEFORE BEGINNING DEMOLITION -The Contractor shall contact local charitable agencies, e.g. Habitat for Humanity, to donate any items not designated to be re -used or returned to the Owner. Document all items donated and send copies of documents to Aveda. B. ENVIRONMETALLY CONSCIOUS DEMOLITION -The Contractor shall separate and salvage or recy- lce demolished materials wherever possible (including all waste material during Construction) to reduce landfill waste. G.C. should contract with a recycling contractor if required. A hauler should be hired that separates recy- clables off site and provides a report as to how much was recycled and where it went, usually measured in vol- ume or weight. Typical materials include, but are not limited to, tile flooring, metal studs, gypsum board, loose and built-in fixtures, etc. The Contractor shall be required to provide documentation verifying receipt by salvage yard or recycling center. A. Dismantle, move or demolish designated buildings on-site. If buildings are to be demolished, salvage items listed in 2.01 of this Specification section before demolishing. 1. Salvage designated existing construction for use by Owner. 2. Sort materials for reuse/recycling. 3. Dispose of materials that can not be recycled. GC shall provide list if items it intends to dispose of and not recycle before demolition. ARCHITECT DTMARCHITECT ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. NO PART OF THESE DRAWINGS OR SPECIFICATIONS MAYBE COPIED, REPRODUCED OR USED IN CONNECTION WTH ANY WORK, OTHER THEN THE SPECIFIC PROJECT FOR WHICH THEY HAVE BEEN PREPARED, WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN AUTHORIZATION FROM THE ARCHITECT. OWNER AV E DA THE ART AND SCIENCE OF PURE FLOWER AND PLANT ESSENCES 767 FIFTH AVENUE NEW YORK, NY 10153 AVEDA Westfield Southcenter 2800 Southcenter Space No. 636, Level 1 Tukwila, WA 98188 DRAWING TITLE SPECIFICATIONS RECEIVED ,ITY OF TUKWILA JUL 022013 2r'nMAIT r__CNTI-i.2 SEAL , S r I CO s ' ' REV CO iE :'1, OWNER AV E DA THE ART AND SCIENCE OF PURE FLOWER AND PLANT ESSENCES 767 FIFTH AVENUE NEW YORK, NY 10153 IFR, EEN/ISIC)NJS AVEDA Westfield Southcenter 2800 Southcenter Space No. 636, Level 1 Tukwila, WA 98188 DRAWING TITLE SPECIFICATIONS RECEIVED ,ITY OF TUKWILA JUL 022013 2r'nMAIT r__CNTI-i.2 IFR, EEN/ISIC)NJS DRAWING TITLE SPECIFICATIONS RECEIVED ,ITY OF TUKWILA JUL 022013 2r'nMAIT r__CNTI-i.2 IFR, EEN/ISIC)NJS ' REV CO iE :'1, EWED FOR COMPLIANCE APPROVED :{,''. AUG 0 2 2013 ( City of Tukwila F 9if'1314092W'rSIMP 3EVIEVu 06.21.13 ISSUE FOR MILLWORK PRICING NO. DATE REVISION DRAWN BY: DTM I CHECKED BY: DTM ORIG. DATE: 06.28.13 REV. DATE: 06.28.13 JOB NO. 1330 SHEET NO. BUILDING PERMIT NO. T.3.0 4. Store removed materials as indicated within this specification and as indicated on the drawings. C. Qualities: Salvaged materials conserve resources. D. Problems: 1. Demolition wastes resources. 2. Demolition creates dust and generates air and noise pollution. E. Recommendations: 1. Minimize demolition, reuse existing buildings (conserves resources, diverts materials from landfill). 2. Maximize salvage, recycle materials (conserves resource, diverts materials from landfill). 3. Adjust schedule to allow adequate time for dismantling and salvage operations. F. DEMOLITION MATERIALS - not all materials indicated apply to each project. Review drawings for scope of demolition materials. 1. Concrete: Crushed and graded concrete may be used as rip rap, aggregate, sub -base material, or fill. Neutralize alkalinity if planting above.] 2. Brick/Concrete Masonry: Whole units may be salvaged for reuse or resale; broken units may be crushed for use as landscape cover, sub -base material, or fill. 3. Land -Clearing Wood: May be chipped or shredded for use as ground cover, mulch, compost, pulp, or pro- cess fuel. 4. Asphalt Material: Sort by type (paving or roofing material). [May be recycled for asphalt paving products. 5. Wood: Sort by type and size for salvage. Wood unsuitable for salvage may be chipped or shredded for use as ground cover, mulch, compost, pulp, or process fuel; do not chip or shred stained, painted, or treated wood. Salvaged wood may be suitable for manufacture of particleboard and other composite wood products in some locations. 6. Building Components and Fixtures: Salvage windows, doors, cabinets, hardware, electricaland plumbing fixtures. Porcelain plumbing fixtures unsuitable for salvage may be crushed for fill. 7. Metal: Salvage metals for recycling. 8. Gypsum Board: Clean, unpainted gypsum board may be recycled into new drywall, or it may be ground up and used as a soil amendment. G. RESOURCES 1. WasteSpec, Triangle J Council of Governments, PO Box 12276, Research Triangle Park, NC 27709; www. tjcog.dst.nc.us/cdwaste.htm 2. Environmental Protection Agency's C&D Debris Web pages: www.epa.gov/epaoswer/non-hw/debris/ 3. "Deconstruction," Environmental Building News, Vol. 9, No. 5; www.BuildingGreen.com 4. RELATED LEEDTM CREDITS Materials & Resources -- Credit 2 -- Construction Waste Management Materials & Resources -- Credit 3 -- Resource Reuse H. WASTE MANAGEMENT A. Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with the Waste Management Plan and to the maxi- mum extent economically feasible. II. RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01505 - Construction Waste Management III. SUBMITTALS A. Submit Waste Management Plan for review before start of job. B. Submit receipts for tipping fees. DIVISION 3: CONCRETE 3A. STRUCTURAL CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE: I. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: A. All labor, materials, etc. required to complete the work of this section as shown on drawings, as speci- fied herein, and/or as required by job conditions. See structural drawings (if provided) and specifications for scope of structural work and submittals required. If Structural drawings are provided, the specifications therein shall supercede the following specifications. B. Contractor shall verify all existing conditions in the field and report any discrepancies between the design drawings and the actual field conditions immediately to the Architect. Any condition which may interfere with the proper execution of the new work shall also be immediately reported to the Architect. C. G.C. is responsible for coordinating all sizes and locations of structural openings with specified mechani- cal equipment. See MEP and Structrual drawings for futher information. D. See MEP and Structural drawings for general requirements of the cutting and patching of structural slab and roofing work. E. All adhesives and sealers must be solvent free and have a low volatile organic compound content (VOCs) as listed by manufacturer's product literature. The Contractor shall submit to AVEDA and the Architect product literature for approval prior to applicationi or installation. F. Interior and exterior plain and reinforced site -placed concrete, including mix design; placement; finishes; vapor retarders; control, expansion and contraction joints; curing compounds; and other related accessories as shown on the drawings and required by these specifications, including but not limited to: foundation walls and footings; slabs -on -grade; elevated slabs on metal decking; fill for steel pan stairs; grouting of base plates, bearing plates and leveling plates; retaining walls and exterior stairways -on -grade; and surface treatment with concrete hardener, sealer, and slip -resistant coatings. II. SUBMITTALS: A. Comply with "Submittals" section of the General Requirements for sample sizes, quantities and pro- cedures unless otherwise noted. III. MATERIALS: A. BEARING SOIL 1. All new footings to bear on undisturbed soil having a minimum bearing capacity of (2) tons per square foot (Unified Soil Classification 7-65 and 8-65.) B. CONCRETE 1. All concrete work shall be done under strict supervision of an agency approved by the Governmental jurisdiction having authority in this local. Inspection shall determine compliance with the appropriate sec- tions of the Local Building Code and the American Concrete Institute Building Code and of the American Concrete Institute Building Code (ACI 318-77) covering forms, reinforcement, concrete, concrete place- ment procedure, and removal of forms. 2. All concrete which will be exposed to the weather shall contain entrained air as recommended by the American Concrete Institute (ACI 613). 3. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I. 4. Aggregates: ASTM C33, normal weight aggregates. 5. Water: Potable. 6. Concrete Admixtures: Containing less than 0.1 percent chloride ions. a. Air -Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, for exterior exposed concrete and foundations exposed to freeze -thaw. b. Water -Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A, for placement and workability. c. High -Range Water -Reducing Admixture, Super Plasticizer: ASTM C 494, Type F or 0 for place- ment and workability. 7. Water -Reducing, Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type E for placement and workability. 8. Water -Reducing, Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D for placement and workability. 9. Fly Ash conforming to ASTM C618 -89a, Type C or F may be substituted for up to 20 Percent of the total cementitious materials in all concrete mixes unless otherwise noted. C. RELATED MATERIALS 1. Vapor Retarder: ASTM E154 polyethylene sheet, 8 mils. 2. Vapor Barrier: Premolded membrane, ASTM E96, Method B, 0 vapor transmission rate. 3. Chemical Bonding Agent: Film forming, freeze thaw resistant compound suitable for brush or spray application, complying with MIL B 19235. 4. Concrete Curing Materials a. Moisture Retaining Cover: One of the following, complying with ANSI ASTM C171 for concrete floors, that are to be exposed or to receive floor sealer. i. Waterproof paper ii. Polyethylene film iii. White burlap polyethylene sheet 5. Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 ounce per square yard, AASHTO M182, Class 2. 6. Liquid Membrane Forming Curing Compound: Liquid type membrane forming curing compound, complying with ANSI/ASTM C309, Type I, Class B, with 18 to 20 percent minimum solids. Provide for concrete floors that are to receive applied fmished floor materials. 7. Self -Leveling Underlayment a. Self -leveling cement -based. When mixed with water, it becomes a fluid material, seeking its own level, producing a smooth surface. Compressive strength: 4100 psi minimum at 28 days. Flexural strength: 1300 psi at 28 days. Tensile strength: 750 psi at 28 days. Shrinkage: .025 after 7 days. 8. Epoxy Adhesive: ASTM C881, two -component material suitable for use on dry or damp surfaces. Provide material type, grade, and class to suit Project Requirements. D. CONCRETE ADMIXTURES A. Use air entraining admixture in exterior concrete. Add air entraining admixture at the manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at the point of placement, having air content within the following lim- its: 1. Concrete structures and slabs exposed to freezing and thawing, deicer chemicals or subjected to hydraulic pressure: a. 5 percent to plus/minus 1 percent for 2 -inch nominal maximum aggregate size. b. 5-1/2 percent to plus/minus 1 percent for 1 -1/2 -inch nominal maximum aggregate size. c. 6 percent to plus/minus 1 percent for 3/4 and 1 -inch nominal maximum aggregate size. d. 7 percent to plus/minus 1 percent for 1/2 -inch nominal maximum aggregate size. e. Exterior Concrete in Moderate Exposure Regions: 4-1/2 percent to plus/ minus 1 percent for 1 - inch nominal maximum aggregate size. E. REINFORCING STEEL 1. Reinforcing bars to be new billet stock, deformed type, conforming to the standard specifications of A.S.T.M. 615, grade 40 steel and placed in accordance with C.R.S.L. -77 standard specification. 2. Welded wire mesh to be in accordance with A.S.T.M. A -185-73T specifications. Concrete protection of reinforcing steel shall conform to section 7.7 of the A.C.I. code (ACI 318-77). 3. Continuous reinforcement shall be spliced in compliance with Chapter 12 of the A.C.I. code. F QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. Comply with American Concrete Institute "Standard Specification for Structural Concrete," ACI 301- 99. 2. Concrete shall be subject to inspections and testing in accordance with ACI 301-99 and the Ohio Building Code. a. Three concrete test cylinders shall be taken for every 50 cubic yards. or fraction thereof of each class of concrete placed each day. b. One additional test cylinder will be taken during cold weather and be cured on site under same con- ditions as concrete it represents. c.One slump test will be taken for each set of test cylinders taken. G. PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES 1. Proportion mixes by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods as specified in ACI 301, using materials to be employed on the project for each class of concrete required. 2. Concrete Schedule: Spread and wall footings 4,000 psi at 28 days Reinforced concrete retaining walls Exterior Interior Concrete on steel form deck Concrete Slabs -on -grade Precast Concrete topping H. CONCRETE MIXING 1. Ready Mixed Concrete: Comply with the requirements of ASTM C94 and as herein specified. a. Delete the references for allowing additional water to be added to the batch for material with insuf- ficient slump. Addition of water to the batch will be permitted only to replace water lost due to evapo- ration and only under the direct control of the concrete testing agency field representative. b. During hot weather or under conditions contributing to rapid setting of concrete, a shorter mixing time than specified in ASTM C94 may be required. 4,000 psi at 28 days 4,000 psi at 28 days 4,000 psi at 28 days 2,100 psi at 7 days 3,500 psi at 28 days 4000 psi, #8 Aggregate (Maximum) IV EXECUTION A. CONCRETE PLACEMENT 1. General: Comply with ACI 304, "Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete". 2. Cold Weather Placing a Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures, in compliance with ACI 306.1, "Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting. 3. Hot Weather Placing: a. When hot weather conditions exist that would seriously impair the quality and strength of concrete, place concrete in compliance with ACI 305, and as herein specified. 4. Concrete shall be placed within 90 minutes of addition of water to cementitious materials or before 300 revolutions of the mixing drum, whichever occurs first. ARCHITECT may reduce placement time if condi- tions exist which cause rapid setting of concrete: B. SCHEDULE OF FINISHES 1. Float Finish (Flt -Fn) - Not Critical Floor Tolerance: a. Specified Overall Value: FF 25/FL 20. b. Minimum Local Value: FF 20/FL 17. c. Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to receive trowel finish and other thick finishes as hereinafter specified, and slab surfaces which are to be covered with waterproofing membrane or sand - bed terrazzo, thickset tile, and other areas which receive a mud/setting bed. 2. Trowel Finish 1 (Tr-Fnl) - Typical Classroom, Corridors, and Normal Sized Rooms (Under 1,000 sq. ft.): a. Specified Overall Value: FF 30/FL 23. b. Minimum Local Value: FF 25/FL 20. c. Apply trowel finish to slab surfaces that are to be covered with resilient flooring, paint, or other thin film finish coating system. 3. Trowel Finish 2 (Tr-Fn2) - Large Rooms and Public Areas Over 1,000 sq. ft.): a. Specified Overall Value: FF 36/FL 25. b. Minimum Local Value: FF 30/FL 22. c. Apply trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to receive resilient flooring, carpet, or other thin finish system. 4. Trowel Finish 3 (Tr-Fn3) - Gym Floors a. The slab shall be steel troweled to a true level and finished smooth and straight to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in any 10 -foot radius. High spots shall be ground level, and low spots filled in with approved level- ing compounds by the Contractor responsible for Section 033000 to the full approval of the wood -floor- ing contractor. 5. Nonslip Broom Finish (NsBrm-Fn): Apply nonslip broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, sidewalks, steps and ramps. a. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming with fiber bristle broom, perpendicular to main traffic route. 6. Elevated slabs shall have a specified overall value of FF 22 to FF 27 and a minimum local of FF 20 with no FL number defined. 7. Floor slabs which do not receive a finish floor material shall be sealed as follows a. This treatment of the slab shall be accomplished imme-idiately prior to the time that the building is turned over to the owner for occupancy. b. Sealing shall be achieved by the spray application of one (1) coat of curing compound. c.This slab sealing is in addition to the application of curing compound, which is applied as soon as pos- sible after placement of the slab. C. CURING CONCRETE 1. All concrete shall be protected from too rapid drying for a period of at least seven (7) days by one of the following methods: a. Concrete covered with waterproof paper with sealed joints and edges. b. Concrete covered with burlap or sand kept continuously wet. c. Sprayed on membrane curing compound. d. Forms left in place during curing period and forms kept constantly wet. When this method is used, the top surface of concrete in such forms shall be kept constantly wet with a soaker hose or by some other approved method. D. JOINTING 1. Provide 1/2" expansion joint at all locations where aprons and pad abut building walls 2. All expansion joints shall be developed using pre -formed expan-'sion joint material, 1/2" thick 3. Sidewalks, for which control and expansions joints are not shown on drawings, shall have tooled co ntrol joints spaced at 5 feet on center (maximum) and expansion joints spaced at 30 feet on center (maximum) 4. Unless shown otherwise on the drawings, provide control joints and expansion joints in slabs and pads as follows: a. Spacing of control and expansion joints in exterior pads shall be 15' on center (maximum) in both directions b. Floor slab control joints shall be spaced at 25'-0" (max.) in both directions, with the ratio of the longer dimension to the shorter dimension not greater than 1.5 and a total area contained within joints of not more than 625 square feet c. Control joints shall be saw cut into slabs within 24 hours of start of placement and within 12 hours of completion of placement, not including finishing time. IV CONTROLLED INSPECTIONS: A. As required by Code 3B. SELF -LEVELING CONCRETE FLOORING - MAPEI - Finish Floors and AS REQUIRED BY SITE CONDITIONS FOR FLOOR PREPARATION AT TILE FLOORING, THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SUBMIT WITH BID I. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. SCOPE OF WORK UNDER THIS SECTION: 1.The Contractor shall be required to pour MAPEI Primer L laytex primer throughout before installation of the finished flooring material. The Contractor shall confirm that the MAPEI sub -floor shall be compat- ible with the finish flooring material and shall submit a substitute for review should this be necessary. B. GENERAL: 1. All work shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. 2. All work shall be performed by an installer who shall be an MAPEI preferred installer who has at least five years' experience in work of this type. 3. Deliver materials in their original, unopened packages and protect from extreme temperatures and moisture. 4. Installation of the MAPEI must be by an applicator using mixing equipment and tools approved by the manufacturer. 5. Provide MAPEI Ultrapan 1 Plus by MAPEI corporation. 6. All adhesives and sealers must be solvent free and have a low volatile organic compound content (VOCs) as listed by manufacturer's product literature. II. SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall submit to AVEDA and the Architect product literature for approval prior to applica- tion or installation indicating that the material used is solvent free and has low VOCs.. III. MATERIALS A. MAPEI Ultrapan 1 Plus underlayment as manufactured by MAPEI Corporation, 1144 E. Newport Center Drive • Deerfield Beach, FL 33442 Phone 1-800-42-MAPEI (1-800-42-62734). IV. INSTALLATION A. SURFACE PREPARATION 1. All substrates must be structurally sound, stable and solid. Substrates must be free of deflection beyond L/360 (L/720 for stone applications), taking into consideration both live and dead loads. Ultraplan 1 Plus should not be used where consistently exposed to water, or where intermittently or permanently high lev- els of MVER are present. The presence of water or a high MVER will compromise the performance of the flooring system. 2. Thoroughlyclean the surface of any substance that could interfere with the bond of the instal- lation material, including dirt, paint, tar, asphalt, wax, oil, grease, latex compounds, sealers, cur- ing compounds, form release agents, laitance, loose toppings, foreign substances and adhesive residue. 3. Concrete surfaces must be mechanically profiled and prepared by shotblasting, sandblasting, water jetting, scarifying, diamond -grinding or other engineer -approved methods (reference ICRI CSP 3 standards for acceptable profile height). 4. After cleaning and mechanically profiling the substrate, test for MVER (calcium chloride test reference ASTM F1869). Ultraplan 1 Plus is an underlayment for use with other finished floor systems (such as resilient, VCT and ceramic). Always follow manufacturers 'recommenda tions regarding the maximum allowable moisture content and MVER before installation. See the "Recommended Substrates" section of this TDS as well as the Planiseal TM MRB TDS for details regarding MVER conditions and treatments. 5. Concrete substrate and ambient room temperatures must be between 50°F and 95°F (10°C and 35°C) before application. Temperatures must be maintained within this range for at least 72 hours after the installation of Ultraplan 1 Plus. 6. Fill in deep areas, holes or cracks with appropriate concrete restoration materials (such as Mapecem® Quickpatch) especially when installing on a second -story floor or above where fluid material could leak to a floor below (contact MAPEI 's Technical Services Department for details). 7: Always prime the prepared surface with a MAPEI primer before applying Ultraplan ® 1 Plus. 8. Do not apply primer over standing water. 9. Apply Ultraplan 1 Plus only when the primer is in its recommended state as defined in the cur- rent primer's TDS. 10. Some mechanically prepared substrates may be more porous than others, which can require a specific application of the primer. Refer to the "MAPEI Primers" chart of this TDS and to the appropriate primer 's TDS. 11. Ultraplan 1 Plus can be used over subfloors of engineer -approved plywood or oriented strand board (OSB) subfloors in accordance with the Tile Council of America 's F185-05 specifica- tion. Subfloors must be properly prepared, bonded, and free from dirt and dust. When applying MAPEI underlayments to plywood flooring, mechanically fasten MapelathTM or diamond mesh on top of the primed surface (meeting the requirements of ASTM C847) before application of Ultraplan 1 Plus. Refer to the current Mapelath TDS for further installation instructions. 12. Moisture vapor transmission exceeding 5 lbs. per 1,000 sq. ft. (2,27 kg per 92,9 m2) per 24 hours must first be treated by installing a suitable moisture -reduction barrier. Apply a small test area to ensure compatibility with the moisture -reduction barrier before general installation. Refer to the "MAPEI Primers" chart of this TDS for primer recommendations over Planiseal TM MRB. 13. To install over properly prepared ceramic tile, VCT, cement or epoxy terrazzo, or small amounts of old cutback adhesive residue, the surface must be properly prepared, bonded, free of dirt and dust, and primed. Prime by applying appropriate primer; refer to the "MAPEI Primers" chart 14. When priming with Planibond ® EBA, Ultraplan 1 Plus must be placed into the Planibond EBA while it is tacky to ensure a successful installation. See the current TDS for Planibond EBA. 2. MIXING 1. General mixing: Into a clean mixing container (typically a pail measuring at least 5 U.S. gals. [18,9 LI), pour the required amount of cool, clean potable water. If available water is not cool, chill water to 70°F (21°C). Add Ultraplan 1 Plus powder while slowly stirring. Mix water and Ultraplan 1 Plus powder to a mixing ratio of 5.75 to 6 U.S. qts. (5,44 to 5,68 L) of water per 50 -lb. (22,7 -kg) bag of Ultraplan 1 Plus. Upon combining all of the water and the single bag of Ultraplan 1 Plus, begin mixing material together with a high-speed drill (at about 800 rpm) to a homogenous, lump -free consistency. This typically takes from 90 to 120 seconds. The mixing ratio must remain consistent. Do not overwater material. For best results, use the MAPEI Self - Leveling Tool Kit. Contact MAPEI 's Technical Services Department for details. 2. Barrel mixing: Using the appropriate mixing ratio above, use a high-speed mixer (at about 1,200 rpm) with an "Egg -Beater" mixing paddle. Typically, this mixing procedure involves two bags of Ultraplan 1 Plus with the correct water ratio referenced above per bag. Mix to a homog- enous, lump -free consistency for about 90 to 120 seconds. Do not overmix. Overmixing or mov- ing the mixer up and down during the mixing process could cause air entrapment, which could shorten the pot life or cause pinholing during application and curing. 3. Pump mixing: Ultraplan 1 Plus can be mechanically mixed, using the appropriate mixing ratio above, with a continuous mixer and pump (with at least 140 ft. [42,7 m] of hose) or a batch mixer and pump (with at least 110 ft. [33,5 m] of hose). Mixer and pump must be in good working condition. Periodic cleaning of pumping equipment is required per the manufacturer 's instructions. Be sure to pressure -test rotor and stator before mixing. Use a mesh screen "sock" at the end of the hose to catch any foreign material that could enter the hopper of the mixer. To ensure a suitable mix and flow, test mixed material from the pump hose's end in a small test area before general application. Note: Cool -weather conditions can require longer mixing or additional hose length to ensure the best product performance. 3. APPLICATION 1. Before installation, close all doors and windows to prevent drafts. Protect areas from direct sunlight. 2. Make sure concrete substrate and ambient room temperatures are between 50°F and 95°F (10°C and 35°C) before application. In large applications, allow for indirect air circulation to dissipate humidity created by leveler application. Temperatures must be maintained within this range for at least 72 hours after the installation of Ultraplan 1 Plus. In cooler conditions, use indi- rect auxiliary heaters to maintain ambient and substrate temperatures within the required range. For temperatures above 85°F (29°C), follow ACI hot -weather application guidelines to ensure a successful installation. Review the seventh point in the "Technical Notes" section of this TDS. 3. Application of Ultraplan 1 Plus over large areas can be made easier and more efficient by using conventional piston, rotor -stator or underlayment-type pumps (contact MAPEI 's Technical Services Department for recommendations). 4. For best results, work as a team to provide a continuous flow of wet material, to avoid trapping air or creating a cold joint. 5. Set the width of the pour at a distance that is ideal for maintaining a wet edge throughout placement. Quickly pour or pump Ultraplan 1 Plus onto the properly prepared and primed surface in a ribbon pattern. If a wet edge cannot be maintained, reduce the width of the pour. 6. Ultraplan 1 Plus has an approximate working time of 15 minutes at 73°F (23°C), is self -lev- eling and can be applied from featheredge (1/4" [6 mm] for vehicular rubber -wheel traffic) to 1-1/2" (3,8 cm) in a single application. Note that temperature and humidity will affect working time, flowability and setting time. Apply enough material to adequately cover all high spots. 7. Shortly after placing the Ultraplan 1 Plus, spread the material with a MAPEI Gauge Rake to assist in gauging out the Ultraplan 1 Plus to the desired depth. After achieving the desired depth, smooth surface with a MAPEI Smoother to obtain an even surface. 8. For extended installations, pre -place 1/4" to 3/8" (6 to 10 nim) of clean, nonreactive aggre- gate over the primed surface at no more than half of the total pour depth. Pour Ultraplan ® 1 Plus over placed aggregate, and rake aggressively to ensure full contact and bond with substrate. Immediately pour 1/4" (6 mm) of Ultraplan 1 Plus over the raked aggregate to provide a smooth, level surface. Alternately, aggregate (up to 30% by weight) can be added directly to Ultraplan 1 Plus during mixing. Note: Use only clean, stable aggregates. Do not use limestone or other poten- tially reactive aggregates for extension. 9. Ultraplan 1 Plus quickly hardens, within 2 to 3 hours, and is ready to accept installation of ceramic tile and natural stone in as little as 3 to 4 hours (moisturesensitive stone can require more curing time). Floor coverings - such as carpet, vinyl sheet goods, vinyl tile, VCT, homogenous PVC, rubber and engineered wood plank - can typically be installed 16 to 24 hours after applica- tion. Protect the surface from contaminants until the final flooring installation is complete. All of the above statements are subject to real-time job -site temperatures and humidity conditions. 4. CURING 1. Ultraplan 1 Plus is self -curing; do not use a dampcuring method or curing and sealing com- pounds. 2. Protect Ultraplan 1 Plus from excessive heat or draft conditions during curing. Turn off all forced ventilation and radiant heating systems, and protect installation for up to 24 hours after completion. 3. Avoid walking on installed surface for at least 2 to 3 hours after installation, depending upon temperature and humidity conditions. 4. Protect installation from traffic, dirt and dust from other trades until Ultraplan 1 Plus is com- pletely cured and final flooring has been installed. 5. Do not expose Ultraplan 1 Plus to rolling dynamic loads, such as fork lifts or scissor lifts, for at least 72 hours after installation. 5. CLEANING 1. Wash hands and tools with water promptly before material hardens. Cured material must be mechanically removed. DIVISION 4: MASONRY: Not Used DIVISION 5: METALS SA. STRUCTURAL STEEL & MISCELLANEOUS METAL MATERIALS I. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. SCOPE OF WORK UNDER THIS SECTION: Provide all miscellaneous channels, structural framing, metal grounds, fastening as required to complete the project. Supply as required by code and per industry standards. Fabrication and installation of all structural steel and miscellaneous metal work including but not limited to the following: 1. Structural and miscellaneous steel. See Structural drawings if provided. 2. Modification of existing structure as shown and as required. 3. All fasteners as required to install all fixtures, plastic laminate/melamine shelving standards, metal Shelving, etc., per code and for safety. 4. All independent testing, verification, etc. required by code. 5. All metal supports for fixtures provided by Owner and F.M. B. GENERAL 1. Refer to the structural drawings (if provided) and specifications for additional information. In case of conflict, the more stringent shall apply. 2. All work shall be fabricated and installed by a single company. 3. Fabricator shall coordinate with the G.C. and verify all field conditions and dimensions prior to the submission of shop drawings. 4. All work shall comply with governing codes and applicable sections of reference st ardREVIEWED FO 5. Refer to architectural drawings for fixture locations requiring metal supports. CODE COMPLIAN C. REFERENCE STANDARDS 1. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 3. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 4. American Welding Society (AWS) ARCHITECT ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. NO PART OF THESE DRAWINGS OR SPECIFICATIONS MAYBE COPIED, REPRODUCED OR USED IN CONNECTION WITH WORK, OTHER THEN THE SPECIFIC PROJECT FOR WHICH THEY HAVE BEEN PREPARED, WMTHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN AUTHORIZATION FROM THE ARCHITECT. OWNER AVEDA THE ART AND SCIENCE OF PURE FLOWER AND PLANT ESSENCES 767 FIFTH AVENUE NEW YORK, NY 10153, AVEDA Westfield Southcenter 2800 Southcenter Space No. 636, Level 1 Tukwila, WA 98188 R CE APPROVED AUG 0 2 2013 II. SUBMITTALS City of Tukwila A. Submittals must be received by the Architect at least seven days before the fabricator nee kmailpIVlS i B. Submit two of each sample in addition to those which the fabricator wants returned. C. Submit complete shop drawings showing details of construction, gauges of material, jointing, fasteners, sup- ports, field connections, locations and size of welds and attachment to adjoining construction. Verify dimen- sions on site prior to submission. D. Submit samples of each type of material and fastener to be used in the Project, fmished as specified. III. MATERIALS A. GENERAL 1. Whether or not shown on the Drawings, provide all fasteners, clip angles, welds, shims, supports, brac- es, stiffeners, additional support plates and other appurtenances required to complete the Work as shown in a consistent and structurally sound manner. 2. All components shall have slightly eased corners. Cut edges and mill edges shall be ground smooth and uniform. All surfaces shall be free of rust, scale, tool marks, burrs, nicks, proprietary or country -of -origin marks, u.o.n. on drawings. IV. FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION A. GENERAL 1. Surface preparation: Prior to shipping, thoroughly clean all surfaces. Remove all scaling, oil residue, fmgerprints, etc. Clean with a wire brush to remove any scaling and then clean with a solvent -based cleaner. 2. Erect work square and level, and free from distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or perfor- mance. No members shall be distorted by welding or other fabrication techniques. 3. Provide cut-outs as required to accommodate hardware, pipes, conduit, electrical boxes, etc. Piping and wiring shall be assumed to run through the web of exposed beams. 4. Shop -fabricate assemblies as large as practical to minimize field connections. 5. Prior to shipment of components to the site, remove all weld marks, scale and other blemishes. 6. Welds shall be continuous where noted and in similar conditions. Welds shall be ground flush and/or smooth where noted and in similar conditions. All welds shall be neat and consistent, with slag and burrs removed. 7. Joints between tubes shall be continuously welded to fill the joint, ground flush and polished to match the adjoining surface. 8. No exposed fasteners will be permitted unless specifically shown on the Drawings. 9. Remove burrs from all work. Ease all exposed sharp edges and corners. 10. Close exposed ends of tubes by use of appropriate end cap, grind smooth and polishedwith no visible seams. 11. For work anchored in concrete, furnish matching sleeves or inserts. 12. Verify dimensions on site prior to shop fabrication. 13. All disimilar metals shall be protected from contact to each other by application of paint or clear seal- ant. D ON C RAWING TITLE SPECIFICATIONS RECEIVED ITY OF TUKWILA JUL 022013 PFRMIT CENTER I'D J SEA \\\ s F E\/I cv7 �yj V .11\:, Ai -a J S 5 OWNER AVEDA THE ART AND SCIENCE OF PURE FLOWER AND PLANT ESSENCES 767 FIFTH AVENUE NEW YORK, NY 10153, AVEDA Westfield Southcenter 2800 Southcenter Space No. 636, Level 1 Tukwila, WA 98188 R CE APPROVED AUG 0 2 2013 II. SUBMITTALS City of Tukwila A. Submittals must be received by the Architect at least seven days before the fabricator nee kmailpIVlS i B. Submit two of each sample in addition to those which the fabricator wants returned. C. Submit complete shop drawings showing details of construction, gauges of material, jointing, fasteners, sup- ports, field connections, locations and size of welds and attachment to adjoining construction. Verify dimen- sions on site prior to submission. D. Submit samples of each type of material and fastener to be used in the Project, fmished as specified. III. MATERIALS A. GENERAL 1. Whether or not shown on the Drawings, provide all fasteners, clip angles, welds, shims, supports, brac- es, stiffeners, additional support plates and other appurtenances required to complete the Work as shown in a consistent and structurally sound manner. 2. All components shall have slightly eased corners. Cut edges and mill edges shall be ground smooth and uniform. All surfaces shall be free of rust, scale, tool marks, burrs, nicks, proprietary or country -of -origin marks, u.o.n. on drawings. IV. FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION A. GENERAL 1. Surface preparation: Prior to shipping, thoroughly clean all surfaces. Remove all scaling, oil residue, fmgerprints, etc. Clean with a wire brush to remove any scaling and then clean with a solvent -based cleaner. 2. Erect work square and level, and free from distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or perfor- mance. No members shall be distorted by welding or other fabrication techniques. 3. Provide cut-outs as required to accommodate hardware, pipes, conduit, electrical boxes, etc. Piping and wiring shall be assumed to run through the web of exposed beams. 4. Shop -fabricate assemblies as large as practical to minimize field connections. 5. Prior to shipment of components to the site, remove all weld marks, scale and other blemishes. 6. Welds shall be continuous where noted and in similar conditions. Welds shall be ground flush and/or smooth where noted and in similar conditions. All welds shall be neat and consistent, with slag and burrs removed. 7. Joints between tubes shall be continuously welded to fill the joint, ground flush and polished to match the adjoining surface. 8. No exposed fasteners will be permitted unless specifically shown on the Drawings. 9. Remove burrs from all work. Ease all exposed sharp edges and corners. 10. Close exposed ends of tubes by use of appropriate end cap, grind smooth and polishedwith no visible seams. 11. For work anchored in concrete, furnish matching sleeves or inserts. 12. Verify dimensions on site prior to shop fabrication. 13. All disimilar metals shall be protected from contact to each other by application of paint or clear seal- ant. D ON C RAWING TITLE SPECIFICATIONS RECEIVED ITY OF TUKWILA JUL 022013 PFRMIT CENTER I'D J F E\/I 06.28.13 ISSUE FOR LANDLORD REVIEW PERMIT & BID 06.21.13 ISSUE FOR MILLWORK PRICING NO. DATE REVISION DRAWN BY: DTM CHECKED BY: DTM ORIG. DATE: 06.28.13 REV. DATE: 06.28.13 JOB NO. 1330 SHEET NO. T..3 ■ 1 BUILDING PERMIT NO. I. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: A All batt insulation shall comply with the requirements of the applicable sections of ASTM , NFPA and UL burning characteristics of building materials B Contractor shall provide all insulation at exterior walls, interior partitions and roof as indicated on drawings. Provide with vapor barrier as required by industry and per application. Provide with appro- priate R -Value as required by code.. C Provide sound insulation blankets at toilet room partitions. 14. Obtain all appropriate work permits for any welding work done at site. 15. The GC shall be resposible for hiring, coordinating and expenses related to a structural engineer required to perform all inspections for code enforcement and local regulations. SB: STEEL FINISHES A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: 1. All metal shall be shop primed, U.O.N. 2. See drawings and Finish legend for finishes of other metals, typ. DIVISION 6: WOOD & PLASTICS 6A. ROUGH CARPENTRY I. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. All lumber for framing, blocking, furring, plates, nailers, grounds etc. (interior and exterior) shall be MVPA #1 HEM MR MC 15 (or better) kiln -dried to 15% moisture content, each piece grade -marked SAS. All wood shall be certified by the Forest Stewardship Council (FSC Certified) and GC. shall produce documentation of such to Aveda and the Architect., typical for all wood used on the project, be it rough or finished carpentry. B. All wood blocking and framing shall be fire -retardant -treated. All wood must have grade mark visible on every piece. Wood without proper grading will be rejected. C. All blocking work shall be by GC. The attached drawings are diagramatic and may not show all grounds as required, the GC is nevertheless required to provide all blocking as required. D. Lumber and rough hardware for all work shown or required. E. Fire -retardant treatment of all interior and exterior plywood and solid rough carpentry (studs and blocking) provided by this section, as required by code. F. All other items of rough carpentry and related items reasonably inferred as needed to make work of this section complete. G. At no time shall firetreated wood of any type be placed above a ceiling unless the GC has received written approval from the local code official that such material is permitted II. RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS: A Metal Grounds - The GC shall be responsible for providing all metal grounds/blocking as required in lieu of wood blocking should wood blocking not be permitted by local code to be placed within parti- tions. At no time shall wood be used above ceilings. 6B. ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK NOTE: SHALL A FIXTURE MANUFACTURER NOT BE ENGAGED FOR THIS PROJECT, OMIT ALL REFERENCES TO THE FM ALL WORK IN THAT CASE SHALL BE PROVIDED BY THE GC I. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: A. All woodwork and wood products shall comply with the requirements of the Architectural Woodwork Institute (A.W.I.) "Quality Standards," latest edition. Grade shall be 'Premium". Where the Drawings or Specifications conflict with these standards, the more stringent shall apply. All wood shall be certi- fied by the Forest Stewardship Council (FSC Certified). Contractors shall produce documentation of such to Aveda and the Architect.. Wherever possible wood shall be replaced with "Wood Stalk" panel material as manufactured by Dow Bioproducts, or similar "green" product. B. All Work shall have a one-year guarantee. Guarantees shall be against warping, delamination, open- ing of joints, and other defects in materials, construction, and workmanship, and shall be in effect from date of substantial completion. G.C. shall repair or replace all defective work during this period. C. Provide blocking, framing, shimming, etc. as shown and required for all work of this section. All blocking, framing and shimming shall be of fire -retardant -treated lumber or plywood. II. SUBMITTALS: Comply with "Submittals" section of the General Requirements for sample sizes, quan- tities and procedures unless otherwise noted. A. Shop Drawings: Submit fully coordinated Shop Drawings for all Work showing wood, metal and glass components integrated on the same drawings. Provide fully dimensioned plans and elevations at 1 1/2" = l'-0" (min.), sections at 3" = 1'-0" (min.), and details at 1/2 full size (min.). Show attachment devices, welds and hardware. Distinguish between shop joints and knockdown joints. B. Blocking Drawings: G.C. required to submit shop drawings that fully describe and locate all block- ing and grounds inside sheetrock walls and above ceilings necessary to install the work of this section. FM shall provide sketch to the GC indicating where such blocking will be required. Such blocking shall be furnished and installed by the G.C. Submit (1) one set of reproducibles simultaneously to Architect and Owner. C. Submit samples of each type of wood with each type of finish. Samples shall be cut from the actual batch of boards proposed for use. Provide a 1" thick minimum solid edge band on one edge of each sample. Submit samples bracketing specified finishes to expedite review process. D. Submit samples of each type of exposed hardware, clip, and fastener to be used on the project. E. PLASTIC LAMINATE or MELAMINE shall not be used anywhere within Aveda store. F. Submit manufacturer's certification of specified flame -spread rating for panel products. III. MATERIALS: A. Wood Moisture Content: Provide kiln -dried (KD) lumber with a moisture content range of 5% to 10%. Maintain temperature and relative humidity during fabrication, storage and finishing operation so that moisture content values for woodwork at time of installation do not exceed 10%. B. All lumbers, framing, and blocking shall be pressure fire -treated as required by code. C. All veneer panels and fiberboard used on the Project shall have a flame spread rating not to exceed (Class I or A) in accordance with ASTM E84. Blocking within sheet rock construction shall be fire - treated and shall meet flame spread/smoke development rating as required by local code. D. Veneers shall be AWI Grade 1, minimum 1/32" thick PLAIN SLICFD. Solids shall be AWI Grade I, free from knots, marks, "flake", sapwood and other defects, consistent in color. Finish shall be as scheduled and as per manufacturers instructions. E. Use WOOD STALK Board in lieu of veneer core plywood wherever possible for all shelves,. etc. Use veneer core plywood where required for structural integrity, for holding fasteners, to prevent warp- ing or sagging, and where called for on the Drawings. Use 55 -lb. medium -density Wood Stalk for all other applications. Distinguish between veneer core and Wood Stalk on the Shop Drawings. E Use solid wood where shown (graphically or otherwise), where conditions are similar to those shown and as specified herein. Any exposed panel edges of painted or clear finished millwork shall be edge - banded with a minimum of 1/4" thick solid stock unless otherwise shown. G. All baseboard, stile and rail components, and standing and running trim shall be solid stock. H. Where "painted wood" is indicated on the Drawings it shall be hardwood for painted finish. Comply with A.W.I. quality standards for selection of species, grade and cut. Painted panels shall be medium - density Wood Stalk with the flame spread ratings indicated above. I. Hardware: Contractor shall include all specific hardware, display hardware and accessory items required for architectural woodwork. Contractor shall provide a complete job, with all necessary items of cabinet hardware to suit the conditions of the Work. Use specified items below u.o.n. on drawings. 1. Drawer glides: Accuride, full -extension, 100 lb. capacity, ball-bearing type. 2. Undercarriage drawer glides: Accuride full extension, 100 lb. capacity, ball-bearing type. 3. Cabinet door and access door hinges: 170 -degree opening, self-closing, adjustable, concealed type equal to Grass America. Size, type and quantity as required for configuration, size and weight of door. 4 .Piano hinges: Full length of door or panel; Stanley #STS 314 1/4 with 3/4" #6 screws 2" O.C. 5. Ball catches: Glynn Johnson 21A. 6. Magnetic catches: Epco #602, quantity as required to hold door. 7. Soss (concealed) hinges: Size and quantity as recommended by the manuf. for door size and weight. 8. Builder's Hardware edgepull - FE158 3/4" US26D By Simon's Hardware 800-232-9220 9. Grommets for shelf pins: compatible with pins. 10. Shelf pins: Hafele 282.04.739. 11. Levelers: Sugatsune MN -25 St. Steel. 12. Touch latches: Ives No. 821. 13. Standards and brackets: Stockroom, office Toilet Rooms and closets, etc: Garcy #1284 shelf brackets with F1173 front clip and Garcy #1204 standards. 14. Cord grommets; Doug Mockett Series SG plastic, in colors selected by the Architect. 15. NOT USED J. Glass: Tempered with polished edges in thickness and configurations indicated on the Drawings and specified herein. No tempering or proprietary marks shall be visible unless required by the building authorities having jurisdiction. Provide etched glass where indicated. IV FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION: A. Fabrication and installation of all architectural woodwork shall be performed by a single reputable firm. If the fabricator does not perform the installation, he shall directly subcontract such work and shall provide a full-time site representative for the entire installation period. B. Provide all blocking, doweling, dovetailing, joinery and fasteners required for a first-class product whether or not such items are shown on the Drawings. C. Grain on panels shall run vertically unless otherwise indicated. Grain on trim, base shelves, tops, etc. shall run the long direction unless otherwise indicated. D. Wood panels and solid wood components shall be one piece full -height or full-length unless joints are specifically shown on the Drawings. E. Adjacent panels shall be sequence -matched unless otherwise noted. E Adjacent members shall have matching grain, color and character. G. Millwork shall be shop -assembled to the greatest extent possible. Field cuts and joints, where permit- ted, be kept to an absolute minimum. Field joints shall be indistinguishable from shop joints. H. No fasteners or filled nail holes shall be visible unless specifically permitted on the Drawings. I. Shop Finishing: 1.Finish architectural woodwork at shop. Defer only final touch-up and cleaning until after delivery and installation. 2. Preparations for Finishing: Comply with A.W.I. Quality Standards, Premium Grade, Section 1500, for sanding, back -priming and similar preparations for finishing of architectural woodwork, as appli- cable. 3. Panels and standing and running trim to receive painted finish (including but not limited to base- board, crown molding, chair rail, casings, doors, opening trim, jambs and heads) shall receive two shop coats of primer with sanding between as required. 4. Painted Wood Stalk shall have all joints and fastener holes filled with Bondo and sanded smooth. The finished installation shall have a uniform and monolithic appearance.. J. Installation of Work: 1. Do not install Work until required temperature and relative humidity have been stabilized and will be maintained in installation areas. Notify the Architect if conditions are unsatisfactory. 2. Install all Work in accordance with AWI, Premium Grade Standards. 3. Install all Work plumb, level, true, aligned, rigid and straight with tight joints and no distortions. Shim as required using concealed shims. 4.. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length piec- es (from maximum length of lumber available) to the greatest extent possible. Unless otherwise shown, stagger joints in adjacent and related members. Unless otherwise shown, miter at inside and outside corners, miter and return at terminations and comply with A.W.I. Quality Standards for joinery. 5. Fill all gaps between sheetrock and base, casing, trim, etc. with a paintable caulk. 6. Fill and sand all nail and fastener holes and gaps in standing & running trim.. • 7. Recessed standards shall be installed in the shop. Standards shall be continuous unless otherwise noted, with slots perfectly aligned from one standard to the next and throughout the Project. Panels abutting standards shall be tightly fitted. No gaps will be accepted. 8. Install display hardware and shelves as directed by the Owner. K. Fabrication and installation of painted fixture: 1. Painted fixture shall appear monolithic. No joints or fasteners shall be visible. 2. Shop -fabricate in sections as large as possible. Secure and fill shop joints so that they do not sepa- rate or crack. Fill and sand flush all fastener holes. 3. Mitre all molding joints. L. Plastic Laminate - Not Used DIVISION 7: THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION; FIRESTOPPING/ FIREPROOFING - SEE DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL INFO. 7A. INTUMESCENT PAINT - NOT APPLICABLE I. GENERAL A. Albi Clad TF is a proprietary water based formulation consisting of acrylic -based resins, binders, and intu- mescent agents. Itis factory formulated for maximum quality control, and is shipped in 55 -gallon (U.S.) drums or 5 -gallon (U.S.)pails. Albi Clad TF is applied directly from the shipping containers, requiring no special additives or field mixing procedures other than initial mechanical agitation to uniformly suspend the material in the drum. Albi Clad TF CONTAINS NO ASBESTOS, and is available in both spray and trowel grades to suit the desired end use requirements. Albi Clad TF meets the fire test criteria of ASTM E84, ASTM E119, and UL263. B. Formulated for interior applications wherever fireproofing material is to be left exposed. Use where a hard, smooth -surfaced, thin architectural, coating is required and/or where heavy service abuse is anticipated. Observe standard professional painting practices for the application of water-based coatings. This product is water based and must be protected from freezing during transport, storage, and application. Adequate ventila- tion must be provided. II. SUBMITTALS A. Submit two copies of manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each product used [primer, paint, and sealer, as req'd by manufacturer]. III. MATERIALS A. Equipment recommendations 1. PUMPS Because Albi Clad TF is a heavy -bodied paint, the manufacturer recommends application with air less spray equipment. This equipment is manufactured and distributed by leading pump manufactures includ- ing: Brand / Model Speeflo - Titan Power Twin 5500 gas or electric operated. Speeflo - Titan Epic Series 1200 HPG Gas Operated Graco - Gmax 5900 Gas Operated Graco - Gmax 7900 Gas Operated Graco - Gmax 10000 Gas Operated 2. Hoses: Material lines for airless application must be rated at a minimum 3000 + psi working pressure with a 3/8 inch inside diameter. Hose length should not exceed 150 feet without consulting Albi Manufacturing. 3. Spray Guns: a. Brand / Model Binks 1M Airless Graco Contractors Airless Titan SGX-20 Airless Wagner G- 10N Airless 4. Spray Tips: a. Brand / Model ASM Zip Tips Graco Airless Tips Titan Airless Tips b.You should always have a range of tip sizes on hand at a job site since steel sizes, hose length, vertical lift, and job site conditions all impact spray patterns. The manufacturer recommends a range of tip sizes from 419-423 & 519-523. 5. Miscellaneous Equipment: The following items are recommended for use or storage on the job for opti- mum job production: a. Sufficient masking paper and tape as well as non-absorbent masking cloths to prevent or minimize over spray on finished surfaces or equipment. b. Movable scaffolding as required. c. Barrel or drum handling equipment to facilitate moving of Albi Clad TF. (A 55 -gallon drum of Albi Clad TF weighs approximately 600 pounds). d. OSHA Approved Safety Equipment e. Thickness measuring gauges to assure adequate wet and dry film thickness. f. Fiberglass ribbon (as required for specific applications). g. Supply of good quality foam paint rollers and 3 (three) or 4 (four) inch tapered polyester brushes. h. Trowel and protective gloves for patch up work, and for trowelling or palming material in areas difficult to reach with spray application equipment. i. Mechanical mixing of Albi Clad TF is required to assure uniformity of blended ingredients and proper material viscosity. For best results, use of an air operated motor or electric mixer is recommended. IV. INSTALLATION A. Surface Preparation: The surface to receive Albi Clad TF must be properly prepared in accordance with good painting practice. The surface must also be clean of all residual oil, moisture, dust, frost or other contaminates that may have formed. In areas where spot rusting has occurred, be sure all loose rust, scale, etc. is removed. Spot prime all bare steel areas with a compatible primer. B. Primers: To provide proper protection against corrosion, all steel must be primed with a proven compatible primer. If either Albi 487S or 490W is used as the primer, allow at least 48 hours for thorough drying and cur- ing before applying the Albi Clad TF. Before commencing work it is vitally important to determine the compat- ibility of Albi Clad TF with the primers. Please contact Albi Manufacturing for further details. Albi 487S - phe- nolic modified alkyd primer. Albi 490W - rust inhibitive acrylic primer Incompatible primer must be removed by acceptable techniques and subsequently primed with an acceptable primer. One technique recommended is commercial blast cleaning as outlined in the Steel Structure Painting Council (SSPC). C. Airless Application: Prior to spraying, Albi Clad TF must be thoroughly mixed to a "smooth, creamy" consis- tency. Connect material line to gun. Adjust the pump pressure to the recommended range and choose an airless tip size, sized between .419 to .423 and .519 to .523. Increase or decrease pump pressure to achieve an even spray pattern. It is always best to spray at the lowest achievable pressure. If spray tip is constantly clogging, either raise the pump pressure in five -pound increments or change to the next larger size tip. Tip extensions with swivel ends can be used to reach inaccessible areas. WARNING. AIRLESS EQUIPMENT SHOULD ONLY BE USED BY RAINED AND EXPERIENCED PERSONNEL. ALL PERSONS WORKING WITH, OR AROUND, AIRLESS EQUIPMENT, MUST BE AWARE OF INJECTION HAZARDS. EQUIPMENT OPERATION HINTS: If the pump fails to operate correctly, check the following points: 1. Check material pressure gauge to make sure they are operable. 2. Check material level in Albi Clad drum to be sure sufficient material is covering the inlet material orifice and no cavitation is occurring. 3. Check material inlet for possible malfunction or clogs. 4. It is important that all personnel involved in the use of the equipment be familiar with its operation and understand the manufacturer's recommendations for trouble shooting. D. Airless Spray Application: Mix the Albi Clad TF to a "smooth, creamy" consistency just prior to starting the spray application. Hold the spray gun a comfortable distance from the work. The trigger on the gun can be pulled continuously or intermittently to allow an even application of the material. The film thickness can be built up to 80 - 100 mils per coat. This is best achieved through multiple passes to achieve an even application. The higher film builds per coat tend to impair the product finish. For example when applying Albi Clad TF a better finish can be achieved by applying the material in multiple coats. E. As a general guide, wet film thickness coatings up to 300 mils can be built up in one day through multiple passes. Thickness applied during each pass will depend upon weather conditions and skill of the applicator. Higher film builds can result in mudcracks eveloping at the inside corners of the web and flange. While these can be easily repaired, if left untreated, produce a poor finished appearance. It is important to recognize, as pointed out above, that this 300 mils total thickness application would be accomplished in multiple passes, each pass depositing up to 80 - 100 mils film thickness and allowing sufficient time lapse between passes to achieve skin drying. Application beyond the 300 mils total thickness in one day will increase the hazard of material sag- ging. Where application calls for Albi Clad thickness greater than 300 mils, overnight drying of initial applied coating is required. F. Down Time and Clean Up: When stopping work for a break, immerse the tip of the gun in water and cover the open drum to prevent the material from hardening. This will permit quick resumption of work without the need to clean the equipment. G. When stopping work overnight or longer, as well as when the job is completed, place the pump equipment in a container of water. Clean the pump of residual Albi Clad material using an old brush or rag. Activate pump in order to cycle water, directing the material hose back into the water can. When the pump and material hose are thoroughly clean, cycle a water compatible solvent through the pump to help prevent rusting. Disconnect the material line and remove the gun for hand cleaning. H. Important Application Procedures: 1. Cold Weather Application. Because Albi Clad TF is water based, it cannot be applied, below 40 F. Also the following important points should be noted: a.It is imperative that the steel to which the material is being applied is also at or above 50 degrees F. b.Albi Clad TF MUST be stored in a heated area at or above 50 degrees F. 2. Exterior Exposure. Once fully cured, Albi Clad TF can withstand intermittent exposure to exterior condi- tions such as light rain and snow. It is however, important to recognize that Albi Clad TF is an interior prod- uct. As such it must be protected during the application and curing process from direct rain, freezing, etc. and should continue to be protected from exterior conditions including direct rain, snow, etc. until the building is weather tight. While light, intermittent exterior exposures will not adversely affect the TF it is impossible to anticipate all weather conditions for all job sites. Therefore it is our recommendation to provide continuous pro- tection until the building is enclosed. 3. Humid Application Conditions. When applying Albi Clad TF in areas under high humidity conditions, it is important to note the following: a.Surfaces to be coated must be free from all residual moisture. Albi Clad TF should not be applied whenever the substrate surface temperature is less than 5 degrees F above the dew point of the sur rounding air. b.Following good painting practice, Albi Clad TF should not be applied when the relative humidity exceeds 85%. 4. Hot Weather Conditions. When applying Albi Clad TF with high temperatures, coats must be thick enough to allow the water to remain on the steel long enough to obtain proper adhesion. High temperature envi- ronments accelerate water evaporation. The following important points should be noted. a.The temperature of the steel substrate should not be higher than 120 degrees F b.Material should be stored in doors out of direct sunlight at less than 120 degrees F If stored out doors we recommend storing drums in the open in shaded areas, since the shipping containers can act like ovens. I. Albi Clad TF Finished Appearance. Albi Clad TF serves both as a functional fireproofing material and the architectural finish. It can and should be applied to provide a neat acceptable finished appearance. Careless and sloppy workmanship always results in costly additional work and customer dissatisfaction. Albi Clad TF coat- ing applied in uniform thickness, free from globs, sags, and craters can only result in greater acceptance and use of Albi products in the future since a satisfied customer is a repeat customer. 1. The final appearance of the Albi Clad TF installation is directly dependent on the initial and subsequent spray coats. Build up the thickness slowly and uniformly through the use of successive passes. Building up the thickness too rapidly causes mudcracks, sagging and sliding. 2. The required finish appearance of Albi Clad TF is easily and quickly achieved through the use of airless spray equipment. Surface irregularities and especially flange edges, can be smoothed by light rolling with a foam roller or brush immediately after spraying. Keep the roller or brush wet with water to avoid "picking up" the applied material. 3. Where Albi Clad TF has dried hard, leaving globs or other unsightly areas, a surform or grinder can be used to correct or even out these areas. J. Small Jobs or Patch Areas. For very small jobs, not allowing or justifying the use of airless spray application, application of Albi Clad TF can be made as follows: 1. Albi Clad TF may be applied by trowel or palming method. Material is applied by a trowel thoroughly wetted with water. Do not work the Albi Clad TF too much, as it will tend to dislodge itself from the surface to which it is being applied. 2. To repair damaged areas, first remove any loose particles. Then apply Albi Clad TF with putty knife. K. Coverage Guide. Albi Clad TF exhibits coverage rates per gallon, which can be easily calculated utilizing a standard paint coverage equation. See MFR. Specs for formula. L. Contact MFR. for warranty/guarantee information. 7B. SEALANTS I. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: A. Provide sealants, backer rod, and primer at control joints, sills, heads, jambs of window, lintels, door frames, storefront members flashings, pavings, etc. and all other joints between dissimilar materials, provide caulk- ing and sealants for weather and water tightness. All sealers, etc. shoud be low to zero VOCs. II. SUBMITTALS: A. Submit two copies of manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of sealant to be used. B. Submit two samples of manufacturer's color selections. III. MATERIALS: A. Exterior Horizontal Joints: Dow Corning 890 -SL or equal. B. Exterior Vertical Joints: Dow Corning 795 color as selected by the Architect. C. Interior Joints: Name Brand paintable waterbased sealant. D. Provide the type of joint cleaning compound recommended by the sealant manufacturer for the joint sur- faces to be cleaned. E. Provide the type of joint primer/sealer recommended by the sealant manufacturer. F. Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by the sealant manufacturer to be applied to seal- ant -contact surfaces where bond to the substrate or joint filler must be avoided for performance of sealant. Provide self-adhesive tape wherever applicable. G. Sealant Backer Rod: As recommended by sealant manufacturer. H. Joint Filler: Shall be non -extruding, resilient, and non -bituminous type conforming to ASTM D1752. IV EXECUTION: A. Clean and prepare joint surfaces immediately before installation of sealant. B. Prime or seal the joint surfaces wherever shown or recommended by the sealant manufacturer. Do not allow primer sealer to spill or migrate onto adjoining surfaces. C. Install bond breaker tape wherever shown and wherever required by manufacturer's recommendations to ensure that elastomeric sealants will perform properly. p. Do not proceed with installation of liquid sealants under adverse weather conditions. Comply with sealant manufacturer's printed instructions. E. Fill sealant rabbet to a slightly concave surface, slightly below adjoining surfaces. Where horizontal joints are between a horizontal surface and a vertical surface, fill joint to form a slight cove, so that joint will not trap moisture and dirt. F. Install sealants to depths as recommended by the sealant manufacturer. G. Tool and neatly finish all joints. II. Clean adjustment materials which have been soiled. I. Cure and Protection: Cure sealants and caulking compounds in compliance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. 7F.;BATT INSULATION . 13- .1.2b ILSUBMITTALS: A. Comply with "Submittals" section of the General Requirements for sample sizes, quantities and proce- dures unless otherwise noted. B. Product data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria and limitations. III.MATERIALS: A. Provide continuity of acoustical barrier at building enclosure elements. B. Approved Manufacturers: 1. Certainteed 2. Johns Mansville. 3. Approved equal. C. Batt insulation: ASTM C655; Natural cotton fiber insulation; friction fit, conforming to the following: 1. Batt size: 16 inch. 2. Facing: rinfaced. 3. Flame/ smoke properties: in accordance with ASTM E84. IV INSTALLATION: A. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation are dry and ready to receive insulation. B. Install insulation in accordance with manufacturers instructions. C. Install in walls and ceiling spaces without gaps or voids. Do not compress insulation. D. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Insulate miscellaneous gaps and voids. E. Fit insulation tight to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services within the plane of insulation. 7G. FIRESTOPPING ARCHITECT DTMARCHITECT ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. NO PART OF THESE DRAWINGS OR SPECIFICATIONS MAYBE COPIED, REPRODUCED OR USED IN CONNECTION WTHANY WORK, OTHER THEN THE SPECIFIC PROJECT FOR WHICH THEY HAVE BEEN PREPARED, WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN AUTHORIZATION FROM THE ARCHITECT. I. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: A. Provide fire stopping as required by code in these areas: 1. Through -penetration firestopping in fire -rated construction. 2. Construction -gap firestopping at connections of the same or different materials in fire -rated con- struction. 3. Construction -gap firestopping occurring within fire -rated wall, floor or floor -ceiling assemblies. 4. Construction -gap firestopping occurring at the top of fire -rated walls. 5. Through -penetration smoke -stopping in smoke partitions. 6. Construction -gap smoke -stopping in smoke partitions. II. SUBMITTALS A. Comply with "Submittals" section of the General Requirements for sample sizes, quantities and procedures unless otherwise noted. B. Product data: Manufacturer's specifications and technical data including the following: 1. Detailed specification of construction and fabrication. 2. Manufacturer's installation instructions. C. Shop drawings: Indicate dimensions, description of materials and finishes, general construction, specific modifications, component connections, anchorage methods, hardware, and installation procedures, plus the following specific requirements: 1. Details of each proposed assembly identifying intended products and applicable UL System number, or UL classified devices. 2. Manufacturer or manufacturer's representative shall provide qualified engineering judgments and drawings relating to non-standard applications as needed. III. MATERIALS: A. Through -Penetration Firestopping of Fire -Rated Construction: 1. Systems or devices listed in the U.L. Fire Resistance Directory under categories XHCR and XHEZ may be used, providing that it conforms to the construction type, penetrant type, annular space requirements and fire rating involved in each separate instance, and that the system be symmetrical for wall applications. Systems or devices must be asbestos -free. "Mortar systems must be Warnock Hersey approved. 2.Additional requirements: Withstand the passage of cold smoke either as an inherent property of the sys- tem, or by the use of a separate product included as a part of the U.L. system or device, and designed to perform this function. 3. Acceptable manufacturers and products. a. Those listed in the U.L. Fire Resistance Directory for the U.L. System involved or Mortar systems approved by Warnock Hersey 4. All firestopping products must be from a single manufacturer. All trades shall use products from the same manufacturer. B. Construction -Gap Firestopping Of Fire -Rated Construction 1. Firestopping at construction gaps between edges of floor slabs and exterior wall construction. 2 .Firestopping at construction gaps between tops of partitions and underside of structural systems. 3. Firestopping at construction gaps betweentops of partitions and underside of ceiling or ceiling assembly. 4. Firestopping of control joints in fire -rated masonry partitions. 5. Firestopping expansion joints. 6. Acceptable manufacturers and products - those listed in the U.L. Fire Resistance Directory for the U.L. System involved C. Smoke -Stopping At Smoke Partitions 1. Through -penetration smoke -stopping: Any system complying with the requirements for through -penetra- tion firestopping in fire -rated construction, provided that the system includes the specified smoke seal or will provide a smoke seal. The length of time of the fire resistance may be disregarded. 2. Construction -gap smoke -stopping: Any system complying with the requirements for construction -gap firestopping in fire -rated construction, provided that the system includes the specified smoke seal or will provide a smoke seal. The length of time of the fire resistance may be disregarded. D. Silicone Elastomeric Compound Manufactures: 1. USG Thermafiber Smoke seal compound or approved equal. 2. Elastomeric acrylic water-based caulking material. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame Spread = 0, Smoke Developed Rating = 0. REVIEWED FOR E. Fiber Stuffing Manufacturers: OWNER AV E DA THE MT AND SCIENCE OF PURE FLOWER AND PLANT ESSENCES 767 FIFTH AVENUE NEW YORK, NY 10153 AVEDA Westfield Southcenter 2800 Southcenter Space No. 636, Level I Tukwila, WA 98188 CODE CO 1. USG Thermafiber Safing Insulation or approved equal.IIAF�LIANCE 2. Material: Mineral fiber stuffing insulation; conforming to the following:` APPROVEDa. Density: [4A] lb./cu ft. ip y b. Application Method: Friction Fit �A�� c. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread=15, Smoked development ratin;f 0 F. Accessories: 1. Primer: Type recommended by firestopping manufacturer for specific substrate suzfaces iUty� ofQ Tuk2�wil3ot TY OF TU K W I L A 2. Dam Material: Permanent: BUILDING DIVISION a. Mineral fiberboard, -" 3. Installation accessories: Clips, collars, fasteners, temporary stops or dams, and other devices required to position and retain materials in place. DRAWING TITLE SPECIFICATIONS IV. INSTALLATION A. Install penetration seal materials in accordance with printed instructions of the U.L. Fire Resistance Directory and in accordance with manufacturer's instruction. B. Seal holes or voids made by penetrations to ensure an effective smoke barrier. C. Where floor openings without penetrating items are more than four inches in width and subject to traffic or loading, install firestopping materials capable of supporting same loading as floor. D. Protect materials from damage on surfaces subject to traffic. E. Where large openings are created in walls or floors to permit installation of pipes, ducts, cable tray, bus duct or other items, close unused portions of opening with firestopping material tested for the application. See U.L. Fire Resistance Directory F. Install smoke stopping as specified for firestopping. G. Where rated walls are constructed with horizontally continuous air space, double width masonry, or double stud frame construction, provide vertical, 12 inch wide fiber dams for full thickness and height of air cavity at maximum 15 foot intervals. H. Existing Conditions: 1. Verify existing conditions and substrates before starting work. Correct unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding. 2. Proceed with installation only after penetrations of the substrate and supporting brackets have been installed. 3. .Examine penetration sealed areas to ensure proper installation before concealing or enclosing areas. 4. Keep areas of work accessible until inspection by applicable code authorities. 5. Perform under this section patching and repairing of firestopping caused by cutting or penetration by other trades. I. Firestop all interruptions to fire rated assemblies, materials and components. J. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material or other matter which may affect bonding of firestopping material. RECEIVED JUL 022013 "E144M1l CENTER FREVISIC)IV 06.28.13 ISSUE FOR LANDLORD REVIEW, PERMIT & BID 06.21.13 ISSUE FOR MILLWORK PRICING NO. DATE REVISION DRAWN BY: DTM CHECKED BY: DTM ORIG. DATE: 06.28.13 REV. DATE: 06.28.13 JOB NO. 1330 SHEET NO. 2 ■ BUILDING PERMIT NO.T...3 K. Remove incompatible material which may affect bond. L. Apply material in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. M. Compress fibered material to achieve a density of [40] percent of its uncompressed density. DIVISION 8: DOORS & WINDOWS 8A. DOORS & HARDWARE I. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: A. Wood doors shall comply with all requirements of A.W.I. Quality Standards (Premium Grade), Section 1300, • with all wood types, standards, finishes and requirements of the Architectural Woodwork specification. Provide hollow core wood doors, u.o.n. All wood shall be certified by the Forest Stewardship Council (FSC Certified) and the Contractor shall produce documentation of such to Aveda and the Architect.. B. Hollow metal doors and frames shall comply with all requirements of Grade III of the Steel Door Institute. C. Where rated doors are indicated, provide doors with the appropriate labels. D. All hardware shall be provided by the GC or FM.(should an FM be engaged). II. SUBMITTALS: Comply with "Submittals" section of the General Requirements for sample sizes, quantities and procedures unless otherwise noted. A. Submit Shop Drawings or manufacturer's literature for all doors. B. Submit shop drawings of steel doors indicate door elevations, internal reinforcement, closure method, and cut outs for glazing, louvers and finishes if required. C. Submit complete hardware schedule and product specification immediately upon award of Contract to avoid lead-time problems. D. Submit shop drawings of storefront doors indicating sizes, location and hardware. E. Provide project record documents indicating actual location of instaled cylinders and their master key code. F. Deliver at close out keys with identifying tags to owner by security shipment direct from hardware supplier. G. Submit manufacturer warrant and ensure forms have been completed in owner's name and registered with manufacturer. III. MATERIALS: A. Where no hardware fmish is noted on the schedule, provide a satin chrome finish (US 26D). B. Provide metal back boxes with all strike plates. C. Hardware: See Hardware Schedule. D. Door types: See Door Schedule. E. Provide construction cores and keys at all exterior doors. Refer to Hardware Schedule for specific hardware with interchangeable cores that will be required. GC shall be responsible for installation of the Owner sup- plied cores at Turnover. IV INSTALLATION: A. All hardware shall be tight, level, and shall operate smoothly and easily. Follow manufacturer's instructions for installation and adjustment. B. Floor pivots and strikes: Chip out existing slab as required and set flush with adjacent finished floor. C. Unless otherwise noted on the Drawings, door levers, pulls and push plates shall be mounted 42" on center above finished floor. Where multiple units of hardware occur on the same door, they shall be centered on one another. D. Provide metal back -boxes to match hardware for all strikes. E. Where floor stops cannot be located adjacent to a partition, locate 4" from hinge jamb. 8B. GLASS & GLAZING I. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: A. Provide glass in sizes and thicknesses shown on the Drawings. If thickness is not shown, provide the minimum thickness required for sheet size and application. II. SUBMITTALS: Comply with "Submittals" section of the General Requirements for sample sizes, quantities and procedures unless otherwise noted. A. Submit samples of all glazing materials (tape, sealant, etc.) that will be visible in the finished installation. B. Submit samples and shop drawings of specialty glass indicating locations of all hardware required before tempering. III. MATERIALS: A. Storefront glass: Tempered, in thickness shown on the Drawings or that are the minimum required for each application, which ever is greater. B. All interior glass and mirror not supplied by EM.: In accordance with the Architectural Woodwork Section and the Drawings. Coordinate work with F.M. C. Not used D. All exposed edges shall be polished. All other edges shall be ground. E. Tempering or other marks shall be visible only if required by building authorities having jurisdiction, and in this case only in a lower corner. No proprietary marks or tong marks shall be visible. F. Glazing tape, compounds and blocks as required and as approved by the Architect. IV INSTALLATION: A. Provide all shims, blocks, glazing compounds and other appurtenances required for a first-class installa- tion in, accordance with standard trade practice. B. Glazing materials shall be neatly cut back slightly below the level of the stop. C. Clean all glass and remove all labels at completion of work. D. Install top and bottom glazing channels, layout corners accurately with angles indicated. E. Coordinate work with concealed framing and bracing to ensure proper interface and support. F. Prevent direct metal to glass contact. G. Dissimilar metals: 1. When aluminum components come into contact with dissimilar metals, surfaces shall be kept from direct contact by painting the dissimilar metal with a heavy coat of a proper black primer., u.o.n. 2. When aluminum components come into contact with cement or lime mortar, exposed aluminum surfaces shall be painted with heavy -bodied bituminous paint., u.o.n. 8C. ACCESS DOORS I. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: A. Provide access doors where shown on the Drawings and where required by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Except as shown on the Drawings, no access doors shall be installed without the written permission of the Architect. C. No access doors shall be installed at the sales floor ceiling or walls without notification to the architect before installation. II. SUBMITTALS: Comply with "Submittals" section of the General Requirements for sample sizes, quantities and procedures unless otherwise noted. A. Submit the size and location of each proposed access door on a reproducible print of the architectural reflected ceiling plan. No access doors shall be installed until such a submittal is approved. III. MATERIALS: A. Access doors for use in NON -RATED GWB CEILINGS AND SO1-.1~1TS shall be manufactured by INTEXFORMS, Inc. Glass Fiber Reinforced Custom Products (tel. 916-388-9933 fax. 916-388-9949) model: Intex A -Panels (sized to fit). Sizes shall be indicated on drawings, or minimum required to allow access, whichever is smaller. NO _SUBSTITUTION. B. Access doors for use in FIRE -RATED GWB CEILINGS shall be manufactured by ACUDOR, Inc. (tel. 800-722-0501), model FW5050 DW (min. rating as required by code). Sizes shall be as shown on the draw- ings or the minimum required to allow access, whichever is smaller. C. Access doors for use on vertical face of soffits or on partitions shalll be manufactured by ACUDOR, Inc. (tel. 800-722-0501), model DW -5015 (min. rating as required by code). Sizes shall be as shown on the drawings or the minimum required to allow access, whichever is smaller. IV INSTALLATION: A. Install access doors in approved locations only. B. Install perfectly flush with adjacent surface. Tape into drywall. Keep reveal clean between door and frame. See manufacturer's guidelines for approved fasteners, blocking and finishing requirements. 8D. GLASS STOREFRONT METAL FRAME/GLASS DOOR METAL FRAME: I. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. This section includes glass hardware, installation of tempered all glass doors and fixed glass storefront. B. Arrange for the fabrication, finishing and installation of all storefront work by a single reputable firm. If the fabricator subcontracts the finishing and/or installation, he must provide a full-time representative to direct the work. The glass door manufacturer and installer shall be engaged in the heavy tempered glass door manufacturing and installation for at least five (5) years. C. Protect the door and glazing materials during delivery, storage and handling to comply with manufacturers' directions and as required to prevent damage to the glass and hardware. D. Safety Glazing Standard: 1/2" tempered glass must meet standards specified in ANSI Z97.1 CPSC 16 CFR 1201, ASTM C 1036, and ASTM C 1048. E. Manufacturer's Special Project Warranty on glass doors: Provide written warranty signed by the fabrica- tor of the glass doors and glass door systems agreeing to furnish within a five (5) year warranty period replacements for those doors that develop manufacturing defects. Manufacturing defects are defined as any defect materially obstructing vision through the glass, and any mechanical failure of hardware which prevents the proper operation of the doors and appropriate installation F. Refer to Miscellaneous Metals section for related materials and information. II. SUBMITTALS: COMPLY WITH SUBMITTALS SECTION FOR GENERAL REQUIREMENTS UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. A. Submit fully dimensioned shop drawings for all work of this section. Shop drawings shall clearly depict and distinguish between shop and field connections. Shop drawings shall show the details of layout and installation. Show gauges, clip angles, fasteners, and welds. Submit cut sheets for all hardware. B. Submit samples of all finishes applied to metal. All finishes shall be shop applied. C. Submit samples of all glass to be used at storefront. D.Resubmit above samples until approved by the Architect. III. MATERIALS: A. Storefront glass doors and hardware shall be as specified on the Door and Hardware schedule. Hardware shall comply with 1/2" tempered glazing safety glazing standard. See section 8B Glass and Glazing and Finish Legend for specifications. See elevations for additional information. B.Provide integrated lock with round cylinder.. See Hardware Schedule for specification. C.Metal and glass storefront shall be glasing channel at top and at botttom as Specified in the Hardware Section. D. Safety Glazing Standard for Glass and Metal Doors and for Glass and Metal Storefront: Provide fully tem- pered glass, Kind FT, which complies with ASTM C 1036 and ASTM C 1048 requirements, including those indicated by reference to type, class, quality. See Finish Legend for additional information. E. Sizes: Fabricate glass to size required for openings indicated, with edge clearances and tolerances comply- ing with recommendations of glass and hardware manufacturer. Provide glass types and thickness as indicated on drawings. F. Hardware is as specified on the Hardware Schedule and as specified on the Drawings.. IV. FABRICATION & INSTALLATION A.All holes, notches, etc. shall be drilled or cut in the glass prior to tempering. B.Inspection: Door, Metal Storefront and Channel Glass installer to inspect work of framing erector for com- pliance with manufacturing and installation tolerance, including those for size, plumb and squareness. Whenever possible, take field measurements prior to approving shop drawings to ensure proper fitting of the storefront systems. Examine top support, and anchorages for structural adequacy. Report any condi- tions that may adversely affect the installation or performance of the storefront systems to the Owner or Architect. C.Installation: Comply with printed installation instructions of storefront system(s) manufacturer. Adjust the hardware and, lock strikes to obtain proper door clearances in accordance with manufacturer's instruc- tions and shop drawings. Floor pivots shall be installed so pivots shall be flush with finish flooring. D.Protection and Cleaning: Protect glass doors, Channel Glass and storefront systems from contact with con- taminating substances resulting from construction operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come in contact with glass or hardware, remove immediately by method recommended by manufacturer. Wash glass on both faces not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled for inspections intended to establish date of substantial completion in each area of project. E. Whether or not shown on the Drawings, provide all fasteners, clip angles, welds, shims, supports, braces, and other appurtenances required to complete the work as shown in a rigid and structurally sound man- ner. F. Fully shop finish all assemblies after fabrication. Only minor touch-up of the finish will be permitted in the field after installation. G.Fabricate storefront so that all exposed joints are hairline. Seal all such joints so that no light is visible through them. No sealant shall be visible in the finished assembly. H.Fasteners shall be equally spaced and aligned with each other as well as with the fasteners on like compo- nents. I. All exposed metal shall be factory finished. SE. MANUAL ROLL DOWN SECURITY GRILLE - NOT APPLICABLE I. GENERAL REQUIRMENTS 1. Provide complete installation of the security grilles as indicated on the drawings. 2. Provide all steel framing, steel support above the ceiling and engineering required for complete installation. 3. Structural framing details and seismic installation requirements for the roll down security grille shall be provided by security grille installer under separate permit. 4. Manufacturer qualifications: min. 5 years experience producing security grilles of this type. 5. Installer qualifications: manufacturer's approval. 6. Provide minimum 2 years warranty approval. II. SUBMITTALS: Comply with "Submittals" section of the General Requirements for sample sizes, quantities and procedures unless otherwise noted. 1. Product Data. 2. Shop Drawings: Include special conditions not detailed in Product Data. Show interface with adjacent work. 3. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: a.Manufacturer's Installation Instructions. 4. Closeout Submittals: a.Operation and Maintenance Manual. b.Certificate stating that installed materials comply with this specification. III. MANUFACTURER & MATERIALS: 1. Manufacturer: Cornell Iron Works, Inc., Crestwood Industrial Park, Mountaintop, PA 18707. Telephone: (800) 233-8366, Fax: (800) 526-0841. 2. Model: Visionaire steel manual rolling grille with EZ Lift option. Provide horizontal bars spaced 2" O.C. vertical , with stacked 9" O.C. vertical chains. The finish shall be hot dipped galvanized on all parts avail- able. Substitutions shall comply with submittal procedures outlined elsewhere in specifications. 3. Bottom Bar: hot dipped galvanized steel.(minimum width and height dimension at all bays) 4. Guides: hot dipped galvanized steel with polypropelene pile runners. Guides are supported by structural tube steel. 5. Locking: Masterkeyable cylinder operable from outside of bottom bar. Insure compatibility with owner locking specification. IV INSTALLATION: A. Examine substrates upon which work will be installed and verify conditions are in accordance with approved shop drawings. B. Coordinate with responsible entity to perform corrective work on unsatisfactory substrates. C. Commencement of work by installer is acceptance of substrate. D. General: Install door and operating equipment with necessary hardware, anchors, inserts, hangers and sup- ports. E. Follow manufacturer's installation instructions. F. Following completion of installation, including related work by others, lubricate, test, and adjust doors for ease of operation, free from warp, twist, or distortion. G. Clean surfaces soiled by work as recommended by manufacturer. H. Remove surplus materials and debris from the site. I. Demonstrate proper operation to Owner's Representative. J. Instruct Owner's Representative in maintenance procedures. DIVISION 9: FINISHES 9A. DRYWALL CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEM I.GENER AL REQUIREMENTS: A. Suspension system shall conform to all applicable codes, including applicable seismic standards where they apply. II. SUBMITTALS: None unless substitutions are proposed. III. MATERIALS: A. Ceiling suspension system shall be in accordance with the details shown on the Drawings. IV. FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION: A. Install system in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and with the requirements shown on the Drawings. Directly hung components shall be suspended with not less than 12 -gauge galvanized steel wire and tightly tied with at least 3 full turns. B. No hangers shall be attached to the metal deck. C. Provide additional hangers, reinforcing, etc. as shown on the drawing and required to support soffits, false beams, light fixtures, etc. 9B. GYPSUM BOARD I. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: A. All installations and materials shall be in accordance with the U.S. Gypsum Company's latest published recommendations. II. SUBMITTALS: Comply with "Submittals" section of the General Requirements for sample sizes, quantities and procedures unless otherwise noted. A. Provide Manufacturer's catalog data, detail sheets, and specifications. III. MATERIALS: A. Gypsum board (GWB) shall be 5/8" thick firecode (Type X) unless otherwise indicated, with tapered edges. B. Provide water-resistant type GWB in toilet rooms and adjacent to any other wet areas. In no case shall water-resistant GWB be used on ceilings. C. Provide metal studs, furring channels, runners, and miscellaneous components of sizes and gauges as shown on the drawings, as required by job conditions and in accordance with the published recommenda- tions of USG. D. Metal edge trim: USG #200A, USG#200B and USG Corner Bead, tapable type. as required per applica- tion and per Drawings. E. Corner reinforcement at vertical outside corners shall be tapable corner bead. F. Extruded aluminum factory -primed edge moldings: Pittcon Softforms, in profiles shown on the Drawings. H. Expansion joints: USG #093 control joint. I. High -Impact sheetrock to be 99% recycled Gypsum, 100% recycled paper. IV INSTALLATION: A. All joints and intersections shall be taped and spackled by the three -coat method. B. Provide metal edge trim (USG #200A) taped and spackled where shown on the Drawings, where GWB meets a dissimilar material or where a GWB edge is exposed: Provide continuous metal framing behind metal edge trim. Provide metal corner reinforcing, taped and spackled at all GWB outside corners, verti- cal and horizontal. Unless otherwise noted, no framing members shall be spaced greater than 16" O.C. All outside vertical corners shall be installed using only factory tapered sides of GWB. Use metal corner bead and spackle so that corners are square. D. Provide two layers of GWB where indicated, stagger joints and comply with all other USG recommenda- tions for thisa of installation. Provide fire ratings indicated in accordance with UL -approved assem- blies.tYp g Pp E. Provide heavy -gauge framing members where shown on the Drawings and where conditions require them. Comply with USG's recommendations for installation of heavy -gauge members. E Pittcon moldings shall be installed in long lengths with joints aligned and tightly butted. Corners shall be tightly and accurately mitered. Where Pittcon molding abut Pittcon bases at millwork, the shall both align and look contiguous. The GC and FM shall c000rdinate. G. Provide expansion joints where shown on the Drawings and where required by job conditions. No joints shall be installed without the written approval of the Architect. C. 9C. ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILING I. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: A. Provide a complete ceiling assembly with all components and accessories required for a complete instal- lation, whether or not such components and accessories are specified herein. II.SUBMITTALS A. Submit complete manufacturer's literature for proposed system, including certification that the system is approved for use in the jurisdiction in question. III. MATERIALS: A. See Finish Schedule IV. INSTALLATION: A. Install ceiling in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and authorities having juris- diction. B. Provide additional framing, hangers, etc. as required to support light fixtures, fascias, etc. Provide brac- ing as shown, as required by code, and as needed for rigidity and seismic forces, if required. C. Cut and frame suspension system and box out to accommodate low ducts, pipes, etc. D. Do not attach hangers to structural deck. 9D. PAINTING I. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: A. Conform to ASTM standards as they apply to this section B. Do not apply products of this section outside acceptable range of conditions as specified by paint manu- facturer. C. Keep project premises free of painting related debris. Collect material that may constiture a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers and remove daily from the site. D. See Responsibility Schedule for finished shop painted items. E. New and existing surfaces not to paint: 1. sprinkler covers. F. All paint, sealers, finishes, etc. shall be solvent free and have a low volatile organic compound content (low VOCs) as listed by manufacturer's product literature. GC and FM to submit to Aveda and Architect for approval prior to application or installation. G. Scope of painting work: All new and existing surfaces not specifically shown to receive another finish, including but not limited to: 1. GWB surfaces 2. Wood surfaces where indicated as "painted" shall be either painted with opaque finish or clear sealer. 3, Hollow metal doors and frames 4Any exposed existing to remain surfaces: Masonry, plaster, concrete blocks, etc II. SUBMITTALS: A. Provide manufacturer's printed product data on all coatings specified, including preparation and applica- tion instructions. B. Provide two sets of samples not less than 6 inches by 8 inches in size illustrating the range of colors and textures available for each finishing product specified. C. Provide two samples of not less than six inches square illustrating selected colors and textures for each color specified. D. Attick Stock: Deliver to owner one gallon of each finish paint in each color required for the product. III. MATERIALS: A. Paint shall be as per Finish Schedule with No Substitutions B. Paint thinners and other materials recommended by coatings manufacturer as necessary to achieve fin- ishes specified. C. Patching and Surface preparation as recommended by coatings manufacturer. D. Paint types: 1. Interior GWB not scheduled for other finishes.: 1 coat latex Primer, 2 coats Eggshell on walls and 2 coats Flat Paint on ceilings. 2. Interior wood trim, wood doors and any other wood surfaces indicated to be field-painted:1 coat primer, 2 coats satin finish. Apply paint as required to match finish of shop painted fixture. 3. Hollow metal doors and frames: 1 coat Rust Inhibitive Paint, 2 coats satin finish. 4. Where wood paneling is specified, provide 1 coat of latex primer. IV INSTALLATION: A. All surfaces shall be prepared as recommended by the paint manufacturer, except where those standards are exceeded herein. B. Perform all filling, sanding and caulking required for a first-class job. C. Painting shall be done in a dust -free low -humidity environment comply with manufacturers recommen- dations for temperature and relative humidity. Each coat shall be allowed to dry completely before the next coat is applied. D. All work shall be top quality, free from drips, roller marks and brush marks, and applied evenly for com- plete coverage. E. Painted wood shall be by brush or spray. Rollers are unacceptable. F. When touch-up is required, the entire surface shall be repainted to the nearest corner or break. G. Interior wood base and trim shall be brush -painted. Roller work on wood will be rejected. H. On existing painted surfaces, prime coats may be omitted provided the new paint is compatible with the existing and covers completely. I. Fill all gaps between sheetrock and base, casing, trim and moldings with a painrable calk. Fill all nail holes on all painted surface and sand smooth. J. Verify that shop applied primers are compatible with specified finish coats. E. Protect work adjacetn to painting operations from paint spatters and spills. Immediately remove paint that falls on finished surfaces not scheduled to receive paint, using materials and techniques that will not damage affected surfaces. 9E. CERAMIC TILE - I. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: A. All Work of this Section shall be performed in accordance with the latest published recommendations of the Tile Council of America and the applicable sections of ANSI. B Preperation & slab parch sub floor shall be level to 1/4" in 10' per industry standards. II. SUBMITTALS: Comply with "Submittals" section of the General Requirements for sample sizes; quantities and procedures unless otherwise noted. A. Provide maintenance data to owner at project close out. III. MATERIALS: A. Tiles shall be as indicated on the finish legend for the toilet room and retail areas. See Finish Legend. Thresholds: Marble color and finish to match ceramic tile and run full width of framed opening. B. Grout: As recommended by the Tile Council. See finish schedule for grout color. C. Thinset floor setting bed mortar provide factory packaged latex thinset portland cement motar comply- ing with ANSI 118.4and 118.6 specifications. D. Provide Dash Patch or equal material to prepare the slab for thin set installation. E. Provide 5 sq. ft of addl. tile of each size, color, and surface finish of tile specified; locate as directed. F Use Mortar Bed: Laticrete 220 with additive Laticrete 33, comply with all MFR spsecificatios. G. See Finish Schedule for Grout Specification IV. FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION: A. Prepare the slab for thin -set installation by filling recesses and low areas, removing raised areas, and eliminatingirregularities allthat would prevent a first class installation. B. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings. C. Follow installation instructions as provided by TCA Handbook and ANSI. D. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make joints watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar, or excess grout. Cut tile to shapes and sizes indicated on the drawings. E. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units. F. Allow tile to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting. G. Protect finish floor for remainder of work to be done. H. Provide sealant joints at control joints or at minimum required for proper tile instalation, No tiles are to be cut for control or expasion joints, provide iso membrane under joints as Reqd. Verfy location of control joints with Archiect prior to Installation. I. Immediately after the finished flooring is installed the General Contractor shall continuously protect it with 1/4" VOC free masonite (or similar material made from reclaimed or recycled material) with taped joints over construction paper. The General Contractor shall be responsible for repairing, prior to store opening, any damage caused by the Contractors, any sub -contractor or other personnel. These repairs shall be indistinguishable from the remainder of the floor. 9F. LATICRETE CERAMIC TILE GROUT (Sales Floor) I. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: A. Follow adhesive manufacturer's recommendations for minimum cure time prior to grouting. B. LATICRETE SpectraLOCK PRO Grout is a sanded grout. Use of sanded grouts in joints less than 1/8" (3rnm) will result in a coarser surface texture as compared to wider joints. C. Do not add water or any other materials to the grout mixture. Do not re -temper with water. This will have an adverse effect on the product and void all warranties. D. Clean-up is critical. Prepare for the initial and final washes to having 2 pails of clean water ready for the clean up process. E. Not for use in areas subject to enzymatic cleaners and no -rinse cleaners. II. MATERIALS: Preparation and installation A. Broom/vacuum (remove debris) B. Utility knife (removes excess thin -set in joints, open A and B pouches) C. Clean water and sponges (to clean surface of tile) D. Firm edged, rubber epoxy grout float. E. Margin trowel F. Low speed drill and grout mix paddle (optional) G. Empty pails Clean-up A. Fresh water supply B. Extra sponges (for floor installation) C. Terrry cloth towels (optional for wall clean up) D. Empty pails REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED AUG 022013 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION III. STORAGE: Condition the components at 70° F (21°C) to allow for easier application. Protect Part A and Part B liquids from freezing. IV. PREPARATION: A. Ensure the tile surface has no residual film from adhesive setting material. B. The use of a topical sealer or grout release applied to unglazed porcelain tile, abrasive, non -slip or rough textured tiles or porous tile or stone surfaces before grouting will facilitate cleaning. C. Make sure tile surface and open grout joints are clean, and free from debris, grout spacers or standing water. D. Surface temperature range for installation must be above 40°F (4°C) and less that 95°F (35°C). V. WORKING TIME: Working time of grout is approximately 80 minutes at 70° F (21°C) after the components are thor- oughly mixed. Please note that working time is affected by many variables including grout mix con- sistency, surface and room temperatures. Warmer climates, for example, will shorten working time, while colder conditions will extend working time. VI. MIXING: A. Cut open Part A and B pouches, and pour the liquids (A first, then B) into a clean pail. Make sure to squeeze all the liquids out of the pouches. NOTE: Fold in half and roll up like a tooth- paste tube. B. Mix liquids thoroughly, completely blending all liquid from sides and bottom of pail. Mix with a margin trowel or slow speed drill mixer (<300 RPM). C. Once blended, add part C color powder to blended A and B liquids and mix thoroughly with margin trowel or slow speed drill mixer (<300 RPM). The LATICRETE SpectraLOCK PRO Grout unit is designed to use all the Part C color powder or most applications. For narrow joints, it is acceptable to leave out up to 10% Part C color powder to produce a more fluid mix. D. If using Part D Dazzle Powder: Mix Part D Dazzle powder into the blended liquids before adding the Part C color powder. Use one (1) Part D Dazzle cup per mini unit, four (4) Part D Dazzle cups per full unit, sixteen (16) Part D Dazzle cups per commercial unit. Be careful mix- ing, as Part D Dazzle powder is light and will become airborne easily. E. Once blended, add Part C color powder to the mix, leaving out an amount approximately equal to or slightly more that the volume of Part D Dazzle powder used. Use the empty Part D Dazzle cup to hold back the Part C color powder. NOTE: You will not be able to add all the Part C color powder when using Part D Dazzle powder. Mix to desired consistency. VII. GROUTING: A. After surfaces are cleaned, allow to dry thoroughly before grouting. B. Spread grout using a sharp edged, firm epoxy rubber float. Work the grout diagonally across the joints, packing them full. C. "Cut" excess grout off the tile surface using the edge of the float held at a 90° angle like.a squeegee, stroking diagonally to avoid pulling grout out of filled joints. ARCHITECT DT MARCH IT ECT • n�M • r 65 z x�� LL ETu 1 -ova Tc' N t N T.. m<ie o r- S a ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. NO PART OF THESE DRAWINGS OR SPECIFICATIONS MAYBE COPIED, REPRODUCED OR USED IN CONNECTION IMTH ANY WDRK, OTHER THEN THE SPECIFIC PROJECT FOR WHICH THEY HAVE BEEN PREPARED, IMTHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN AUTHORIZATION FROM THE ARCHITECT. OWNER AV E DA THE ART AND SCIENCE OF PURE FLOWER AND PLANT ESSENCES 767 FIFTH AVENUE NEW YORK, NY 10153 AVEDA Westfield Southcenter 2800 Southcenter Space No. 636, Level 1 Tukwila, WA 98188 SEAL Com) Li -,m 1 A AS N __...--'4111111 MIT CFNTFR OWNER AV E DA THE ART AND SCIENCE OF PURE FLOWER AND PLANT ESSENCES 767 FIFTH AVENUE NEW YORK, NY 10153 ;ITY PE AVEDA Westfield Southcenter 2800 Southcenter Space No. 636, Level 1 Tukwila, WA 98188 ;ITY PE DRAWING TITLE SPECIFICATIONS RECEIVED OF TUKWILA JUL 022013 1 MIT CFNTFR FZEVISI©NS 06.28.13 ISSUE FOR LANDLORD REVIEW PERMIT & BID 06.21.13 ISSUE FOR MILLWORK PRICING NO. DATE REVISION DRAWN BY: DTM CHECKED BY: DTM ORIG. DATE: 06.28.13 REV. DATE: 06.28.13 JOB NO. 1330 SHEET NO. TIM 3.3 BUILDING PERMIT NO. VIII. INITIAL WASH: A. Once grout has been spread, wait 20-30 minutes before cleaning (or within one hour of initial mixing of product). Wait longer at colder temperatures. Add initial wash cleaning additive to two gallons of clean water and mix until fully dissolved. Do not mix cleaning additive with grout. B. Submerge clean sp nge into water and wring until damp. Change water with cleaning additive mixture every 50ftB (4.6m2) when using multiple units. C. Wipe grout joints and tile surface in a light circular motion, loosening grout residue while mak- ing the joints smooth. D. Drag a clean sponge diagonally over the scrubbed surfaces to remove grout residue. Rinse sponge after every pass; use each side of sponge only once between rinsing: Discard sponges when they become "gummy" with residue. Check work as you clean. Repair any low spots with additional grout. IX. FINAL INSPECTION AND CLEANING: A. Begin final cleaning approximately one hour after initial wash has taken place. Prepare another 2 gallons of clean water and pour in the final wash cleaning additive packet, and mix until fully dissolved. B. Follow the same process as the initial wash but use the clean white scrub pad in place of sponge to break apart any leftover residue. Rinse scrub pad frequently. C. Then, drag a clean sponge diagonally over the scrubbed surface to remove froth and residue. Use each side of sponge only g2nce before rinsing and change water and cleaning additive mix- ture at least every 50ft (4.6m) when using multiple units. D. Allow cleaned areas to dry and inspect tile/stone surface. For persistent grout film/haze (within 24 hours), scrub area with mixture of two gallons (7.5 L) clean water and 4oz (118m1) white vinegar. Conduct a test area to verify results on polished stones. E. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. Inspect grout surface and repair as required with freshly mixed grout. F. Unlike cement grout haze that can be buffed off the following day, LATICRETE SpectraLOCK PRO Grout film/haze that is allowed to cure on the tile surface may be difficult to remove. Make certain to check tile surface with adequate lighting after the tile surface is dry. G. Protect finished surface from traffic for at least 12 hours at 70° F (21°C). H. Do not expose grout to acid cleaner for 7 days. I. Allow grout to cure for 10 days at 70° F (21°C) prior to use in submerged applications or steam rooms. See LATICRETE technical data sheet 192 for more information. 9G. ENJARRETM CLAY VENEER PLASTER PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes: 1. Clay veneer plaster over gypsum board for interior application. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 09260 "Gypsum Board Assemblies"; for trim accessories. 2. Section 09900 "Paints and Coatings"; for primers and sealers not specified in this section. 1.2. SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's literature for each product specified. B. Selection Samples: Provide samples of manufacturer's standard colors for color selection. Provide samples of standard textured finishes. C. Verification Samples: Submit sample for each color and textured finish specified in minimum 16 -inch by 16 -inch sample and on substrate indicated. Apply clay veneer plaster over primed substrate sample. Prepare sample to show substrate, primer, and veneer plaster and sealer in the layered application process. In addition to verification of aesthetic qualities, the sample should also be used to demonstrate compatibil- ity and application process. D. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. E. LEEDD Submittals: 1. Credit MR Prerequisite (1 point) 1 Storage and Collection of Recyclables (all of Enjarre's packag- ing is 100% Recyclable. Contact Manufacturer for Cotton Bag recycling program. 2. Credit MR 2.1 and 2.2 (1-2 Points) Construction Waste Management: Include approximate weight of clay veneer plaster to be recycled or donated in Contractor's Waste Management Plan. 3. Credit MR 4 Recycled Content: (1 point) Manufacturers' product data for clay veneer plaster indi- cating weighted post-industrial recycled content percentage. 4. Credit MR 5.1 and 5.2 (2 points possible) Regional Materials: Include clay veneer plaster in the calculations demonstrating that 20% minimum of building materials were manufactured within a 500 miles radius of the project site. Calculations include, cost, percentage of regional components, distance from project to manufacturer and total cost of all material for project. 5. Credit EQ 4.1 Low Emitting Materials: (one point) Manufacturers' product data for sealers, includ- ing printed statement of VOC content. 6. Credit EQ 4.2 Low Emitting Materials: (one point) Manufacturers' product data for clay veneer plaster and primer including printed statement of VOC content. 7. Credit ID 1: innovation in Design Surrounding your interior environment with clay that produces negative ions (when it interacts with humidity) will help to neutralize the electromagnetic effect created by appliances and synthetic plastics (latex) 1.3. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An installer who is an Enjarre experienced applicator. B. Finish Mockups: Apply mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set qualities standards for mate- rials and execution. 1. Apply mockups at location 2. Apply mockups for the following applications: a. Walls and Partitions. b. Ceilings 3. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups. 4. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. Fade Resistance: Color Pigments, ASTM D4303-03 Flame Spread: ASTM E-84. Mold Resistance: Permeability: C. D. E. F. 1.4. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials in clearly marked containers in location not subject to direct moisture. 1. Clay veneer plaster mixed with Mud Glue: Store in cool location in container for not more than 2 days. After 2 days, dry mixture thoroughly on plastic sheet. B. Waste Management and Disposal: Surplus clay veneer plaster and clean clay veneer plaster may be used as touch-up materials and extra material for Owner. Clearly mark container as "waste recycled - clay veneer plaster". Wet clay veneer plaster should be dried thoroughly on plastic sheet and stored in clearly marked container 1.5. PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Room Temperature: 1. Maintain temperatures at not less than 50 degrees Fahrenheit or greater than 90 degrees Fahrenheit for at least 3 days before application of clay veneer plaster system[s], continuously during application, and for 3 days after completing application. 2. Bring materials into room 24 hours before mixing to acclimate them to ambient temperature B. Ventilation: 1. Distribute heat evenly; prevent concentrated or uneven heat on plaster. 2. Maintain relative humidity levels for prevailing ambient temperature that produces normal drying conditions. Humidity levels should be not more than 50% relative humidity. Use mechanical means to reduce humidity levels if necessary. 3. Ventilate building spaces in a manner that prevents drafts of air from contacting surfaces during plaster application. 4. Upon completion of plaster application, natural or mechanical ventilation may be utilized if speci- fied temperature and humidity levels are maintained. 1.6. EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide Owner with 5 lbs of clay veneer plaster applied in each color and texture specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1. PRODUCTS A. EnjarreT" Clay Veneer Plaster: Proprietary dry blend of clay, fine aggregates, and pigments. 1. Manufacturer: American Clay Enterprises;8724 Alameda Park Drive NE suite F, Albuquerque, New Mexico 87102. (505) 243.5300 or (866-404-1634). a. First Coat: Enjarre Clay Veneer Plaster 2. Color[s] a. Aveda Custom Color b. Finish [second] Coat: 1) Enjarre by American Clay Sand Finish 3. Color additives in the following color[s]: a. Aveda Custom Color 4. Properties: a. Fire-resistant: Non-combustible. b. Non-toxic, non -chemical materials. c. Fade resistant. d. Mold resistant. e. Dust resistant. f. Non -dusting. g. Breathable. h. Paintable and stainable. 5. Aggregate: Calcium carbonate, Mica 6. Color Pigment: Natural oxides and Mineral pigments. B. Recycled Content by Weight: 72% post-industrial. C. Water: Potable water. 2.2. PRIMER[S] A. Textured Primer: American Clay "Sanded Primer" (or "Sanded Primer Elite"). 1. VOC content: 1.44 grams per liter. 2. Water -borne primer acceptable to clay veneer plaster manufacturer to be used where indicated with Mud Glue over paint primed Gypsum Board. 2.3. JOINT REINFORCING MATERIALS A. Trim Accessories: As specified in Section 09260 "Gypsum Board Assemblies." B. Filler: Multi-purpose joint compound or setting type joint compound. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1. EXAMINATION A. Confirm that substrate is ready to accept primer and clay veneer plaster finish. Surfaces should be dry and free of dust. Correct substrate conditions prior to clay veneer plaster application process. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General Preparation for all substrate categories: 1. Knock down high points or protrusions of more than 1/16 inch with a wide putty knife, scraper or drywall sanding screen. a. Test existing paint for lead content prior to sanding. If paint contains lead, follow OSHA pro- cedures. 2. Remove any dust by cleaning with 10% water based sealer 90% water. 3. Clean surfaces to remove dirt, grease, oil, and other foreign matter and deposits that could impair bond with plaster. a. Wash sooty or greasy surfaces with a Tri -Sodium Phosphate (TSP) or equal paint preparation cleaner. 4. Allow surface to dry. 5. Mask adjacent surfaces with painter's tape. Leave tape 1/16-1/8" inch from edge of plaster surface area so that the tape will pull off cleanly. 3.3 GENERAL APPLICATION A. Application total thickness: 1. Enjarre Clay Veneer Plaster a. Only 1 coat required, 1/16 inch maximum (thickness of two credit cards). b. If using 2 coats, 1/8 inch maximum (1/16 inch maximum per coat, thickness of two credit cards). 3.4 TRIM ACCESSORY AND JOINT REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION A. Joint Reinforcement: 1. Tape and bed: Level II (Level III for Ceilings)., Gypsum Association GA -214 2. Corner Bead: Prime with two coats of sanded primer. 3. Joints or repairs must be completely dry prior to plaster application. 3.5 PRIMER APPLICATION A. Apply primer and allow application to dry prior to clay plaster veneer application. B. Double prime outside corners. C. Brush primer along edges (outside corners) of wall,. D. Let primer dry for 3 hours or until sand "bites back" when hand is rubbed against wall. E. Brush a second coat of primer over exterior corners which are more vulnerable to nicks and clings. F. Finished corners should have slight radius. 3.6 MIXING CLAY VENEER PLASTER - GENERAL A. Prior to adding water and Mud Glue, loosely mix dry clay plaster to even the mix after settling during shipping. B. Add plaster to Mud Glue and Water Solution and evenly mix. C. Allow plaster to stand for a minimum of 30 minutes before use. D. If thickening occurs or mixture has completely dried: Add water to bring mixture to a workable consis- tency. E. Mixture consistency should resemble conventional lime and gypsum plasters. 3.7 CLAY VENEER PLASTER GENERAL APPLICATION A. Do not apply clay veneer plaster on damp surfaces. B. Apply clay plaster coat and allow it to completely dry, typically 2 to 8 hours. Apply with desired tex- ture indicated in Finish Schedule and allow to dry. C. If necessary, apply an additional coat to achieve an extremely smooth surface or to hide drywall screws and other surface blemishes. Previous coats should be completely dry and shrinkage complete prior to application of the next coat. D. For each plaster coat, finish complete walls, panels or ceilings in one operation to avoid the effects of possible variation in color. E. Lay out on plastic sheet leftover material that remains wet longer than 2 days and allow it to dry com- pletely prior to reuse. 3.8 FINISHING/TEXTURING A. Sponge (harder and rougher finish): Sand Finish 1. When second coat is leather hard (damp but no longer tacky), rub the plaster surface with a dry tile sponge, moving in a circular motion. Sand will rise to the surface. 2. After the surface dries, rework the surface with a barely damp sponge using a circular motion. This will remove most of the loose sand from the surface, compress the wall and eve out color variations. 3.9 SEALER A. Sealer: Apply 2 coats over Enjarre surface. 1. American Clay Penetrating sealer 50% dilute with water: Spray -apply in accordance with sealer manufacturer's instructions for porous substrates. 3.10 CLEANING A. Unsealed Clay Veneer Plaster: Clean with barely damp sponge and water. Do not use cleansers. B. Sealed Clay Veneer Plaster: Clean with damp sponge and water. Do not use cleansers. 3.11 PROTECTION A. Protect wall finish from construction damage. Repair damage, remove protection, and clean prior to Substantial Completion. 3.12 REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE A. Touch -Up: 1. Clay Veneer Plaster Layer: If veneer plaster is still evident underneath affected area, lightly wet the area with a sponge and water. 2.. Bonding Failure: If patch is necessary due to a lack of bonding agent on the substrate, apply more primer and then apply the clay veneer plaster. After the veneer plaster has set, use a sponge along the build seam between the patch and original material. Blend the seam with a circular motion. Smooth the seam with the appropriate tool for the final surface desired and allow patch to dry. If during the smoothing process, there are sponge marks (light streaky areas), use a very damp sponge to remove the streaks. 3. Cracks larger than 1/16 inch: Create a barrier between the crack and patch to keep the crack from translating to the surface. Remove veneer plaster down to the substrate and repair crack. Prime the repaired area as required and complete the repair as indicated above. B. Maintenance: 2.. Lightly wipe with a clean damp sponge or cloth to remove surface stains and marks. Do not use harsh cleaners or abrasive cloths. 3. Surface Cracks: Mist area with vinegar water (1 to 4 ratio of vinegar to water). Smooth with sponge or trowel. 4. Settling Cracks or Mars Larger than 1/16 inch: Fill with new material as specified in "Touch -Up" article above. 3.13 SCHEDULE A. Location: 1. System: Enjarre 2. Color: Aveda Custom Color 3. Finishes: a. [Base Coat] B. Location: 1. System: Enjarre [American Clay finish coat upgrade] 2. Color: Aveda Custom Color 3. Finishes: a. [Match Architect's sample.] 4. Sealer: American Clay Penetrating Sealer 2 coats 50% dilute with water. 4.1. WARNING: A. This product contains free silica. Prolonged exposure may causelung injury (silicoses). IARC Monograph Vol 68 (1997) concluded that there is sufficient evidence that inhaled crystalline cilica in a drystate causes cancer in humans. This product contains a chemical (silica) known to the state of California to cause cancer when present in a dry state. Eye irritant. B. Precautionary Measure: Use common sense when handling this product to reduce likelyhood of inhal- ing dust. Limestone may cause eye and skin irritation. Provide eye protection when in the dry state. Avoid breathing dust. Protect skin from prolonged contact. Wear suitable clothing and personal protective equipment. C. First Aid: If contact with eyes, flush with water. If irritation continues, contact doctor. This material is non-flamable and non explosive D. Product Warranty: American Clay products are guaranteed to give satisfactory performance only if used as recommended. liability shall be limited to refund of purchse price or the replacement of a defective product. There are no other warranties expresses or implied. 9H. RESILIENT LINOLEUM SHEET FLOORING I. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: A. All Work of this Section shall be performed in accordance with the manufacturer specifications and the applicable sections of ANSI. B Preperation & slab parch sub floor shall be level to 1/4" in 10' per industry standards. II.SUBMITTALS: Comply with "Submittals" section of the General Requirements for sample sizes, quantities and procedures unless otherwise noted. A. Provide maintenance data to owner at project close out. III. MAI 'E.RIALS: A. See Finish Schedule IV. PREPARATION & INSTALLATION A. Surface Preparation: 1. General: Prepare floor substrate in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Floor Substrate: Prepare floor substrate to be smooth, rigid, flat, level, permanently dry, clean and free of foreign materials such as dust, paint, grease, oils, solvent, curing and hardening compounds, sealers, asphalt and old adhesive residue. 3. Concrete Floor Substrate: Concrete floor substrate shall have a minimum compressive strength of 3500 psi. Refer to Division 3 Concrete sections for patching and repairing crack materials, and leveling compounds with portland cement based compounds. Do not use or. install flooring over gypsum based leveling or patching materials. a. Reference Standard: Comply with ASTM F 710 Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors and Other Monolithic Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring. B. Adhesive Flooring Installation: Cut required length of linoleum flooring from roll, allowing enough material to extend up the wall 4 to 6 inches at either end. Layout and position sheet flooring so that any seams will fall at least 6 inches from underlayment joints or saw cuts in concrete substrate. Scribe and cut flooring material to shape of vertical surfaces, including walls and partitions. Apply adhesive and lay sheet flooring into wet adhesive and roll with a 100 pound roller. Install sheet flooring square with room axis. 1. Adhesive, Seamless Flooring Installation: Rout out seams and heat weld together with complementary colored heat welding rod of complimentary composition in accor dance with resilient flooring manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Adhesive Flooring and Flash Coved Base Installation: Extend flooring up the wall in a flash coved method to a height of 4 inches or 6 inches (102 or 152 mm), as indicated. 3. Adhesive Material Installation: Use trowel as recommended by flooring manufactur er for specific adhesive. Spread at a rate of approximately 150 sq. ft./gal. (3.7 m2) as recommended by flooring manufacturer. C. Installation Techniques: 1. Where demountable partitions and other items are indicated for installation on top of finished flooring, install flooring before these items are installed. 2. Scribe, cut, fit flooring to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures and built in furniture, including pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, nosings, and cabinets. 3. Extend flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. 4. Install flooring on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, and similar items occur ring within finish floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern with pieces of flooring installed on these covers. 5. Do not install resilient flooring over expansion joints. Use expansion joint covers man ufactured for use with resilient flooring. Refer to other specification sections for expansion joint covers. 6. Adhere resilient flooring to substrate without producing open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, or other surface imperfections in completed installation. a. Use adhesive applied to substrate in compliance with flooring manufacturer's recommendations, including those for trowel notching, adhesive mixing, and adhesive open and working times. 7. Roll resilient flooring as required by resilient flooring manufacturer. DIVISION 10: SPECIALTIES 10A. SIGNAGE AND GRAPHICS: See Drawings and Responsibility Schedule. 10B.: LOCKERS: Provide metal lockers as specified on plans. 10C. METAL SHELVING: I. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: 1. Provide the Shelving as specified below. Allow 6 weeks for ordering of the shelving. 2. See drawings for quantity of shelves, length and depth. 3. Contact Pipp Shelving 4. Shelving height shall be 18" below any sprinkler heads should sprinklers be required, II. SUBMITTALS: Submit cut sheets and drawings for the specified shelving before ordering. III. MATERIALS: A. PIPP FIXTURES (SEE A-3.1 FOR MORE INFO) DIVISION 11: EQUIPMENT 11A. AUDIO/VIDEO EQUIPMENT: Supplied and installed by Owner. All framing etc. above ceiling sup- plied by the contractor. See Responsibility Schedule. 11B. FIRE EXTINGUISHERS I. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: A. Provide Fire Extinguisher cabinets with integral fire extinguishers where indicated on drawings or as required by local authorities. B. Provide "free-standing" fire extinguishers as required by code where indicated on drawings or as required by local authorities. II. SUBMITTALS: Submit cut sheets for the specified extinguisher cabinets and fire extinguishers. III. MATERIALS: A. Recessed Fire Extinguisher Cabinet with Fire Extinguisher: 1. Larsen's Manufacturing Company or Equal: Product No. 2409-R1, steel cabinet with white baked enam- el finish with solid door and black vertical lettering. Trim projection shall be 5/16" flat trim, fully recessed. Provide 51b fire extinguisher, Larsen No. MP5, UL Rating 2A-10B:C. 2. Provide alternate specifications for cabinet and extinguisher for jurisdictions requiring larger capacity fire extinguishers. B. Surface Mounted Fire Extinguisher Cabinet with Fire Extinguisher: 1. Larsen's Manufacturing Company or Equal: Product No. 2409-sm, all other specifications as for recessed cabinet and extinguisher above, Larsen No. 2409-R1. IV INSTALLATION: 1. "Free-standing" fire extinguisher(s) shall be located as required by code and for safety 2. Fire extinguisher cabinets shall be installed per the Drawings and or bolted to the partiion as required by code and for safety. DIVISION 12: FURNISHINGS- See Responsibility Schedule and Drawings for additional Information. 12A TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES: A. Provide Toilet Room Accessories as specified on the Drawings. Provide complete submittals of all accessories. DIVISION 13: DIVISION 14: DIVISION 15: DIVISION 16: SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION - See Responsibility Schedule and Drawings. CONVEYING SYSTEMS NA MECHANICAL & PLUMBING - SEE ENGINEER'S DRAWINGS. ELECTRICAL - SEE ENGINEER'S DRAWINGS. k" REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED AUG 0 2 :2013 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA JUL 022013 PERMIT CENTER (OWNER AV E DA THE ART AND SCIENCE OF PURE FLOWER AND PLANT ESSENCES 767 FIFTH AVENUE NEW YORK, NY 10153 ARCHITECT SI ONS a N i_Q ,0 n o W..-. m`Mir.s'`i.g T ;�. p I t LcE I 'S Erb Q 2N N� o lc 0 r 8 c a ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. NO PART OF THESE DRAWINGS OR SPECIFICATIONS MAYBE COPIED, REPRODUCED OR USED IN CONNECTION WITH ANY WORK, OTHER THEN THE SPECIFIC PROJECT FOR WHICH THEY HAVE BEEN PREPARED, WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN AUTHORIZATION FROM THE ARCHITECT. ISSUE FOR LANDLORD REVIEW (OWNER AV E DA THE ART AND SCIENCE OF PURE FLOWER AND PLANT ESSENCES 767 FIFTH AVENUE NEW YORK, NY 10153 DRAWING TITLE SPECIFICATIONS AVEDA Westfield Southcenter 2800 Southcenter Space No. 636, Level 1 Tukwila, WA 98188 SI ONS DRAWING TITLE SPECIFICATIONS SI ONS F EN/1 06.28.13 ISSUE FOR LANDLORD REVIEW PERMIT & BID 06.21.13 ISSUE FOR MILLWORK PRICING NO. DATE REVISION DRAWN BY: DTM CHECKED BY: DTM ORIG. DATE: 06.28.13 REV. DATE: 06.28.13 JOB NO. 1330 SHEET NO. T..3.4 BUILDING PERMIT NO. ARCHITECT SERVICE CORRIDOR ADJACENT TENANT THE ART OF SHAVING ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. NO PART OF THESE DRAWINGS OR SPECIFICATIONS MAYBE COPIED, REPRODUCED OR USED IN CONNECTION WTH ANY WORK, OTHER THEN THE SPECIFIC PROJECT FOR WHICH THEY HAVE BEEN PREPARED, WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN AUTHORIZATION FROM THE ARCHITECT. (E) (E) ELEC. PANEL I I DEMOLITION LEGEND (E) EXISTING EQUIPMENT 1 FIXTURE TO REMAIN EXISTING CONSTRUCTION TO REMAIN EXISTING CONSTRUCTION TO BE REMOVED DEMOLITION PLAN NOTES GENERAL 1. SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR ADDITIONAL NOTES AND REQUIREMENTS. 2. SEE RESPONSIBILITY SCHEDULE FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 3. THIS DEMOLITION PLAN IS DIAGRAMMATIC AND SHALL BE USED FOR REFERENCE ONLY. THE G.C. IS RESPONSIBLE TO VERIFY ALL FIELD CONDITIONS AND PERFORM DEMOLITION AS REQUIRED TO ACCOMMODATE NEW CONSTRUCTION AND COMPLETE THE WORK AS INDICATED. NOT ALL ITEMS REQUIRED TO BE REMOVED ARE SHOWN. 4. G.C. IS RESPONSIBLE FOR VERIFYING ALL FIELD CONDITIONS AFTER DEMOLITION OPERATIONS AND NOTIFYING THE ARCHITECT AND OWNER OF ANY UNANTICIPATED FIELD CONDITIONS THAT WILL ALTER THE INTENT OF THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS. 5. G.C. SHALL MEASURE THE SPACE IMMEDIATELY UPON DEMOLITION AND NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT OF THE DIMENSIONS IN WRITING ON A CONSTRUCTION FLOOR PLAN. 6. G.C. SHALL DISPOSE OF ALL DEMOLISHED MATERIALS OFF-SITE AND IN ACCORDANCE WITH OWNER'S DIRECTIONS AND ALL APPLICABLE CODES AND REGULATIONS. . SEE STRUCTURAL(WHERE PROVIDED)AND MEP DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL NOTES, REQUIREMENTS AND SALVAGE ITEMS (AS INDICATD). OBTAIN SALVAE LISTS PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF DEMOLITION. 8. FOLLOW LANDLORD REGULATIONS AND REQUIREMENTS PERTAINING TO DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL OPERATIONS. COMPLY WITH GENERAL CONDITIONS, SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS, AND GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. 9. ALL DEMOLITION OR CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITY THAT IS BOTHERSOME OR DISRUPTIVE TO NORMAL BUSINESS SHALL BE SCHEDULED IN ADVANCE WITH THE LANDLORD. ANY COSTS INCURRED FOR SPECIAL ARRANGEMENTS SHALL BE THE G.C.'S RESPONSIBILITY AT THEIR EXPENSE. 10. PROTECT ALL SURFACES TO REMAIN. G.C. SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR REPAIRING AND/OR REPLACING ALL DAMAGED LANDLORD AND ADJACENT TENANT FINISHES ASSOCIATED WITH THE BUILD -OUT. 11. REMOVE EXISTING FLOOR FINISHES DOWN TO THE SLAB UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 12. PROTECT HVAC AND ELECTRICAL ITEMS SHOWN ON THE MEP DRAWINGS TO BE RELOCATED OR SALVAGED. SAVE AND PROTECT UTILITIES THAT SERVE OTHER TENANTS. EXCEPT WHERE NOTED OTHERWISE ON THE DRAWINGS, ABANDONED MEP WORK SHALL BE REMOVED AND CAPPED IN ACCORDANCE WITH CODE. REMOVAL SHALL INCLUDE ALL UNUSED WIRING, PIPING, DUCTWORK, ETC. SEAL ALL PENETRATIONS/HOLES TO MATCH ADJACENT SLAB. 13. PROTECT ALL EXISTING STRUCTURES TO REMAIN. DO NOT CUT, DAMAGE OR COMPROMISE EXISTING STRUCTURE IN ANY WAY. WHERE SLAB CUTS OR OTHER STRUCTURAL WORK ARE REQUIRED OR CALLED FOR ON THE DRAWINGS, PROVIDE TEMPORARY SHORING AS REQUIRED. G.C. SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE COST AND ENGINEERING OF THE REQUIRED SHORING. 14. TRENCH FLOOR SLAB ONLY WHEN CONCRETE SLAB IS ON GRADE AND WHERE ALLOWED BY THE LANDLORD. OTHERWISE CORE DRILL AND PATCH FLOOR CONSTRUCTION AS REQUIRED TO RUN PIPING AND CONDUIT. ALL PENETRATIONS MUST BE SLEEVED AND SEALED WITH ONE PIPE PERMITTED PER SLEEVE. 15. G.C. SHALL X-RAY THE FLOOR SLAB PRIOR TO CORE DRILLING IF REQUIRED BY THE LANDLORD. 16. PRIOR TO MAKING ANY ROOF AND/OR FLOOR PENETRATIONS, G.C. MUST OBTAIN WRITTEN APPROVAL OF PROPOSED LOCATIONS FROM THE LANDLORD. G.G. SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR REPAIRING ANY DAMAGE RESULTING FROM THE WORK. 17. G.C. SHALL NOTIFY ARCHITECT IMMEDIATELY AFTER DEMOLITION IF ACCESS PANELS ARE REQUIRED FOR ACCESS TO LANDLORD PULL -BOXES, DAMPERS, DEVICES, ETC. 18. WHERE EXISTING GWB AND FRAMING IS IN COMPLIANCE WITH CONFIGURATIONS SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS AND ALL APPLICABLE CODES, THE G.C. MAY REUSE EXISTING. THIS WORK MUST BE SOUND AND APPEAR EXACTLY AS IF INSTALLED NEW IN COMPLIANCE WITH INDUSTRY STANDARDS. WHERE THIS RESULT IS NOT POSSIBLE, REMOVE EXISTING AND REBUILD, OR LAMINATE EXISTING WITH GWB IF CONDITIONS ALLOW. DEMOLITION PLAN KEYED NOTES OTEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION BARRICADE. G.C. IS RESPONSIBLE FOR PROVIDING BARRICADE AND ALL ASSOCIATED DRAWINGS TO THE FIRE DEPARTMENT OR LANDLORD AS REQUIRED. SEE BARRICADE ELEVATION ON THIS SHEET PROTECT EXISTING MALL ELEMENTS TO REMAIN, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, BULKHEAD, PIERS, ETC. REPAIR AS REQUIRED SO LIKE -NEW. PROTECT ADJACENT TENANTS' ELEMENTS AND FINISHES, TYP. REMOVE EXISTING BRAKE METAL AND ALUMINUM REVEAL BETWEEN BRAKE METAL AND GWB. REMOVE EXISTING FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET AT NEUTRAL PIER AND TURN OVER TO LANDLORD. PATCH AND REPAIR GWB AS REQUIRED SO LIKE -NEW. PROTECT EXISTING STRUCTURE AND COLUMN ENCLOSURE TO REMAIN, TYP. OREMOVE ALL ELEMENTS ASSOCIATED WITH EXISTING TENANT STOREFRONT, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO GLASS, METAL FRAMES, DOORS, SOFFITS, FINISHES, SIGNAGE, ETC. DO NOT ABANDON ELEMENTS ABOVE CEILING, REMOVE COMPLETELY. ® EXISTING MALL BULKHEAD ABOVE TO BE PARTIALLY REMOVED. SEE STOREFRONT SHEETS FOR DETAILS. OREMOVE ALL FIXTURES, FURNITURE, EQUIPMENT, NON -DEMISING PARTITIONS, ETC., TYP. THROUGHOUT EXCEPT AT TOILET ROOM. SEE DEMOLITION NOTES, THIS SHEET. ®PROTECT EXISTING DEMISING PARTITION, REMOVE EXISTING SLATWALLAND WOOD TRIM, TYP. THROUGHOUT. PATCH AND REPAIR DEMISING WALL AS REQUIRED. ® PROTECT EXISTING PARTITION, DOOR, FRAME AND HARDWARE TO REMAIN. REMOVE EXISTING FINISH FLOOR MATERIAL DOWN TO SLAB, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO UNDERLAYMENT, 1 THINSET, MASTIC, TILE, CARPET, RECESSED MATS, ETC.. PATCH SLAB TO MATCH ADJACENT. 11 REMOVE EXISTING WOOD SADDLE. ENVIRONMENTAL REMOVAL / DEMOLITION REQUIREMENTS GOAL: 80% OF SOLID DEMOLITION WASTE TO BE DONATED OR RECYCLED. A. BEFORE BEGINNING DEMOLITION: THE CONTRACTOR SHALL CONTACT LOCAL CHARITABLE AGENCIES, E.G. HABITAT FOR HUMANITY, TO DONATE ANY ITEMS NOT DESIGNATED TO BE RE -USED OR RETURNED TO THE OWNER. DOCUMENT ALL ITEMS DONATED AND SEND COPIES OF DOCUMENTS TO AVEDA. B. ENVIRONMENTALLY CONSCIOUS DEMOLITION: THE CONTRACTOR SHALL SEPARATE AND SALVAGE OR RECYCLE DEMOLISHED MATERIALS WHEREVER POSSIBLE (INCLUDING ALL WASTE MATERIAL DURING CONSTRUCTION) TO REDUCE LANDFILL WASTE. TYPICAL MATERIALS INCLUDE, BUT ARE NOT LIMITED TO, TILE FLOORING, METAL STUDS, GYPSUM BOARD, LOOSE AND BUILT-IN FIXTURES, ETC. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE DOCUMENTATION VERIFYING RECEIPT BY SALVAGE YARD OR RECYCLING CENTER. CONTACT JAMIE SNEED, DIRECTOR OF STORE DESIGN, AT 763-951-4256 WITH ANY QUESTIONS. SEE DEMOLITION SPECIFICATIONS FOR FURTHER NOTES. 12 13 14 15 PROTECT EXISTING STRUCTURAL SLAB, SEE DETAILS FOR TRENCHING. FULL HEIGHT WRAP AROUND AVEDA GRAPHIC 01. N 1 1 ADJACENT TENANT PROTECT EXISTING MALL CEILING PROTECT EXISTING MALL BULKHEAD PROVIDE DUST BARRIER (EG. VISQUEEN) ON BACK FACE AS REQ'D. PROTECT EXISTING MALL LIGHT COVE 6' 0" x 7'-0"H FRAMELESS DOUBLE DOORS, FLUSH WITH BARRICADE EXTERIOR FACE OF NEUTRAL PIER, TYP. PAINTED GWB AND STUD BARRICADE PER LANDLORD CRITERIA OWNER AV E DA THE ART AND SCIENCE OF PURE FLOWER AND PLANT ESSENCES 767 FIFTH AVENUE NEW YORK, NY 10153 AVEDA Westfield Southcenter 2800 Southcenter Space No. 636, Level 1 Tukwila, WA 98188 DRAWING TITLE DEMOLITION PLAN N PROTECT MALL FLOORING CONFIRM ALL DIMENSIONS AND CLEARANCES IN THE FIELD, VERIFY W/ MALL MANAGER 4'-5" VIF VIF REMOVE PORTION OF SLAB AS REQUIRED FOR NEW FLOOR DRAIN. SEE PLUMBING DRAWINGS FOR SCOPE. AT NO TIME SHALL THE STRUCTURAL INTEGRITY OF THE SLAB BE COMPROMISED. COORDINATE REMOVALS WITH LANDLORD. X-RAY SLAB IF REQUIRED BY LANDLORD PRIOR TO ANY REMOVALS. OBTAIN LANDLORD WRITTEN APPROVAL BEFORE PROCEEDING. REMOVE ALL EXISTING ELECTRICAL RECEPTACLES, ASSOCIATED WIRING, ETC. ELEC. EQUIPMENT, TYP. THROUGHOUT EXCEPT AT TOILET ROOM. EXISTING ELECTRICAL SERVICE / EQUIPMENT. SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR SCOPE. 3'17" L 15'-101/2" VIF 3'-3" VIF" NOTE: G.C. SHALL BE SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR STRUCTURAL STABILITY AND ADEQUATE BRACING OF THE BARRICADE. City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION 2BARRICADE ELEVATION . SCALE: 3/16" = 1'-0" PROTECT EXISTING PLUMBING FIXTURES AND ASSOCIATED PLUMBING. PROTECT ALL TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES. REMOVE EXISTING CEILINGS, HANGERS, LIGHTING, ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT, HVAC EQUIPMENT, DUCTWORK AND 17 ALL ASSOCIATED ELEMENTS, TYP. THROUGHOUT. SEE MEP DRAWINGS FOR SCOPE. (1).EXISTING WALL MOUNTED EXIT SIGN WITH EMERGENCY LIGHTS TO REMAIN. RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA JUL 022013 PERMIT CENTER REV' ISI(DIN 06.28.13 ISSUE FOR LANDLORD REVIEW, PERMIT & BID 06.21.13 ISSUE FOR MILLWORK PRICING NO. DATE REVISION DRAWN BY: DTM CHECKED BY: DTM ORIG. DATE: 06.28.13 REV. DATE: 06.28.13 JOB NO. 1330 SHEET NO. D..1 .0 BUILDING PERMIT NO. FLOOR DRAIN, SEE SHEET P1.0 HIGH SHELVING ABOVE @ z 6'-8" AFF, TYP. WATERPROOF MEMBRANE PER LANDLORD SPECIFICATIONS UNDER FIN. FLR. AND 6" UP FACE OF ADJOINING PARTITIONS WALL MTD. FIRE EXTINGUISHER PLUMBED WATER DISPENSER, SEE SHEET P1.0 RECESSED HAND DRYER, FRAME OPENING IN EXISTING PARTITION AS REQ'D. EXISTING DEMISING WALL, MAINTAIN RATING, TYP. ELECTRICAL, TEL./DATA EQUIPMENT, SEE E -SHEETS. PROVIDE F.R.T. PTD. PLYWD. BACKER BOARD AS REQ'D. PROVIDE IDENTIFICATION SIGNAGE ON REAR DOOR PER LANDLORD CRITERIA CONSTRUCTION NOTES GENERAL 1. SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR ADDITIONAL NOTES AND REQUIREMENTS. 2. SEE RESPONSIBILITY SCHEDULE FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 3. SERVICE CORRIDOR ACCESSIBLE TOILET RM. SEE SHT. A-3.1 FOR DESK AND SHELVING DTLS. 61-6" MAX TRAVEL DISTANE = 60" 54" FRONT APPROAxCH G.C. IS RESPONSIBLE FOR THE PATCHING, REPLACING AND THE INSTALLATION OF FIRESTOPPING AND/OR DRAFTSTOPPING AS REQUIRED BY CODE IN EXISTING OR NEW CONSTRUCTION, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE FOLLOWING LOCATIONS: A. B. C. D. E. INTERCONNECTIONS BETWEEN ENCLOSED VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL SPACES. CEILING AND FLOOR LEVELS OF CONCEALED SPACES IN STUD WALLS AND FURRED SURFACES. FURRED SPACES SHALL BE FIRESTOPPED INTO AREAS NOT TO EXCEED THOSE SPECIFIED BY CODE. CONCEALED SPACES BETWEEN SLEEPERS OR SHIMS UNDER FLOORING OR SUBFLOORING. OPENINGS IN RATED CONSTRUCTION OCCURRING AROUND PIPES, DUCTS AND OTHER PENETRATIONS, INCLUDING ALL EXISTING DEMISED PARTITIONS AND PENETRATIONS. G.C. SHALL SURVEY EXISTING CONDITION OF DEMISING PARTITIONS AND SHALL PATCH / REPAIR ALL HOLES IN DEMISING PARTITIONS AND CEILING / ROOF TO MAINTAIN RATING OF PARTITIONS AS INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS. 4 G.C. IS RESPONSIBLE FOR PATCHING NEW AND EXISTING OPENINGS IN SLABS, RATED PARTITIONS, AND OTHER RATED CONSTRUCTION AS REQUIRED TO MATCH AND MAINTAIN RATING. 5 G.C. IS RESPONSIBLE FOR THE INSTALLATION OF FIRE -RETARDANT TREATED BLOCKING AND FIRE -RETARDANT TREATED PLYWOOD BACKING IN PARTITIONS AS REQUIRED TO SECURE WALL MOUNTED WORK. REFER TO RESPONSIBILITY SCHEDULE FOR BLOCKING REQUIRED FOR ITEMS FURNISHED OR INSTALLED BY OWNER'S CONTRACTORS AND MILLWORKER, AND MEP DRAWINGS FOR LOCATIONS OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT. G.C. SHALL SUPPLY AND INSTALL METAL BLOCKING WITHIN PARTITIONS WHERE REQUIRED BY CODE. 6 AT NO TIME SHALL BLOCKING WITHIN CEILING BE WOOD OR FIRE -RETARDANT TREATED WOOD. 7 G.C. SHALL FURNISH AND INSTALL FIRE EXTINGUISHERS IN COMPLIANCE WITH MOST CURRENT NFPA REGULATIONS OR AS DIRECTED BY LOCAL FIRE MARSHALL. B NOTHING SHALL BE ATTACHED TO, SUSPENDED FROM OR PENETRATE THROUGH THE FLOOR OR THE ROOF DECK ABOVE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 9 G.C. SHALL FRAME, BRACE AND/OR SUSPEND AS REQUIRED TO/FROM THE TOP CHORD OF JOISTS OR STRUCTURAL STEEL WHICH EXIST ABOVE THE SPACE. 10. G.C. SHALL COVER AIR OPENINGS BEFORE & DURING CONSTRUCTION. 11. G.C. IS RESPONSIBLE FOR COMPLYING WITH ALL APPLICABLE LAWS CONCERNING HAZARDOUS MATERIALS. 12. G.C. IS RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL STRUCTURAL PENETRATIONS & ROOFING WORK IF INDICATED ELSEWHERE ON THE DRAWINGS. 13. FILLING HOLES IN SLABS AND WOOD FLOORS: IN CONCRETE FLOORS: FILL SMALL HOLES (LESS THAN 6" IN DIAMETER) WITH NON -SHRINK GROUT AND PLACE (1) #3 REINFORCING DOWEL EMBEDDED 2" INTO THE SIDE OF THE HOLE WITH HILTI HY-150 ADHESIVE ANCHORS, SO THAT THE GROUT DOESN'T FALL OUT TO THE FLOOR BELOW. THE BAR COULD BE DIAGONAL, SO THAT DRILLING IS POSSIBLE. G.C. SHALL NOTIFY ARCHITECT IF ANY OPENING IS GREATER THAN 6" IN DIAMETER. IN WOOD FLOORS: FILL ALL HOLES WITH CONSTRUCTION TO MATCH ADJACENT. 14. G.C. IS RESPONSIBLE FOR PAINTING ALL SURFACES BEFORE INSTALLATION OF FIXTURES. 15. G.C. SHALL CHECK IN WITH LANDLORD'S OPERATIONS MANAGER PRIOR TO STARTING WORK. 16. ALL SHEETROCK TO BE MINIMUM 95% POST CONSUMER RECYCLED GYPSUM CONTENT & 20 GAMIN. STEEL STUDS TO BE USED ON ALL INTERIOR PARTITIONS. SEE SPECS FOR ADDITIONAL NOTES AND REQUIREMENTS. 17. G.C. SHALL REPAINT AND/OR REPAIR LANDLORD PROPERTY (NEUTRAL PIERS, BULKHEAD, REAR CORRIDOR, ETC.). DAMAGED DURING TENANT IMPROVEMENTS. 18. ALL FLOOR PENETRATIONS MUST BE SLEEVED AND SEALED LIQUID TIGHT. LAYOUT 1. IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE G.C. TO FIELD VERIFY EXISTING CONDITIONS AND DIMENSIONS. 2 FINAL PLACEMENT OF ALL LAYOUTS SHALL BE APPROVED IN FIELD BY ARCHITECT OR OWNER PRIOR TO THE COMMENCEMENT OF ANY FRAMING. 3 NOTIFY ARCHITECT DURING LAYOUT AND PRIOR TO FRAMING IF: A. B. C. DIMENSION LABELED "MIN" CAN NOT BE ACHIEVED. DIMENSION LABELED +/- VARIES MORE THAN 2" FROM ACTUAL FIELD DIMENSION. ANY DISCREPANCY, OMISSION OR UNANTICIPATED FIELD CONDITION ALTERS THE INTENT OF THESE DOCUMENTS. LAY OUT PARTITIONS STARTING FROM CONDITIONS WHERE ALIGNMENT WITH EXISTING CONSTRUCTION IS SHOWN (UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE IN DRAWINGS). UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL DRAWINGS BE SCALED. IF DIMENSIONS ARE NOT INDICATED ON THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS THE G.C. SHALL CONTACT THE ARCHITECT OR OWNER FOR DIRECTION. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE FROM FACE OF FINISH TO FINISH (UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE IN DRAWINGS). DIMENSIONS INDICATED IN PLAN FOR MILLWORK ARE OVERALL FINISHED DIMENSIONS. G.C. SHALL COORDINATE WITH MILLWORKER TO VERIFY ROUGH OPENINGS REQUIRED FOR MILLWORK INSTALLATIONS. COORDINATION 1. G.C. SHALL VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AND CONDITIONS AFTER DEMOLITION AND COORDINATE ALL TRADES PRIOR TO ANY WORK. CHECK IN WITH MALL OPERATIONS PRIOR TO ANY WORK. 2 ALL PENETRATIONS AND/OR MODIFICATIONS TO STRUCTURAL STEEL OR CONCRETE MUST BE COORDINATED WITH THE LANDLORD. 3 Q.G. IS RESPONSIBLE FOR COORDINATING ALL LAYOUT ISSUES WITH MILLWORKER TO ESTABLISH MILLWORK LAYOUTS (WALL CASES, PORTALS, DOORS & FRAMES, ETC.). OBTAIN MILLWORK SHOP DRAWINGS PRIOR TO ANY FRAMING. 4 G.C. IS RESPONSIBLE FOR SUPPLYING FIELD INFORMATION AND DIMENSIONS TO THE MILLWORKER OR ANY OTHER OWNER'S CONTRACTORS AS REQUIRED FOR EACH CONTRACTOR TO PERFORM THEIR TRADE. 60" x 54" FRONT APPROACH ELEC. & TEL/ DATA PANELS 3'-2" C� L5'-0/HOD 60" x 64" FRONT APP1OACH ELD.,\ W-4 WALL PANEL, RUN PANELS BEHIND PERIMETER FIXTURES, PROVIDE CUT OUTS WHERE RECEPTACLES OCCUR. MECHANICALLY FASTEN PANELS TO FRAMING AND MTL. GROUNDS WITHIN PARTITION, FILL ALL SCREW HOLES, TYP. DASHED ELEMENTS REPRESENT MILLWORK SCOPE, COORDINATE W/ MILLWORKER FOR ALL BLOCKING REQUIREMENTS @ PERIMETER FIXTURES, TYP. L 48" x 48" FRONT APPROACH - i L ----J r 4' x 4' WATERPROOF MEMBRANE PER LANDLORD SPECIFICATIONS UNDER FIN. FLR. @ SINK AND 6" UP FACE OF ADJOINING PARTITION 38'-10 1/2" VIF J CONSTRUCTION PLAN SCALE: 3/8" = 1'-0" NOTE: 1. ALL SHEETROCK TO BE 95% POST -CONSUMER RECYCLED CONTENT GYPSUM WALL BOARD AND 20 GA. MIN. STEEL STUDS TO BE USED ON ALL INTERIOR PARTITIONS. SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR ADDITIONAL NOTES AND REQUIREMENTS. 2. TENANTS GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO CHECK-IN WITH MALL OPERATIONS MANAGER PRIOR TO START WORK. 3. COVER RETURN AIR OPENINGS BEFORE AND DURING CONSTRUCTION 4. ALL SAW CUTTING AND / OR TRENCHING OF SLABS ON GRADE SHALL BE COORDINATED WITH LANDLORD. GC SHALL VERIFY AND BE RESPONSIBLE FOR DAMAGE TO UNDERGROUND CONDUIT AND WIRING. CONSTRUCTION LEGEND - — — LEASE LINE EXISTING CONSTRUCTION TO REMAIN 0 ROOM NAME NEW PARTITION - SEE PARTITION TYPES PARTITION TYPE - SEE SHEET A-4.0 FOR MORE INFO. DOOR KEY - SEE DOOR SCHEDULE ON SHEET T-2.0 ROOM NAME — EXISTING BUILDING COLUMN GRID FIRE EXTINGUISHER 1'-0" �12'-0" AFF -+)- S.P. SPOT ELEVATION ELEVATION MARKER STARTING POINT FOR LAY -OUT ELEVATION KEY -4—DRAWING NUMBER .04- SHEET NUMBER SECTION KEY -.—DRAWING NUMBER 41—SHEET NUMBER DETAIL KEY •4 ----DRAWING NUMBER ,y—SHEET NUMBER SALES FLOOR ADJACENT TENANT THE ART OF SHAVING I I I I i I 1 I I I I I 1 I L J I I _I — I J T MAX TRAVEL DISTANCE = m 47'-10" ±36'-5" V I F r L J� r I r I L J EXISTING DEMISING WALL, TYP. EXISTING NEUTRAL PIER 1 GWB FASCIA ABOVE SHOWN DASHED SEE SHEET A-2,0 FOR STOREFRONT DIMS. 4! ADJACENT TENANT bk-6 .2.2. to LEASELINE EDGE OF LOW CLG. ABOVE BLADE SIGN ABOVE SHOWN DASHED SIM. TO SEE SHEET A-2.0 FOR PARTITION DTL. NEUTRAL PIER AND BASE TO MATCH OPPOSITE EXISTING REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED AUG 022013 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION RECEIVED CITY OF'TUKWILA JUL 022013 PERMIT CENTER AV E DA THE ART AND SCIENCE OF PURE FLOWER AND PLANT ESSENCES 767 FIFTH AVENUE NEW YORK, NY 10153 AVEDA Westfield Southcenter 2800 Southcenter Space No. 636, Level 1 Tukwila, WA 98188 ARCHITECT I-- U III I.- F- 0 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. THESE DRAWINGS MAYBE COPIED, USED IN CONNECTION OTHER THEN THE FOR WHICH PREPARED, WITHOUT AUTHORIZATION FROM OR REPRODUCED SPECIFIC THEY Q M '� r` V °I� M ��[ a� z coN- � i� E U ._g c=6 N 17:N 9. c‘,7)c4 IY c a n 8 oo g n: NO PART OF SPECIFICATIONS OR WITHANY WORK, PROJECT HAVE BEEN PRIOR WRITTEN THE ARCHITECT. .I AV E DA THE ART AND SCIENCE OF PURE FLOWER AND PLANT ESSENCES 767 FIFTH AVENUE NEW YORK, NY 10153 DRAWING TITLE CONSTRUCTION PLAN ER EN/I 3IC7hJ AVEDA Westfield Southcenter 2800 Southcenter Space No. 636, Level 1 Tukwila, WA 98188 DRAWING TITLE CONSTRUCTION PLAN ER EN/I 3IC7hJ 06.28.13 ISSUE FOR LANDLORD REVIEW, PERMIT & BID 06.21.13 ISSUE FOR MILLWORK PRICING NO. DATE REVISION DRAWN BY: DTM CHECKED BY: DTM ORIG. DATE: 06.28.13 REV. DATE: 06.28.13 JOB NO. 1330 SHEET NO. _ IBUILDING PERMIT NO. FOR REFRIGERATOR AND MICROWAVE FOR PLUMBED WATER DISPENSER JUNCTION BOX FOR HAND DRYER, LOCATE POWER PER MFR. RECOMMENDATION EXISTING RECEPTACLE ELECTRICAL, TEL./DATA EQUIPMENT, SEE E -SHEETS DOORBELL SERVICE CORRIDOR ACCESSIBLE TOILET RM. STOCK ROOM RUN STONE FLOORING INTO CLOSET NICHE 93"L x 45"W ANTI -FATIGUE MAT WI BEVELED EDGES, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE FOR MORE INFO., VERIFY DIMS. IN FIELD 411 Tr 24" AFF L____J 0 (E) MALL FINISH FINISH AND POWER NOTES GENERAL FINISH NOTES 1. 2. 3. 4. SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR ADDITIONAL NOTES AND REQUIREMENTS. SEE RESPONSIBILITY SCHEDULE FOR SCOPE DIVISIONS. SEE FINISH SCHEDULE FOR ALL FINISH SPECIFICATIONS. PROTECT ALL EXISTING TO REMAIN SURFACES, INCLUDING MALL PAVING AND STOREFRONT NEUTRAL PIERS OR BULKHEAD. CLEAN, PATCH, REPAIR OR REPLACE ALL EXISTING FINISHES TO "LIKE -NEW" CONDITIONS. GENERAL POWER NOTES 1. SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR ADDITIONAL NOTES AND REQUIREMENTS. 2. SEE RESPONSIBILITY SCHEDULE FOR SCOPE DIVISIONS. 3. SEE MEP DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL NOTES, SPECIFICATIONS AND REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL ELECTRICAL AND COMMUNICATION WORK. 4. ALL OUTLETS, PHONE AND DATA JACKS ARE SHOWN IN ARCHITECTURE DRAWINGS FOR CRITICAL LOCATION AND PLACEMENT ONLY, NOT QUANTITY. SEE MEP DRAWINGS FOR OTHER REQUIRED OUTLETS, WIRING AND SPECIFICATIONS. 5 SEE MEP DRAWINGS FOR EMPTY CONDUIT WITH PULL -STRING AND STUB -UP REQUIREMENTS. 6. ALL FIRE ALARM DEVICES SHOWN FOR CRITICAL LOCATION AND PLACEMENT ONLY, NOT QUANTITY. SEE MEP DRAWINGS FOR FIRE ALARM SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS. 7. REFER TO ELEVATION DRAWINGS FOR MOUNTING HEIGHTS IF NOT INDICATED ON PLAN. CONTACT ARCHITECT IMMEDIATELY IF CRITICAL DIMENSIONS ARE NOT PROVIDED - DO NOT SCALE DRAWINGS FOR MOUNTING LOCATIONS OR PLACEMENT. 8. ALL RECEPTACLES IN BACK OF HOUSE SHALL BE LOCATED 18" A.F.F UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 9. ALL RECEPTACLES IN SALES SHALL BE LOCATED AS SHOWN ON SHEET A-1.1. 10. ALL RECEPTACLES/SWITCHES ON BROWN WALLS TO BE BROWN OUTLET WITH DARK BROWN PLATE. ALL RECEPTACLES ON WHITE WALLS TO BE WHITE WITH WHITE PLATE. 11. ALL SWITCHES SHALL BE LOCATED 42" A.F.F. U.O.N. 12. ALL FLOOR PENETRATIONS MUST BE SLEEVED AND SEALED. 13. ALL ELECTRICAL AND PLUMBING CORING/TRENCHING SHALL BE COMPLETED SIMULTANEOUSLY, COORDINATE WITH LANDLORD'S ON-SITE CONSTRUCTION REPRESENTATIVES. 14. COMPLETE WATER TESTING OF WATERPROOFING IN TOILET ROOM AND UNDER SALES FLOOR SINK WITH LANDLORD'S ON-SITE REPRESENTATIVE PRIOR TO FLOOR FINISH INSTALLATION. C 04 ELEC. & TEL/ DATA PANELS non ROUTE (3) 1" CONDUIT INTO CASHWRAP WIRING CAVITY AND HOMERUN TO TEUDATA BOARD (CASHWRAP TEL/DATA) ROUTE (1) 3/4" CONDUIT INTO CASHWRAP WIRING CAVITY AND HOMERUN TO SECURITY BOARD (SECURITY) ROUTE (1) 1" CONDUIT INTO CASHWRAP WIRING CAVITY TO TEUDATA BOARD (FUTURE WIRING) G.C. TO SURFACE MOUNT (5) J -BOXES ON FLOOR UNDER ACCESS PANEL LOCATIONS IN CASHWRAP (2) HOLDUP BUTTONS, MOUNTED WITHIN MILLWORK, CONNECT TO SECURITY RECEPTACLES MOUNTED ON RAIL WITHIN CASHWRAP WIRING CAVITY BY FIXT. MFR. CONFIRM RECEPTACLE & J -BOX LOCATION(S) W/ FIXT. MFR. PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. G.C. TO COORDINATE ALL WORK & MAKE FINAL CONNECTIONS. 18' 48" A 48" AFF ST C-04 K All mom AllAll -N- •11/ HU –L_ –I All 1111, r .•.•.....'.• ..'.•...'.•.•...•.'.•.•.....•.•.•.',..•.•.•.•,....'.•...........•... • ...• . • . • . • • CENTER RECEPTACLE ON FIXTURE, TYP. FINISH AND POWER PLAN FINISH AND POWER LEGEND (E) (R) B C D G GFI - EXISTING - RELOCATED - IN BASE, SEE DETAIL -CEILING MOUNTED - DEDICATED -GROUNDED - GROUND FAULT INTERRUPTER 38c WALL OR FIXTURE MOUNTED DUPLEX RECEPTACLE sr FLUSH FLOOR MOUNTED DUPLEX RECEPTACLE WALL OR FIXTURE MOUNTED QUAD RECEPTACLE WALL MOUNTED TELEPHONE OUTLET X WALL MOUNTED DATA OUTLET WALL MOUNTED COMBINATION TEL./DATA OUTLET WALL MOUNTED FIRE ALARM HORN/STROBE WALL MOUNTED FIRE ALARM STROBE ONLY EJ FIRE ALARM PULL STATION F-1 FIRE ALARM WARDEN STATION (FLOOR) FINISH SECURITY DEVICES FLOOR MOUNTED JUNCTION BOX - WALL MOUNTED JUNCTION BOX CEILING MOUNTED JUNCTION BOX 0 90° PROTECTED HDMI RECEPTACLE CD THERMOSTAT THERMOSTAT REMOTE SENSOR INDICATES CIRCUIT/FIXTURE OR DEVICE ON TIME CLOCK CIRCUIT 6 INDICATES CIRCUIT/FIXTURE OR DEVICE ON NIGHT LIGHT CIRCUIT El MD HOLD UP BUTTON SAFE CONTACT WALL MOUNTED KEYPAD WALL MOUNTED MOTION DETECTOR S WALL MOUNTED SIREN WALL MOUNTED STROBE LIGHT 41: SALES FLOOR All 41 Iup,I _ 24" AFF I 24" AFF 24" A FF rI 24" AFF r r 24" AFF 60" 60" 60" 24" 24" 24" 24" 24" 24" 24" 24" AFF 24" AFF ON AN CIRCUIT POWER / DATA POR A/V EQUIPMENT (TERMINATE SPEAKER WIRES) UNDER SHELF LIGHTING HUB/UPS, MONITOR, SPARE MODEM, FAX, CPU CONDUIT & PULLSTRING TO CASHWRAP (SECURITY) TO CASHWRAP PHONE FAX /COPIER ETHERNET NOTE: SEE ELEVATIONS ON SHEET A-3.1 FOR MORE INFO OFFICE 11D D 1 1 I CENTER UNDER DESK I WITHIN KNEE SPACE MANAGER'S DESK HOLD UP BUTTON COORDINATE SAFE - CONTACT POWER/LOCATION WITH SECURITY VENDOR mow 1---1 24" AFF r 24" AFF ADJACENT TENANT THE ART OF SHAVING 24" AFF 1 24" AFF I I 7- 24" AFF ALL CEILING MOUNTED RECEPTACLES 0 STOREFRONT ON TIME CLOCK, TYP. PARTIAL TILE LAYOUT SHOWN FOR CLARITY. TILE CONTINUES THROUGHOUT SALES FLOOR —PROVIDE MALL TILE TO MATCH EXISTING AS REQ'D. PROTECT EXISTING MALL FLOORING TO REMAIN (E) MALL FINISH . . . • . • • . . , ...•. .•. .•.•,•.•.•. ...•..•.•.'.......•.•..,..•.•.•.•.•.•.•.' • ' • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • POWER / DATA DIAGRAM AT MANAGER'S DESK NOT TO SCALE (E) 5" CONC. SLAB ON GRADE, VERIFY #4x 11-7" 0 12 MAX. EW, DRILLED & EPDXIED W13" MIN. EMBED, MIN. 2 PER SIDE ELECTRICAL BOX OR CONDUIT BANK CUT & ROUGHEN, TYP. ADJACENT TENANT SEE RCP FOR POWER REQUIREMENTS @ STOREFRONT SIGN ABOVE FLUSH FLOOR RECEPTACLE, SEE DETAIL 3 FLUSH FLOOR RECEPTACLE 0 STOREFRONT ON TIME CLOCK, SEE DETAIL 3 SEE RCP FOR POWER REQUIREMENTS @ BLADE SIGN ABOVE NOTE: • USE 180 DIAMETER HOOK IF #4 BAR INTERFERES WI ELECTRICAL BOX, CONDUIT, OR OPPOSING TRENCH WALL. • USE SIMILAR DETAIL AT SLAB TRENCH, STAGGERING #4 BARS ALONG OPPOSITE SIDES OF TRENCH WALL. MAXIMUM TRENCH WIDTH = 21-0". ALA ( FILL WITH CONCRETE HAVING COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH EQUAL TO OR GREATER THAN 4000 PSI +211 TYP. PLAN 6" TYP. ALL SIDES SECTION A -A SET COLLAR AND COVER FLUSH WITH FINISHED FLOOR, SEE SPECIFICATION ON SHT. E3.0 GROUT TO BOX COLLAR FILL SOLID AFTER SETTING BOX CONDUIT FINISHED TILE FLOOR EXISTING CONC. SLAB ON GRADE FLUSH FLOOR BOX AND TRENCHING DETAIL NOT TO SCALE „43EVIEWED FOR PE COMPLIANC APPROVED AUG 02 2013 City of Tukwila UILDING DIVISION RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA JUL. 0 2 2013 PERMIT CENTER ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. NO PART OF THESE DRAWINGS OR SPECIFICATIONS MAYBE COPIED, REPRODUCED OR USED IN CONNECTION 1MTH ANY WORK, OTHER THEN THE SPECIFIC PROJECT FOR WHICH THEY HAVE BEEN PREPARED, WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN AUTHORIZATION FROM THE ARCHITECT. OWNER AVEDA THE ART AND SCIENCE OF PURE FLOWER AND PLANT ESSENCES 767 FIFTH AVENUE NEW YORK, NY 10153 AVEDA Westfield Southcenter 2800 Southcenter Space No. 636, Level 1 Tukwila, WA 98188 DRAWING TITLE FINISH AND POWER PLAN SEAL \ ,--, ,-...., c, .1. 1* il,.... A ---- ---) A_..1.4\ gn 06.28.13 ISSUE FOR LANDLORD REVIEW, OWNER AVEDA THE ART AND SCIENCE OF PURE FLOWER AND PLANT ESSENCES 767 FIFTH AVENUE NEW YORK, NY 10153 AVEDA Westfield Southcenter 2800 Southcenter Space No. 636, Level 1 Tukwila, WA 98188 DRAWING TITLE FINISH AND POWER PLAN DRAWING TITLE FINISH AND POWER PLAN FI3IDNI3 06.28.13 ISSUE FOR LANDLORD REVIEW, PERMIT & BID 06.21.13 ISSUE FOR MILLWORK PRICING NO. DATE REVISION DRAWN BY: DTM CHECKED BY: DTM ORIG. DATE: 06.28.13 REV. DATE: 06.28.13 JOB NO. 1330 SHEET NO. -1 'I BUILDING PERMIT NO. HIGH SHELVING ABOVE SHOWN SERVICE CORRIDOR ACCESSIBLE TOILET RM. DASHED, SEE SHT. A-3.1 FOR DTLS. T YP. STOCK ROOM 3'-0" FREESTANDING PERIMETER MILLWORK FIXTURES, TYP. SEE DWG. 2 FOP; CASHWRAP DETAIL WALL MOUNTED MISSION STATEM ENT GRAPHIC, SEE FIXTURE SCHEDULE FOR SIZE FULL HEIGHT ADJUSTABLE SHELVING ON STANDARDS, SEE ELEVS. ON SHT. A-3.0 AND DET. 2 / SHT. A-3.1 SALES FLOOR ALIGN CASHWRAP METAL SHROUD W! GWB CORNER ADJACENT TENANT THE ART OF SHAVING F.R.T. CURTAIN ON SURFACE MOUNTED TRACK, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE FOR SPEC. FULL HEIGHT ADJUSTABLE SHELVING ON STANDARDS, SEE ELEVS. ON SHT. A-3.1 AND DET. 2 /SHT. A -a1 PLUMBED WATER, DISPENSER, SEE SHEET P1.0 SAFE rT I j FILE T CAB. STORAG CLOSET MR. CHAKR INVATI GRAPHIC (4) LU -1 (2) LU 1 F-161 60'x54" FROM APPROACH FIXTURE SCHEDULE - Westfield Southcenter, WA FIXTURE NO. DESCRIPTION COMMENTS QUANTITY PROVIDED BY PERIMETER FIXTURES F-160 3'-0" FREESTANDING DOMAIN WITH LEVELERS. WHITE. INCLUDE HEADER RAIL. 4 F.M. F-161 3'-0" FREESTANDING DOMAIN WITH LEVELERS. GINGER. INCLUDE HEADER RAIL. 6 F.M. LOOSE FURNITURE FN -1 STOOL FOR MAKE-UP STATION 1 F.M. FN -2 STOOL FOR COMMUNITY TABLE ISSUE FGR LANDLORD REVIEW, 4 F.M. FN -3 COMMUNITY TABLE VERIFY FINAL SIZE WITH AVEDA 1 F.M. FN -4 CHAIR FOR STYLING STATION TAKARA BELMONT "CURVED ART" CHAIR ST -M40 WITH DARK WOOD AND BASE BS-B1A- VERIFY CUSHION COLOR WITH AVEDA 1 F.M. EXPERIENCE FIXTURES F-301 MAKE-UP STATION MOUNT MIRROR PER AVEDA DIRECTION AND SHOP DRAWINGS 1 F.M. F-314 WALL MOUNTED SINK FOR EMPLOYEE USE ONLY. PROVIDE BACK SPLASH AS SHOWN IN ELEVATIONS. 1 F.M. F.610 STYLING STATION MOUNT MIRROR PER AVEDA DIRECTION AND SHOP DRAWINGS 1 F.M. CASH WRAP / BACKWRAP F.420 8'-0" CASH WRAP SEE DTL.2 THIS SHEET FOR MORE INFO. F.M. TO CONFIRM FINAL MATERIALS WITH AVEDA. 1 F.M. F-600 NOMINAL 8'-0" BACK WRAP PROVIDE GROMMET. 1 F.M. LAUNCH PAD TABLES / BROWSABLE NESTING TABLES FN -110 EXTRA SMALL TABLE 1 F.M. FN -111 SMALL TABLE 1 F.M. FN -112 MEDIUM TABLE 1 F.M. OTHER FIXTURES F�960 WALL MOUNTED TRAVEL TOWER 1 F.M. W-4 PANELS DURAPALM WALL PANELS 6"x 48" PANELS, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE ON SHT. T-2.0. ORDER THROUGH AVEDA PORTAL. AS REQ'D. F.M. VISUAL ELEMENTS PB FLOOR MOUNTED ILLUMINATED POSTER BOX BOLT TO FLOOR AS REQ'D. 1 SEE COVER SHEET FOR REQ'D VENDOR MR. CHAKRA MR. CHAKRA AND ALL ASSOCIATED ELEMENTS 1 AVEDA DOMAIN SIGNAGE DOMAIN SIGNAGE PROVIDE PER BRAND REQUIREMENTS. AS REQ'D. F.M. LU -1 MINI LIGHTBOX AT DOMAINS 6 F.M. MISSION STATEMENT WALL MOUNTED MISSION STATEMENT GRAPHIC EXTERNALLY ILLUMINATED, SIZE 5'-6"W x 4=6"H 1 SEE COVER SHEET FOR REQ'D. VENDOR LEAF GRAPHIC WALLAPPLIED GRAPHIC EXTERNALLY ILLUMINATED, APPROX. SIZE 4'-0"W x 11'-7"H VIF 1 AVEDA INVATI GRAPHIC WALLAPPLIED GRAPHIC EXTERNALLY ILLUMINATED, SIZE 4'-0"W x 51-4"H 1 AVEDA FIXTURE PLAN NOTES 1. UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED, ALL FIXTURES, FURNISHINGS, ETC. SHOWN ON THE FIXTURE SCHEDULE ARE TO BE PROVIDED AND INSTALLED BY THE FIXTURE MANUFACTURER F.M. IS RESPONSIBLE FOR MOUNTING 1 BRACING ALL ELEMENTS AS REQUIRED. 2. ALL CORDS, PLUGS AND OTHER ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS SHALL BE BLACK. 3. ENSURE ALL BLOCKING I WALL PANELS ARE MECHANICALLY FASTENED DIRECTLY TO METAL STUDS. 4. MINIMUM CLEAR AISLE WITH FURNISHINGS, ETC. ON ONE SIDE SHALL BE 36". 5. MINIMUM CLEAR AISLE WITH FURNISHINGS, ETC. CN BOTH SIDES SHALL BE 44'. 6. FIXTURE MANUFACTURER TO PROVIDE SHOP DRAWINGS TO AVEDA FOR REVIEW PRI ORTO FABRICATION. °o I SHELF MOP HANGER In n nl REFR. &MW ii ELEC. &TEL./ DATA PANELS COAT HOOKS P n n n n n_ LEAF GRAPHIC ....• .............• .......• ..• ............• ..• . • WALL MOUNTED SINK FIXTURE @ 34" AFF, FOR EMPLOYEE USE ONLY, SEE DWG. 3 FOR DETAIL FIXTURE PLAN MirSCALE: 3/8" = PATRON SIDE ACCESSIBLE CHECK WRITING SURFACE, COUNTER 34" AFF CASH WRAP SCHEMATIC EMPLOYEE SIDE WORK COUNTER SURFACE @ 35' AFF PROVIDE EDGE DTL. SO END OF GLASS IS NOT EX POSED KOHLER BOLERO K -2610 -SU SINK, UNDER; MOUNT 1/4" THICK STAINLESS STEEL SINK TOP PLAN EMPLOYEE SINK SCALE: 1" = 1'-0" ADJACENT TENANT 1'-11 516" —, VI'D 4- 2-7-4 REVIEWED FOR CODE1COMPLIANCE APPROVED AUG 0 2 2013 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION 30" X 48" SIDE APPROACH RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA JUL 022013 PERMIT CENTER ARCHITECT ALL RI GHTS RESERVED. NO PART OF THESE DRAW NGS OR SPECI FI CATIONS MAYBE COPIED, REPRODUCED OR USED IN CONNECT! ON WITH ANY WORK, OTHER THEN THE SPECIFIC PROJECT FOR WHICH THEY HAVE BEEN PREPARED, WTH OUT PR OR WRITTEN AUTHOR ZAT1 ON FROM THE ARCHITECT. (-OWNER AV E DA THE ART AND SCIINCR Or PWRL' PLCin=IJ! AND PLANT ESSENCES 767 FIFTH AVENUE NEWYORK, NY 10153 AVEDA Westfield Southcenter 2800 Southcenter Space No. 636, Level 1 Tukwila, WA 98188 DRAWING TITLE FIXTURE PLAN REVISIC)NiS 06.25.13 ISSUE FGR LANDLORD REVIEW, PERMIT & BID 06.21.13 ISSUE FOR MILLWORK PRICING NO. DATE REVISION DRAWN BY: DTM CHECKED BY: DTM ORIO. DATE: 06.28.13 REV. DATE: 06.28.13 JOB NO. 1330 SHEET NO. A OE 1 0 2 BUILDING PERMIT NO. EXISTING EXHAUST FAN, SEE M-DWGS. SERVICE CORRIDOR ACCESSIBLE TOILET RM. 10'-6" ACT -1 SURFACE MOUNTED LIGHT TRACK ABOVE LOW CLG., SHOWN DASHED UNDER -SHELF LIGHT FIXTURE GYP. BD. CLG. @ 9'-0" AFF @ CLOSET MILLWORK FIXTURES BELOW SHOWN DASHED, TYP. SALES FLOOR (HIGH CLG.) 12-0" GWB (P-7) ADJACENT TENANT THE ART OF SHAVING 3' 6"L SURFACE MOUNTED CURTAIN TRACK, CENTER BETWEEN MILLWORK FIXTURES BELOW ENTRY SOFFIT 10'-0" GWB (P-7) EXISTING CLG. ELEMENTS IN TOILET RM. TO REMAIN TD, TYP. TB, TYP. EXISTING WALL MOUNTED LIGHT FIXT. TO REMAIN MECH. UNIT ABOVE SHOWN DASHED, SEE DETAIL 2 FOR SEISMIC BRACING DETAILS EXISTING WALL MTD. EXIT SIGN W/ EMERGENCY LIGHTS SEE SHEET FP1.0 FOR SEMI -RECESSED SPRINKLER HEAD LAYOUT IN BACK OF HOUSE = = O = „,� ..I` ..1c 47 = — . �47F- TD, TYP. TB, TYP. RELOCATED FIRE ALARM STROBE, TYP. POWER LOCATED IN PLENUM ABOVE ON TIME CLOCK FOR ILLUMINATED STOREFRONT SIGN, G.C. TO PREWIRE MAIN PANEL; SIGNAGE VENDOR TO SUPPLY CLASS 2 PLENUM RATED LOW VOLTAGE WIRE AND TRANSFORMER 0_.0._0 -. • --0 -.. .................... RELOCATED FIRE ALARM STROBE, TYP. SURFACE MOUNTED LIGHT TRACK @ HIGH CLG., TYP. RECESSED CLG.•TROUGH W/ SURFACE MOUNTED LIGHT TRACK STOCK ROOM 10'-5 1/2" ACT -1 SALES CEILING ACCESS PANEL SPECIFICATIONS 1. ACCESS DOORS FOR USE IN NON -RATED GWB CEILINGS AND SOFFITS SHALL BE MANUFACTURED BY: INTEXFORMS, INC._ (TEL. 916-388-9933, FAX 916-388-9949, 8880 ELDER CREEK RD., SACRAMENTO, CA 95828) MODEL: APS "LIFT N SHIFT' ACCESS PANELS, SQUARE CORNERS. SIZES SHALL BE AS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS, OR MINIMUM REQUIRED TO ALLOW ACCESS, WHICHEVER IS SMALLER. NO SUBSTITUTIONS SHALL BE PERMITTED. 2. ACCESS DOORS FOR USE IN FIRE -RATED GWB CEILINGS SHALL BE MANUFACTURED BY: ACUDOR, INC. (TEL. 800-722-0501), MODEL FW -5050 -DW (MINIMUM RATING AS REQUIRED BY CODE). SIZES SHALL BE AS INDICATED ON DRAWINGS, OR MINIMUM REQUIRED TO ALLOW ACCESS, WHICHEVER IS SMALLER. NO SUBSTITUTIONS SHALL BE PERMITTED. REFLECTED CEILING PLAN NOTES GENERAL 1. SEE SPECIFICATIONS FOR ADDITIONAL NOTES AND REQUIREMENTS. 2. SEE RESPONSIBILITY SCHEDULE FOR SCOPE DIVISIONS. 3. AT NO TIME SHALL THE STOREFRONT OR OTHER CONSTRUCTION BE SUSPENDED FROM THE UNDERSIDE OF THE FLOOR OR ROOF CONSTRUCTION ABOVE. AT ALLTIMES ITEMS ARE TO BE SUSPENDED FROM THE BUILDING STRUCTURE OR SUPPORTED ON THE FLOOR. 4. SEE MEP DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL NOTES, SPECIFICATIONS AND REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL, PLUMBING, SPRINKLER AND FIRE ALARM WORK. 5. Q.C. IS RESPONSIBLE FOR SUBMITTING A COORDINATED SHOP DRAWING INDICATING ELECTRICAL, MECHANICAL, SPRINKLER AND PLUMBING WORK ABOVE PROPOSED CEILING. THE G.C. SHALL VERIFY ALL EXISTING FIELD CONDITIONS AND COORDINATE ROUTING AND PLACEMENT OF EQUIPMENT WITH ALLTRADES PRIOR TO THIS SUBMISSION. 6. HEIGHTS INDICATED ARE FROM FINISHED FLOOR TO FINISHED CEILING. NOTIFY ARCHITECT OR OWNER TO REVIEW ANY DISCREPANCIES BETWEEN PROPOSED CEILING HEIGHT AND EXISTING CONDITIONS AFTER DEMOLITION WORK IS COMPLETED. 7 IN ADDITION TO CEILING ACCESS PANELS INDICATED IN PLAN, ALLOW FOR (3) EXTRA 24"X24" ACCESS PANELS IN THE CONTRACT PRICE. 8. ALL CEILING GRILLES, ACCESS PANELS AND SPRINKLER HEADS ARE SHOWN ON PLAN FOR LOCATIONS ONLY. IF THERE ISA DISCREPANCY BETWEEN ARCHITECTURAL AND ENGINEERING DRAWINGS, G.C. SHALL CONTACT ARCHITECT FOR INSTRUCTIONS PRIOR TO ANY WORK AND SHALL INCLUDE IN THE CONTRACT PRICE THE MORE EXTENSIVE WORK SHOWN. 9. UNLESS EXPRESSLY REQUIRED BY LOCAL CODE, NO LIGHT FIXTURES ON THE SALES FLOOR ARE TO BE INSTALLED WITH A REMOTE TEST BUTTON. ALL LIGHTS SHALL HAVE INTEGRAL TEST BUTTONS. IF LIGHTS ARE INSTALLED WITH REMOTE TEST BUTTONS, G.C. SHALL REPLACE AT THEIR OWN EXPENSE. SPRINKLER NOTES 1. SPRINKLER COVERAGE SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR, MORE SPRINKLER HEADS MAY BE REQUIRED THAN SHOWN. SEE MEP SPRINKLER DRAWING FOR SPRINKLER HEAD LAYOUT. 2. HEADS SHOWN FOR LOCATIONS RELATIVE TO LIGHT FIXTURES, WALLS AND OTHER CEILING FEATURES ONLY. ALL SPRINKLER HEADS ON THE SALES FLOOR SHALL BE INSTALLED SO CENTERED ON LIGHT FIXTURES/GRILLES, ETC. AND EQUALLY SPACED BETWEEN LIGHT FIXTURES/GRILLES ETC. 3. G.C. SHALL PROVIDE SPRINKLER AND FIRE ALARM SHOP DRAWINGS BASED ON THE ARCHITECTURAL REFLECTED CEILING PLAN. SHOP DRAWINGS SHALL BE SUBMITTED, IN ATIMELY FASHION, FOR REVIEW PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. SHOULD INSTALLATION OCCUR PRIOR TO REVIEW AND APPROVAL, THE G.C. SHALL, AT THE OWNER'S OR ARCHITECT'S DISCRETION, BE REQUIRED TO RELOCATE HEADS AND DEVICES PER APPROVED SHOP DRAWINGS. THE RELOCATION SHALL BE AT THE G.C.'S EXPENSE. SEE ENGINEER'S DRAWINGS FOR SPECIFICATIONS, DETAILS, ETC. SUPPLY AND RETURN AIR GRILLES LOCATED IN GWB FASCIA ABOVE, SEE M -SHEETS RECESSED INDIRECT WALL WASHER, CENTER ON MILLWORK FIXTURE BELOW, MOUNT SO LAMP SIDE IS CLOSER TO WALL REFLECTED CEILING PLAN SCALE: 3/8" = 1'-0" RCP LEGEND SEE E -SHEETS FOR ALL LIGHT FIXTURE SPECIFICATIONS, CIRCUITING, ETC. (E) (R) X SA/RA c - EXISTING - RELOCATED SUPPLY AIR GRILLE IN CLG. SEE SCHEDULE ON M -SHEETS FOR TYPE AND LOCATIONS RETURN AIR GRILLE IN CLG. SEE SCHEDULE ON M -SHEETS FOR TYPE AND LOCATIONS SUPPLY/RETURN AIR GRILLE IN SALES = FLOOR LOW CEILING FASCIA H Xi/X2® H X1 -W / X2 -W 0 LINEAR DIFFUSER FIBERGLASS ACCESS PANEL, SEE SPEC. BELOW RECESSED CEILING SPEAKER EXIT SIGN W/ DIRECTIONAL ARROWS AS INDICATED ON RCP X1 CLG. MTD., SALES AREA X2 CLG. MTD., BACK OF HOUSE X1 -W WALL MTD., SALES AREA )C2 -W WALL MTD., BACK OF HOUSE CONCEALED SPRINKLER HEAD. SEE MEP DRAWINGS OO SEMI -RECESSED SPRINKLER HEAD IN SD CEILING MOUNTED SMOKE DETECTOR TIC LIGHT FIXTURE ON TIME CLOCK J -BOX ABOVE CEILING CEILING MOUNTED DUPLEX RECEPTACLE HATCH INDICATES GWB CEILING AREA PAINTED IN DARK COLOR, SEE DTLS. C -EM -NL EM -1 EM -1 EM -2 -EMERGENCY - NIGHT LIGHT SURFACE MOUNTED EMERGENCY LIGHT - CLG. / WALL MOUNTED RECESSED EMERGENCY LIGHT TD LIGHT TRACK W/ TRACK HEADS (TO) p,. a TB SURFACE MOUNT TRACK TB /TB -1 TB -1 SUSPENDED TRACK TD LED PAR38 TRACK HEAD (NFL) TE UNDER -SHELF FLUORESCENT LIGHT FIXTURE TH/THA R -1D2 SECURITY DEVICES R-1 sM FLUORESCENT FIXTURE TH : LAY -IN THA : SURFACE MOUNTED RECESSED INDIRECT WALL WASHER FLUORESCENT FIXTURE SINGLE HEAD RECESSED LIGHT FIXTURE SWITCH MOTION DETECTOR SWITCH. SEE E -SHEETS FOR MORE INFO CEILING MOUNTED FIRE ALARM STROBE AND KEY MD CEILING MOUNTED MOTION DETECTOR DC DOOR CONTACT GB CEILING MOUNTED GLASS BREAK DETECTOR s CEILING MOUNTED STROBE LIGHT CEILING MOUNTED SIREN SALES FLOOR (LOW CLG.) GWB (P-8) ADJACENT TENANT REUSE (E) 6" LT GA BRACE, NS/FS (E) UNISTRUT, TYP. 3 PLCS TOP, 3 PLCS BOTT. (E) OPEN WEB JOIST (E) 3/8" DIA. THREADED ROD HANGERS @ (E) UNISTRUT, 3 PLCS NEW MECH UNIT FLANGE FASTEN AT (E) BRACE DUCT A SECTION LOOKING WEST L (E) 3/8" DIA. THREADED ROD HANGERS @ EA UNISTRUT REUSE (E) 6" LT GA BRACE, BOTH SIDES NEW MECH UNIT (E) OPEN WEB JOIST (E) ROOF r --- NOTE: • ADD WIRE BRACING IN N/S AND EM DIRECTIONS AT 18" x 10" DUCT; PLACE BRACING APPROXIMATELY 10'-0" FROM NORTH END OF DUCT. MECH. UNIT SEISMIC BRACING NOT TO SCALE SECTION A -A LOOKING SOUTH bi-20-zzc� POWER FOR ILLUMINATED BLADE SIGN, SEE NOTE ABOVE (E) UNISTRUT, TYP. 3 PLCS TOP, 3 PLCS BOTT. #10 WIRE, CLAMP TO TOP CHORD OF OPEN WEB JOIST FASTEN @ 3 LOCATIONS REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED AUG 0 2 2013 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA JUL 022013 PERMIT CENTER ARCHITECT DT MARCHITECT ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. NO PART OF THESE DRAWINGS OR SPECIFICATIONS MAYBE COPIED, REPRODUCED OR USED IN CONNECTION WITH ANY WORK, OTHER THEN THE SPECIFIC PROJECT FOR WHICH THEY HAVE BEEN PREPARED, WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN AUTHORIZATION FROM THE ARCHITECT. OWNER AV E DA THE ART AND SCIENCE OF PURE FLOWER AND PLANT ESSENCES 767 FIFTH AVENUE NEW YORK, NY 10153 AVEDA Westfield Southcenter 2800 Southcenter Space No. 636, Level 1 Tukwila, WA 98188 DRAWING TITLE REFLECTED CEILING PLAN REVISIONS 06.28.13 ISSUE FOR LANDLORD REVIEW, PERMIT & BID 06.21.13 ISSUE FOR MILLWORK PRICING NO. DATE REVISION DRAWN BY: DTM CHECKED BY: DTM ORIG. DATE: 06.28.13 REV. DATE: 06.28.13 JOB NO. 1330 SHEET NO. A INS 1 . BUILDING PERMIT NO. ADJACENT TENANT NEUTRAL PIER AND BASE TO MATCH OPPOSITE EXISTING 1/2" ALUM. REVEAL TO MATCH MALLTILE AND GROUT TO MATCH, AS REQ'D. DOOR IN CLOSED POSITION SHOWN DASHED, DOOR GLASS MUST ALIGN WITH ADJACENT GLASS WHEN IN CLOSED POSITION (E) DEMISING WALL GWB PARTITION AS SCHEDULED PITTCON SWR -025-063, MITER FLANGE W/ REC. BASE FLANGE (E) MALLTILE BELOW, TYP. mot z c.1 1/4" GAPS TYP. SF -1 APPLIED CLAY FINISH, ON GWB SUBSTRATE, TYP. FACE OF SCHEDULED FINISH A 1/2" MAX. GAP BT EDGE OF GLASS LEASE LINE SCHEDULED STOP NOTE: INSTALL DUST -PROOF STRIKES @ OPEN AND CLOSED POSITIONS FOR BOTH DOORS SCHEDULED OFFSET PIVOT, SET PLATE FLUSH W/ FIN. FLR. F.O. RECESSED BASE BELOW SHOWN DASHED, TYP. LINE OF SOFFIT ABOVE MALL TILE MTL. TRANSITION STRIP PROVIDE END CAP, TYP. @ RECESSED GLAZING CHANNEL GLASS AS SCHEDULED LIGN STOREFRONT ENLARGED PLAN DETAILS SCALE: 1/2"= 1'-0" 5" TALL, 1"THK. CLEAR PUSH-THRU LETTERS W/ LED BACKLIGHT PLYBOO FLAT GRAIN EBONY SURFACE NOTE: SIGNAGE DRAWINGS SHOWN FOR DESIGN INTENT ONLY. SIGNAGE VENDOR TO PROVIDE ENGINEERED SHOP DRAWINGS FOR PERMIT AND LANDLORD APPROVAL PRIOR TO FABRICATION. In C SURFACE MOUNTED NON -ILLUMINATED 1/8" THK. LASER CUT ALUMINUM TAGLINE BRUSHED ALUMINUM MOUNTING PLATE, APPROX. 3.5" W X 15" H X 1/4" THICK, W/2" TUBE STANDOFFS. SIDE ELEVATION (2 SIDES) 114"114" END ELEVATION j� LIT BLADE SIGN DETAILS SCALE: 11/2"= 1'-O" PROVIDE 2 LAYERS F.R.T. PLYWOOD FOR SIGN ATTACHMENT BLOCKING AS REQ'D. MOUNTING POSTS ..4 .41 .m. ip . Co ATTACHED TO 1/4" PLATE AND BLOCKING BY TOGGLE BOLTS, AS REQ'D. #4 GRAIN NON -DIRECTIONAL ALUMINUM SIDE PANELS, FLUSH W/ PLYBOO, ALL SIDES (NO VISIBLE FASTENERS) C PLAN (E) MALLTILE F.O. RECESSED BASE BELOW SHOWN DASHED F.O. GWB PITTCON STR-025-063, MITER FLANGE W/ REC. BASE FLANGE BRAKE METAL RETURN ('L' BEND) z O J ADJACENT TENANT SF -2 BRAKE MTL. PANEL W/ NO VISIBLE FASTENERS, ON 3/4" F.R.T. SUBSTRATE, TYP. (OPP. SIDE SIMILAR) SF -1 SF -2 APPLIED CLAY FINISH 7EXISTING MALL FASCIA BEYOND Q SIGN 15'-6" AFF VIF • TOP OF POP -OUT STOREFRONT POWDER COATED BRAKE METAL PANEL INTERNALLY ILLUMINATED DOUBLE SIDED BLADE SIGN PROVIDE F.R.T. PLYWD. WITHIN PARTITION AS REQ'D., COORD. W/ SIGN MFR. GL -1 GL -1 SS -1 CLEAR TEMPERED LOW -IRON GLASS, TYP. FACE -LIT LED LETTERSET (12"H LETTERS), WARM WHITE, W/ NON -ILLUMINATED ALUMINUM TAGLINE (APPROX. 1 1/4"H) SALES FLOOR CLG. BEYOND SHOWN DASHED 10'-0" AFF • TOP OF GLASS / UNDERSIDE OF ENTRY & BLADE SIGN INWARD SWINGING GLASS ENTRY DOORS W/ RAILS, TO REMAIN OPEN DURING BUSINESS HOURS MILLWORK FIXTURE WITHIN SHOWN DASHED ADJACENT TENANT 1/2" REVEAL, TYP. @ BOTH SIDES OF NEUTRAL PIER NEUTRAL PIER TO MATCH EXISTING OPPOSITE SS -1 4"H BASE PROVIDE MALL BASE TO MATCH RECESSED GLAZING CHANNEL BELOW GROUT JT. BELOW 3/4" F.R.T. SUBSTRATE, TYP. 3) 1/4" GAP METAL PANEL PLAN DETAIL EXISTING NEUTRAL PIER BASE EXISTING 1/2" ALUM. REVEAL BRAKE MTL. PANELTIGHTTO EXISTING REVEAL, EXTEND 1/2" MIN. PAST REVEAL SHIM / BLOCK AS REQ'D. SCALE: 6" = 1'-0" CLAY FINISH FACE OF GWB PARTITION ADDITIONAL LAYER 5/8" GWB EDGE BEAD BUTT PANEL TIGHT ('L' BEND), 1/16" GAP MAX., TYP. 3/4" F.R.T. PLYWD. SUBSTRATE THICKNESS AS REQ'D. FOR ALIGNMENT BRAKE METAL RETURN ('L' BEND) @ BOTTOM OF PANEL, SET TIGHT TO FLOOR FINISHED FLOOR F: METAL BASE SECTION DETAIL `'� SCALE: 6" = 1'-0" 6'-0" DOORS EQ. ,t3'-8 1/2") 3" VIF (-1: STOREFRONT ELEVATION / SCALE: 3/8" = 1'-0" POWDER COATED BRAKE METAL PANEL ADJACENT TENANT NON TRANSLUCENT GRAPHICS ON INSIDE FACE OF GLASS, VFY. W/ OWNER PRIOR TO FABRICATION. GRAPHIC TO BE NON -VINYL, PRINTED ON RECYCLED CONTENT MATERIAL EXISTING NEUTRAL PIER AND BASE • FINISHED FLOOR STOREFRONT SYSTEM • STOREFRONT SYSTEM SHALL BE C.R. LAURENCE GLASS ENTRANCE SYSTEM U -CHANNELS OR ARCHITECT APPROVED EQUAL: RECESSED SHALLOW BOTTOM U -CHANNEL (SCBS3812CL); RECESSED WIDE TOP U -CHANNEL (NH2BSCL). PROVIDE END CAPS AND GLAZING GASKET. GLASS SHALL BE 1/2" CLEAR TEMPERED LOW -IRON, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE. • ENTRY DOORS SHALL BE C.R. LAURENCE WEDGE -LOCK GLASS ENTRANCE SYSTEM OFFSET DOOR RAILS OR ARCHITECT APPROVED EQUAL: 4" SQUARE BOTTOM RAIL; 4" SQUARE TOP RAIL (LHR4SBS12CL & RHR4SBS12CL). PROVIDE END CAPS AND OFFSET PIVOTS. GLASS SHALL BE 1 /2" TEMPERED LOW -IRON, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE. • DOOR AND STOREFRONT FINISH SHALL BE BRUSHED STAINLESS, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. • SEE DOOR AND HARDWARE SCHEDULES ON SHEET T-2.0 AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR MORE INFORMATION. • SUBMIT COMPLETE SHOP DRAWINGS FOR THE STOREFRONT, DOORS, AND BRAKE METAL TO ARCHITECT FOR REVIEW WITHIN THE FIRST TWO WEEKS OF CONSTRUCTION. • THE ENGINEERING OF THE STOREFRONT SYSTEM, GLAZING AND DOORS SHALL BE THE SOLE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CONTRACTOR. SIGNAGE • SIGN FABRICATOR SHALL SUBMIT COMPLETE SHOP DRAWINGS FOR ALL SIGNS. • OBTAIN ALL REQUIRED APPROVALS AND PERMITS. • THE ENGINEERING OF ALL SIGNS, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, ATTACHMENT OF THE SIGNS TO THE ADJOINING STRUCTURE, SHALL BE THE SOLE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE SIGN FABRICATOR. • SUBMIT SAMPLE OF BLADE SIGN FACE FINISH ON METAL. BRAKE METAL W/ NO VISIBLE FASTENERS, TYP. FACE OF GWB PARTITION / SUBSTRATE 3/4" F.R.T. SUBSTRATE TYPICAL JOINT DETAIL - BUTT PANELS TIGHT ('L' BEND), 1/16" GAP MAX., TYP. BRAKE METAL RETURN S'L' BEND) @ BOTTOM OF PANEL, ETTIGHT TO FLOOR FINISHED FLOOR METAL PANEL BASE AND TYP JOINT DETAIL SCALE: 6" = 1'-0" ��3-zzto REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED AUG 02 2013 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA JUL022013 PERMIT CENTER ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. NO PART OF THESE DRAWINGS OR SPECIFICATIONS MAYBE COPIED, REPRODUCED OR USED IN CONNECTION WITH ANY WORK, OTHER THEN THE SPECIFIC PROJECT FOR WHICH THEY HAVE BEEN PREPARED, WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN AUTHORIZATION FROM THE ARCHITECT. OWNER AVEL A THE ART AND SCIENCE OF PURE FLOWER AND PLANT ESSENCES 767 FIFTH AVENUE NEW YORK, NY 10153 AVEDA Westfield Southcenter 2800 Southcenter Space No. 636, Level 1 Tukwila, WA 98188 SEAL` sn o co OWNER AVEL A THE ART AND SCIENCE OF PURE FLOWER AND PLANT ESSENCES 767 FIFTH AVENUE NEW YORK, NY 10153 DRAWING TITLE STOREFRONT ELEVATION AND DETAILS REVISIONS AVEDA Westfield Southcenter 2800 Southcenter Space No. 636, Level 1 Tukwila, WA 98188 DRAWING TITLE STOREFRONT ELEVATION AND DETAILS REVISIONS 06.28.13 ISSUE FOR LANDLORD REVIEW, PERMIT & BID 06,21.13 ISSUE FOR MILLWORK PRICING NO. DATE REVISION DRAWN BY: DTM CHECKED BY: DTM ORIG. DATE: 06.28.13 REV. DATE: 06.28.13 JOB NO. 1330 SHEET NO. A..2.0 BUILDING PERMIT NO. UNISTRUT P2000 x 1'-0" LONG W/ 2 -UN IST P1386 BEAM CLAMPS @ 16" 0.0.,0., W/ 1-1/2" 13 x 1 1/2"CHANNEL NUT @ EA. CLAMP (E) W10 BM HEX HEAD CAP SCREW & 1/2" rf NOTE: • SEE DETAIL 4 FOR TYPICAL VERTICAL STUD TO TRACK CONNECTION DETAILS 3-#10 TEK SCREWS, TOP & BOTT., TYP 1/2" TYP, y J STUD & TRACK PER DWG. 1 / SHT. A-2.1 CONNECTION AT (E) W1O BEAM STORE NOT TO SCALE SHIM / BLOCK AS REQ'D. 1/2" x 1"x 2" LONG ANGLE STOP HEADER FLUSH W/ ADJACENT GYP. BD. SOFFIT FLAT -TAPE GWB TO PIVOT GLASS AS SCHEDULED MALL LEASELINE SCHEDULED FINISHED FLOOR OFFSET PIVOT BEYOND, SET PLATE FLUSH W/ FIN. FLR. MTL. TRANSITION STRIP MALL TILE AND GROUT TO MATCH (E) MALL TILE (Th ENTRY DOOR SECTION DETAIL 3 SCALE: 3" = 1'-0" 3 5/8" STUD 3 5/8" TRACK NOTE: • SIMILAR AT TOP CONNECTION AND AT END TRACKS. 3 5/8" OR 6" STUD 2-#10TEK SCREWS, STUD TO TRACK 2-#10TEK SCREWS, TRACK TO STUD TYPICAL LIGHT GAUGE CONNECTION NOT TO SCALE SHIM/BLOCK AS REQ'D. BRAKE MTL. RETURN ('J' BEND) @ BOTTOM OF PANEL,ROUT OUT SUBSTRATE AS RED. STORE WIDE RECESSED GLAZING CHANNEL, FLUSH W/ GYP. BD. SOFFIT, SECURE AS REM. TEAR -AWAY EDGE BEAD TIGHT TO CHANNEL BRAKE MTL. RETURN BEYOND PITTCON REVEAL BEYOND MALL, SCHEDULED GWB PARTITION BEYOND RECESSED WALL BASE BEYOND BRAKE MTL. BASE BEYOND SHALLOW RECESSED GLAZING CHANNEL, FLUSH W/ FIN. FLR. GLASS CHANNEL SECTION DETAIL A SCALE: 3" = 1'-0" NOTE: • VERIFY ALL DIMENSIONS AND ELEVATIONS IN FIELD. • ALL MEMBERS TO BE 362516243 CO 16" OC WITH 362T125-43 AT EACH END, UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. (E) MALL FASCIA 1/2" GAP 3'-0" VIF 2'-6" VIF 3'-0" MAX. TO MTL. TRACK (E) BULKHEAD (E) W10 BEAMS 5/8" GWB OVER 3/4" F.R.T. PLYWD. EXISTING BULKHEAD TO BE REMOVED SHOWN DASHED CLAY FINISH TO TURN CORNER I SF -1 I APPLIED CLAY FINISH SIM. 3625162-43 BRACE @ 48" O.C. 600S162-43 @ 16" O.C. WITH 600T125-43 WHERE SHOWN GV 3-#10 TEK SCREWS @ BRACE, TYP. SURFACE MOUNTED LT. TRACK WHERE OCCURS SIGNAGE BEYOND I SF -21 BRAKE MTL. PANEL ON 3/4" F.R.T. SUBSTRATE ON 5/8" GWB 0 J 362S162.43 BRACE @ 48" O.C. 4410 TEK SCREWS, TYP. TYP. CLG. SUSP. SYSTEM, SEE SHT. A-4.2 SEE DWG. 1 /SHT. A3.0FOR INTERIOR ELEVATION BEYOND SCHEDULED FINISHED FLOOR 5/8" GYP. BD. SOFFIT, PAINT 5/8" GYP. BD. FASCIA, PAINT P-7 P-7 PROFILE OF EXISTING CLG., FASCIA& BULKHEAD TO BE REMOVED SHOWN DASHED I GL -1I CLEAR TEMPERED LOW -IRON GLASS, TYP. LEASELINE REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED AUG 02 2013 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION MALL FINISHED FLOOR STOREFRONT SECTION SCALE: 3/4" = 1'-0" 1)(3 C2 RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA JUL 022013 PERMIT CENTER ALL LIGHT GAUGE STEEL MEMBERS SHALL BE DESIGNATED USING INDUSTRY STANDARD PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION AS FOLLOWS: 362 S 162 - 43 MEMBER DEPTH: IN 1/100 INCHES (eg. 3 5/8" = 362 x 1/100 inches) STYLE: S = STUD /JOIST SECTIONS T= TRACK SECTIONS U = CHANNEL SECTIONS F= FURRING CHANNEL SECTIONS MATE RIAL THICKNESS: IN MILS (eg. 0.043 in. = 43 mils= 18 gauge; 1 mil = 1/1000 In.) FLANGE WIDTH: IN 1/100 INCHES (eg. 1 5/8" = 162 x 1/100 Inches) ARCHITECT DTMAR CH ITECT -Sc U) N -N- U • a? <`t ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. NO PART OF THESE DRAWINGS OR SPECIFICATIONS MAYBE COPIED, REPRODUCED OR USED IN CONNECTION WITH ANY WORK, OTHER THEN THE SPECIFIC PROJECT FOR WHICH THEY HAVE BEEN PREPARED, WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN AUTHORIZATION FROM THE ARCHITECT. OWNER AV E D/� INE AFC AND SCIENCE OF PUDE FLOWER AND PLANT ESSENCES 767 FIFTH AVENUE NEW YORK, NY 10153 / AVEDA Westfield Southcenter 2800 Southcenter Space No. 636, Level 1 Tukwila, WA 98188 DRAWING TITLE STOREFRONT DETAILS IR EVISI(DIV S 06.28.13 ISSUE FOR LANDLORD REVIEW, PERMIT & BID 06.21.13 ISSUE FOR MILLWORK PRICING NO. DATE REVISION DRAWN BY: DTM CHECKED BY: DTM ORIG. DATE: 06.2B.13 REV. DATE: 06.28.13 JOB NO. 1330 SHEET NO. A gim2 I■ BUILDING PERMIT NO. EXIT SIGN CLG. MTD. @ LOW CLG. IN FOREGROUND SHOWN DASHED OUTLINE OF LOW CLG. IN FOREGROUND SHOWN DASHED INTERIOR ELEVATION SCALE: 3/8" = 1'-0" P-7 GWB STOREFRONT GLASS BEYOND POSTER BOX FIXTURE SS -1 B-1 RAIL, TYP. BASE SURFACE MOUNTED LIGHT TRACK W/ HEADS AS SCHEDULED, TYP. P-6 FLUSH DOORS @ STORAGE CLOSET OUTLINE OF VISUAL MECHANDISING "MR. CHAK RA" SHELVES 10" O.C. ON STANDARDS WITHIN CLOSET, SEE DET. 2 /SHT. A-3.1, PROVIDE MAXIMUM SHELF DEPTH POSSIBLE, 1'-4" VIF SIDE ELEVATION OF BACKWRAP AND CASHWRAP SHOWN DASHED FOR CLARITY ILLUMINATED BLADE SIGN, SEE DTLS. ALIGN J 00 VV -4 WALL PANEL MECHANICALLY FASTENED TO FRAMING WITHIN PARTITION, FILL ALL SCREW HOLES, TYP. WALL PANELING CONTINUES BEHIND MILLWORK FIXTURES, PROVIDE CUT OUTS WHERE RECEPTACLES OCCUR, TYP. THROUGHOUT FREESTANDING PERIMETER DOMAIN FIXTURES, TYP. 3 (4) LU -1 (2) LU -1 F-161 F-161 F-161 F-161 F-161 F-161 F-610 J F.R.T. CURTAIN ON SURFACE MOUNTED CURTAIN TRACK, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE ON SHT. T-2.0 FOR SPEC. OUTLINE OF LOW CLG. IN FOREGROUND SHOWN DASHED P6 MALL GWB CO SALES FLOOR WALLS, TYP. U.O.N. WALL MOUNTED INVATI GRAPHIC J BOX W/BLACK COVER PLATE BASE, TYP. @ SALES FLOOR WALLS B1 INTERIOR ELEVATION SCALE: 3/8" = 1'-0" 1 POSTER BOX FIXTURE SHOWN DASHED FOR CLARITY F-301 MALL WALL MOUNTED LEAF GRAPHIC, VERIFY DIMS. IN FIELD RECEPTACLE IN BASE P-5 B-1 f 44 F4�. 11; F-160 F-160 F-160 F-160 STOCK ROOM DOOR AND FRAME, PAINT BOTH SIDES BASE, TYP. @ SALES FLOOR WALLS INTERIOR ELEVATION F+-961 SCALE: 3/8" = INTERIOR ELEVATION SCALE: 3/8" = 1'-0" OUTLINE OF LOW CLG. IN FOREGROUND SHOWN DASHED CEIUNGTROUGH W/ LIGHT TRACK GWB @ SALES FLOOR WALLS, TYP. U.O.N. WALL MOUNTED MISSION STATEMENT GRAPHIC SEE DWG. 5 FOR FULL ELEVATION BEYOND SHELVES W/ P-9 FINISH ON HEAVY-DUTY METAL STANDARDS, TYP. i INTERIOR ELEVATION SCALE: 3/8" = 1'-0" (0, AIR GRILLE @ FASCIA WHERE OCCURS ALIGN EDGE OF CLG. TRIM WITH GWB CORNER SHT. MTL. GROUNDS WITHIN WALL BEHIND SINK BACKSPLASH FROM TOP OF SINK COUNTER TO UNDERSIDE OF SHELF SS -1 PROVIDE WATERPROOF MEMBRANE UNDER FLOORING @ SINK, TURNED UP 6" CQ ADJOINING WALL SIDE ELEVATION OF CASHWRAP SHOWN DASHED FOR CLARITY THERMOSTAT SENSOR REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED AUG 022013 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA JUL 022013 PERMIT CENTER ARCHITECT DTMARCHITECT co z 0 0 I- c tna rN- E co 0 h. U m 8 co 0 0'-0 E co 0 • a 0O 0 ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. NO PART OF THESE DRAWINGS OR SPECIFICATIONS MAYBE COPIED, REPRODUCED OR USED IN CONNECTION WITH ANY WORK, OTHER THEN THE SPECIFIC PROJECT FOR WHICH THEY HAVE BEEN PREPARED, WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN AUTHORIZATION FROM THE ARCH ITECT. ("(DWNER AV E DA THE ART AND SCIENCE OF PURE FLOWER AND PLANT ESSENCES 767 FIFTH AVENUE NEW YORK, NY 10153 SEAL (----, g a.... Ii' RJ 4N/ 5 .j ("(DWNER AV E DA THE ART AND SCIENCE OF PURE FLOWER AND PLANT ESSENCES 767 FIFTH AVENUE NEW YORK, NY 10153 DRAWING TITLE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS R. EN/TS IC.)N AVEDA Westfield Southcenter 2800 Southcenter Space No. 636, Level 1 Tukwila, WA 98188 DRAWING TITLE INTERIOR ELEVATIONS R. EN/TS IC.)N 06.20.13 ISSUE FOR LANDLORD REVIEW, PERMIT & BID 06.21.13 ISSUE FOR MILLWORK PRICING NO. DATE REVISION DRAWN BY: DTM CHECKED BY: DTM ORIG. DATE: 06.28.13 REV. DATE: 06.28.13 JOB NO. 1330 SHEET NO. A....3.0 BUILDING PERMIT NO. V-4" TYP. U.O.N B. TYP. SHELF W-3 3/4" THK. SHELF W/ 1/4" LIP ON HEAVY DUTY BRACKETS AND SHELF CLIPS. ALL SIDES TO BE SANDED/PAINTED, TYP. SEE ELEVATION FOR SHELF QUANTITY AND LAYOUT SEE 1'-6" SURFACE MOUNTED FSC A -C GRADE F.R.T. PLYWOOD BACKER BOARD, SECURE PLYWD. TO EACH STUD @ 12" O.C. MAX. GROMMET FOR LIGHT FIXT. CORD FSC CERTIFIED SOLID WD. NOSING SCHEDULED UNDER -SHELF LIGHT, INSTALL HORIZONTALLY SURFACE MOUNTED BULLETIN BOARD, INSTALL SMOOTH SIDE OUT GROMMET, SEE ELEVATIONS FOR NUMBER AND LOCATION CONTINUOUS 3/4" CLEAT SUPPORT @COUNTER SIDES AND BACK 2" DIA. CUT-OUT @ INTERMEDIATE SUPPORTS, IF ANY It A. MANAGER'S DESK 3/4" COUNTERTOP NOTE: • ALL SHELVES, COUNTER AND SUPPORTS TO BE W-3 U.O.N.. PLASTIC LAMINATE AND MELAMINE ARE NOT PERMITTED • ALL W-3 / WOOD ELEMENTS TO HAVE P-9 FINISH. • ALL FINISHES SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM CLASS II FLAME SPREAD RATING OR BE FIRE -RETARDANT TREATED FSC CERTIFIED SOLID WD. NOSING ON ALL EXPOSED EDGES FSC A -A GRADE F.R.T. PLYWOOD DIVIDER, SEE ELEVATIONS CLIP ANGLE, TYP. EACH DIVIDER DESK AND SHELF SECTION SCALE: 1 1/2"= 1'-0 EXTENT OF SURFACE MTD. FSC A -C GRADE F.R.T. PLYWOOD BACKER BOARD. SAND EDGES, PAINT P-4 HEAVY-DUTY MTL. STANDARDS,- PROVIDE AS MANY STANDARDS AS REQ'D., SEE SPEC. REMOVE ALL STICKERS W-3 P-9 SHELVES W/ FINISH, TYP. EXISTING TOILET SEAT COVER DISPENSER EXISTING GRAB BAR, TYP. 1'-6" 1'-6" EQ. EXISTING WATER CLOSET FLOOR DRAIN, SEE SHT. P1.0 NOTE: SEE SHEET T-2.0 FOR ALL TOILET ROOM ACCESSORY SPECIFICATIONS ELEVATION A ACCESSIBLE TOILET ROOM ELEVATIONS ® SCALE: 1/2" = 11-0" 0 Lu a E SCHED. EMERGENCY LIGHT EXTENT OF SURFACE MTD. FSC A -C GRADE F.R.T. PLYWOOD BACKER BOARD. SAND EDGES, PAINT P-4 HEAVY-DUTY MTL. STANDARDS, PROVIDE AS MANY STANDARDS AS REQ'D., SEE SPEC. REMOVE ALL STICKERS W-3 P-9 SHELVES W/ FINISH, TYP. SCHED. UNDER -SHELF LIGHT PRINTER/FAX/COPY AND MONITOR ON COUNTER SURFACE WIRE GROMMET, (3) LOCATIONS, EQ. SPACED POWER AND DATA @ WALL, SEE POWER PLAN EQ. EQ. SBO ITEMS SHOWN DASHED, TYP. ALARM HOLD-UP BUTTON SEE DWG. 2 FOR ADDITIONAL DTLS. @ MANAGER'S DESK NOTE: NO MELANINE. FASTEN EXPOSED TEL WIRE TO WALL. SALES AREA ----.'140 DRAWING TITLE STOCK, MANAGER'S AREA & TOILET ROOM \Ilk 0 r 2A 06.28.13 ISSUE FOR LANDLORD REVIEW, PERMIT & BID \ \ ISSUE FOR MILLWORK PRICING NO, DATE REVISION A-3.1� r TYP. • CHECKED BY: DTM ORIG. DATE: 06.28.13 REV. DATE: 06.28.13 JOB NO. 1330 SHEET NO. 8ri'3 I■ BUILDING PERMIT NO. Nik 6 .-- --- = .. ItMDNJTORi... • . • ' ,P TR .• .i''• I. I •, •• 3 I Or PG 1 H L SAFE 1 FILE CAB. II I 1 I w w 0 Lu w 0 w MANAGER'S DESK ELEVATION A EQ EQ. EQ. 1'-4" TYP. /EQ. 1'-6" EQ. TYP. COAT HOOKS, SEE SHT. T-2.0 FOR SPEC. F.R.T. PLYWOOD FOR ELEC. & TEL./DATA EQUIPMENT, PAINT ELECTRICAL PANELS, ETC., SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR MORE INFO. P-4 STOCKROOM ELEVATION C STOCKROOM ELEVATIONS 1 SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0" 1 ELEVATION B UNDERSIDE OF FIN. CEILING EXISTING LIGHT SWITCH EXISTING DOOR, PAINT P-4 MTL. SHELF AS SPEC'D. MOP HANGER BRACKET AS SPEC'D. COAT HOOK AS SPEC'D. EXIST. GWB, PAINT P-1 EXISTING FRP PANEL, TYP. STOCKROOM ELEVATION B EXISTING WALL MTD. EXIT SIGN W/ EMERGENCY LIGHTS EXISTING REAR DOOR, PAINT P-4 EQ. EQ. SECURITY STROBE LIGHT P-1 GWB, TYP. IN STOCKROOM DOOR TO SALES, PAINT THERMOSTAT SECURITY KEYPAD MAIN SWITCH BANK (LABEL SWITCHES) P-5 BASE IN STOCKROOM, TYP. EQ. cn LLI Lu I IL I - PAINT P-1 PLUMBED WATER DISPENSER WI GFCI RECEPTACLE, SEE POWER PLAN FOR RECEPTACLE HEIGHTS, TYP. P-4 STOCKROOM ELEVATION D DOOR TO TOILET ROOM TYP. WATERPROOF MEMBRANE UNDER FLOORING TURNED UP 6" ON ALL WALLS C 02 TILE BASE STOCK ROOt� — ELEVATION C EXISTING WALL MTD. LT. FIXT EXISTING MIRROR EXISTING RECEPTACLE EXISTING SOAP DISPENSER EXISTING LAVATORY Co 5'-0" ELEVATION D REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED AUG 0 '2 2013 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION RECESSED HAND DRYER EXISTING GRAB BAR, TYP. EXISTING TOILET PAPER HOLDER SANITARY NAPKIN DISPOSAL AS SPEC'D. RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA JUL 012 2013 PERMIT CENTER ARCHITECT ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. NO PART OF THESE DRAWINGS OR SPECIFICATIONS MAYBE COPIED, REPRODUCED OR USED IN CONNECTION WTHANY WORK, OTHER THEN THE SPECIFIC PROJECT FOR WHICH THEY HAVE BEEN PREPARED, INITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN AUTHORIZATION FROM THE ARCHITECT. OWNER AV E DA THE ART AND SCIENCE OF PURE FLOWER AND PLANT ESSENCES 767 FIFTH AVENUE NEW YORK, NY 10153 AVEDA Westfield Southcenter 2800 Southcenter Space No. 636, Level 1 Tukwila, WA 98188 DRAWING TITLE STOCK, MANAGER'S AREA & TOILET ROOM r 2A 06.28.13 ISSUE FOR LANDLORD REVIEW, PERMIT & BID \ \ ISSUE FOR MILLWORK PRICING NO, DATE REVISION A-3.1� r TYP. DRAWN BY: DTM CHECKED BY: DTM ORIG. DATE: 06.28.13 REV. DATE: 06.28.13 JOB NO. 1330 SHEET NO. 8ri'3 I■ BUILDING PERMIT NO. / / t _;/ / / !MICROWAVE l r -- RE -RIG. COAT HOOKS, SEE SHT. T-2.0 FOR SPEC. F.R.T. PLYWOOD FOR ELEC. & TEL./DATA EQUIPMENT, PAINT ELECTRICAL PANELS, ETC., SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR MORE INFO. P-4 STOCKROOM ELEVATION C STOCKROOM ELEVATIONS 1 SCALE: 1/2" = 1'-0" 1 ELEVATION B UNDERSIDE OF FIN. CEILING EXISTING LIGHT SWITCH EXISTING DOOR, PAINT P-4 MTL. SHELF AS SPEC'D. MOP HANGER BRACKET AS SPEC'D. COAT HOOK AS SPEC'D. EXIST. GWB, PAINT P-1 EXISTING FRP PANEL, TYP. STOCKROOM ELEVATION B EXISTING WALL MTD. EXIT SIGN W/ EMERGENCY LIGHTS EXISTING REAR DOOR, PAINT P-4 EQ. EQ. SECURITY STROBE LIGHT P-1 GWB, TYP. IN STOCKROOM DOOR TO SALES, PAINT THERMOSTAT SECURITY KEYPAD MAIN SWITCH BANK (LABEL SWITCHES) P-5 BASE IN STOCKROOM, TYP. EQ. cn LLI Lu I IL I - PAINT P-1 PLUMBED WATER DISPENSER WI GFCI RECEPTACLE, SEE POWER PLAN FOR RECEPTACLE HEIGHTS, TYP. P-4 STOCKROOM ELEVATION D DOOR TO TOILET ROOM TYP. WATERPROOF MEMBRANE UNDER FLOORING TURNED UP 6" ON ALL WALLS C 02 TILE BASE STOCK ROOt� — ELEVATION C EXISTING WALL MTD. LT. FIXT EXISTING MIRROR EXISTING RECEPTACLE EXISTING SOAP DISPENSER EXISTING LAVATORY Co 5'-0" ELEVATION D REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED AUG 0 '2 2013 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION RECESSED HAND DRYER EXISTING GRAB BAR, TYP. EXISTING TOILET PAPER HOLDER SANITARY NAPKIN DISPOSAL AS SPEC'D. RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA JUL 012 2013 PERMIT CENTER ARCHITECT ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. NO PART OF THESE DRAWINGS OR SPECIFICATIONS MAYBE COPIED, REPRODUCED OR USED IN CONNECTION WTHANY WORK, OTHER THEN THE SPECIFIC PROJECT FOR WHICH THEY HAVE BEEN PREPARED, INITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN AUTHORIZATION FROM THE ARCHITECT. OWNER AV E DA THE ART AND SCIENCE OF PURE FLOWER AND PLANT ESSENCES 767 FIFTH AVENUE NEW YORK, NY 10153 AVEDA Westfield Southcenter 2800 Southcenter Space No. 636, Level 1 Tukwila, WA 98188 Ft. EVI 3I CDNI DRAWING TITLE STOCK, MANAGER'S AREA & TOILET ROOM Ft. EVI 3I CDNI 06.28.13 ISSUE FOR LANDLORD REVIEW, PERMIT & BID 06.21.13 ISSUE FOR MILLWORK PRICING NO, DATE REVISION DRAWN BY: DTM CHECKED BY: DTM ORIG. DATE: 06.28.13 REV. DATE: 06.28.13 JOB NO. 1330 SHEET NO. 8ri'3 I■ BUILDING PERMIT NO. MALL PILIGN • • • • • • • ♦ /• • IMM WWI VIII — 362S162-43 MTL. STUDS @ 48" O.C. MAX. AND 6" FROM WALL ENDS, ALTERNATE DIRECTIONS, ATTACH TO STRUCTURE ABOVE LEASELINE 3"x3" 18 GA. MTL. CLIP W/ (4) #10 SMS @ BRACE AND TRACK SCHEDULED PARTITION AND TOP TRACK U.S. FIN. CLG. WHERE OCCURS TYP. LATERAL BRACING FOR ALL WALL TYPES SCALE: 3" = 1'-0" ALL LIGHT GAUGE STEEL MEMBERS SHALL BE DESIGNATED USING INDUSTRY STANDARD PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION AS FOLLOWS: MEMBER DEPTH: IN 1/100 INCHES (eg. 3 5/8" = 362 x 1/100 inches) 362 _S 162 - 43 TfTL STYLE: S = STUD / JOIST SECTIONS T = TRACK SECTIONS U = CHANNEL SECTIONS F = FURRING CHANNEL SECTIONS MATERIAL THICKNESS: IN MILS (eg. 0.043 in. = 43 mils= 18 gauge; 1 mil =1/1000 in.) FLANGE WIDTH: IN 1/100 INCHES (eg. 1 5/8"=162x1/100 inches) TENANT ENTRY EDGE OF GLASS BEYOND (ENTRY DOOR NOT SHOWN) MALL TILE TO MATCH EXISTING, AS REQ'D. 1/8" WIDE STAINLESS STEEL TRANSITION STRIP, SCHLUTER SCHIENE OR EQUIV., ALIGN W/ EDGE OF RECESSED GLAZING CHANNEL BEYOND SCHEDULED FLOORING, BUILD UP AS REQ'D. TO MEET ADJACENT FLOORING 1/8" MAX. GROUT JT. +O XXX XX•XXXXX,%CXXO QOOOOKX: MALL / TENANT ENTRY TRANSITION STOCKROOM DOOR JAMB BEYOND TOILET ROOM WATERPROOF MEMBRANE IN TOILET ROOM SCHEDULED FLOORING WHITE HONED MARBLE SADDLE, MAX. SLOPE AS SHOWN NOTCH SADDLE @ DOOR FRAME SCHEDULED FLOORING - SADDLE AT EMPLOYEE TOILET ROOM FLOORING TRANSITION DETAILS SALES DOOR JAMB BEYOND SCHEDULED FLOORING, BUILD UP AS REQ'D. TO MEET ADJACENT FLOORING 1/8" WIDE STAINLESS STEEL TRANSITION STRIP, SCHLUTER SCHIENE OR EQUIV. @ DOOR EDGE (E) CONC. SUB -FLOOR SCHEDULED FLOORING ALIGN 1.ObAOfO4sAm61./m IM.. O:t.AAIAKOiIQIm+E04:!@*: STOCKROOM SALES TILE TO STOCKROOM FLOORING STOCKROOM DOORJAMB BEYOND TOP OF EXISTING SLAB SERVICE CORRIDOR ALUM. OFFSET SADDLE, MAX. SLOPE AS SHOWN NOTCH SADDLE @ DOOR FRAME SCHEDULED FLOORING, SLOPE DOWN @ 1/4" PER FT. MAX. v //// 1/J/ SADDLE AT REAR EXIT SCALE: 3" = 1'-0" HEAD PLAN BASE DIAGONALLY BRACE TO STRUCTURE ABOVE @ 48" O.C. MAX. EXTEND GWB TO DECK WHERE NO CLG. OCCURS (3) #10 SMS @ BRACING U.S. FIN. CLG. WHERE OCCURS MTL. STUDS AS SCHEDULED (SEE BELOW) 1 LAYER OF TYPE 'X' GWB, TYP. BOTH SIDES 16GA. MIN. MTL. GROUNDS W/#10 SCREWS, ATTACHED TO STUDS WHERE BLOCKING IS INDICATED ON PLANS/ELEVS. OR AS REQ'D. MTL. RUNNER TRACK P.D.F. ,@ 24" O.C. MAX. 6" FROM EA. END;(2) P.D.F. MIN. 3" APART @ 24" O.C. OR 6" STUD WALLS, TYP. @ TOP AND BOTTOM SEE DTLS. FOR SCHEDULED BASE CONT. SEALANT, TYP. @ TOP AND BOTTOM A. TWO-SIDED PARTITION STUD SIZE ,I GAUGE INSUL. FIRE RATING REMARKS > t 4 i SPACING `I' WIDTH NONE NONE STC RATING UL# `' 16" O.C. VYYLJJ14 VVv._, GAUGE INSUL. FIRE RATING REMARKS ,J 3 5/8" 20 NONE NONE NONE UL# `' 16" O.C. t N/A N/A 4 7/8" NOTE: 1. SEE DTL. 2 / SHT. A-4.0 FOR TYPICAL PARTITION LATERAL BRACING DETAIL. 2. PROVIDE MTL. GROUNDS AND/OR F.R.T. BLOCKING AS REQUIRED. COORDINATE LOCATIONS WITH FIXTURE MANUFACTURER. 3. USE GREENBOARD AT ALL WET LOCATIONS, TYP. FOR ALL PARTITION TYPES. PARTITION TYPES BASE B. ONE-SIDED PARTITION EXTEND GWB TO DECK WHERE NO CLG. OCCURS SHIM SPACE WHEN BUILT AS FURRING PARTITION F.O. SURFACE TO BE FURRED U.S. FIN. CLG. WHERE OCCURS MTL. STUDS / FURRING CHANNELS AS SCHEDULED (SEE BELOW) 1 LAYER OF TYPE 'X' GWB, TYP. 16GA. MIN. MTL. GROUNDS W/ #10 SCREWS, ATTACHED TO STUDS WHERE BLOCKING IS INDICATED ON PLANS/ELEVS. ORAS REQ'D. MTL. RUNNER TRACK P.D.F. @ 24" O.C. MAX. 6" FROM EA. END;2) P.D.F. MIN. 3" APART @ 24" O.C. FOR 6" STUD WALLS, TYP. @ TOP AND BOTTOM SEE DTLS. FOR SCHEDULED BASE CONT. SEALANT, TYP. @ TOP AND BOTTOM > s 1 STUD SIZE GAUGE INSUL. FIRE RATING REMARKS lo—t tj*16" O.C. VARIES ) SPACING t WIDTH N/A N/A STC RATING UL# VARIES WHERE OCCURS VARIES WHERE OCCURS 21/2" 16" O.C. VARIES 5/8" GWB tt 20 NONE N/A NONE N/A NONE .nu �avvu 35/8" 20 NONE NONE NONE lo—t tj*16" O.C. VARIES DECK N/A N/A BASE J NOTE: FIRE STOP 0 ALL PENETRATIONS AS REQ'D. TO MAINTAIN RATING U.S. FIN. CLG. WHERE OCCURS EXISTING MTL. STUDS PROVIDE TYPE 'X' GWB @ MTL. GROUNDS, PATCH AND REPAIR AS REQ'D. TO MAINTAIN EXISTING RATING 16GA. MIN. MTL. GROUNDS W/#10 SCREWS, ATTACHED TO STUDS WHERE BLOCKING IS INDICATED ON PLANS/ELEVS. OR AS REQ'D. EXISTING GWB, PATCH AND REPAIR AS REQ'D. SEE DTLS. FOR SCHEDULED BASE E. EXISTING PARTITION EXISTING TO REMAIN EXISTING TO REMAIN PATCH AND REPAIR AS REQ'D. TO LIKE -NEW CONDITION. MAINTAIN 1 -HR. RATING AT DEMISING WALLS. EXISTING TO REMAIN PATCH AND REPAIR AS REQ'D. TO LIKE -NEW CONDITION. LAMINATE (1) LAYER 5/8" TYPE 'X' GWB ON FACE OF EXISTING WALL. SCALE: 3" = 1'-0" SALES FLOOR W WALL PANEL WHERE OCCURS, SHOWN DASHED SCHEDULED GWB PARTITION, SEE CONSTRUCTION PLAN TAPE AND SPACKLE RECESSED BASE, PAINT SEE FINISH SCHEDULE RECEPTACLE (SET HORIZONTAL WHERE OCCURS) SET LEVEL ACROSS STORE P-6 (BOTTOM OF WALL FIXTURES) SCHEDULED FLOORING (E) CONC. SUB -FLOOR //71/ B-1 SALES FLOOR BASE WALL BASE DETAILS SCALE: 3" = 1'-0" STOCKROOM SCHEDULED GWB PARTITION, SEE CONSTRUCTION PLAN RESILIENT RUBBER BASE, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE SCHEDULED FLOORING (E) CONC. SUB -FLOOR STOCKROOM BASE b13-�z-gyp REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED AUG 022013 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA JUL 022013 PERMIT CENTER ARCHITECT � ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. NO PART OF THESE DRAWINGS OR SPECIFICATIONS MAYBE COPIED, REPRODUCED OR USED IN CONNECTION WITH ANY WORK, OTHER THEN THE SPECIFIC PROJECT FOR WHICH THEY HAVE BEEN PREPARED, WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN AUTHORIZATION FROM THE ARCHITECT. SEAL AV E DA THE ART AND SCIENCE OF PURE FLOWER AND PLANT ESSENCES 767 FIFTH AVENUE NEW YORK, NY 10153 AVEDA Westfield Southcenter 2800 Southcenter Space No. 636, Level 1 Tukwila, WA 98188 UNDERSIDE OF EXISTING METAL DECK .1 BASE J NOTE: FIRE STOP 0 ALL PENETRATIONS AS REQ'D. TO MAINTAIN RATING U.S. FIN. CLG. WHERE OCCURS EXISTING MTL. STUDS PROVIDE TYPE 'X' GWB @ MTL. GROUNDS, PATCH AND REPAIR AS REQ'D. TO MAINTAIN EXISTING RATING 16GA. MIN. MTL. GROUNDS W/#10 SCREWS, ATTACHED TO STUDS WHERE BLOCKING IS INDICATED ON PLANS/ELEVS. OR AS REQ'D. EXISTING GWB, PATCH AND REPAIR AS REQ'D. SEE DTLS. FOR SCHEDULED BASE E. EXISTING PARTITION EXISTING TO REMAIN EXISTING TO REMAIN PATCH AND REPAIR AS REQ'D. TO LIKE -NEW CONDITION. MAINTAIN 1 -HR. RATING AT DEMISING WALLS. EXISTING TO REMAIN PATCH AND REPAIR AS REQ'D. TO LIKE -NEW CONDITION. LAMINATE (1) LAYER 5/8" TYPE 'X' GWB ON FACE OF EXISTING WALL. SCALE: 3" = 1'-0" SALES FLOOR W WALL PANEL WHERE OCCURS, SHOWN DASHED SCHEDULED GWB PARTITION, SEE CONSTRUCTION PLAN TAPE AND SPACKLE RECESSED BASE, PAINT SEE FINISH SCHEDULE RECEPTACLE (SET HORIZONTAL WHERE OCCURS) SET LEVEL ACROSS STORE P-6 (BOTTOM OF WALL FIXTURES) SCHEDULED FLOORING (E) CONC. SUB -FLOOR //71/ B-1 SALES FLOOR BASE WALL BASE DETAILS SCALE: 3" = 1'-0" STOCKROOM SCHEDULED GWB PARTITION, SEE CONSTRUCTION PLAN RESILIENT RUBBER BASE, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE SCHEDULED FLOORING (E) CONC. SUB -FLOOR STOCKROOM BASE b13-�z-gyp REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED AUG 022013 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA JUL 022013 PERMIT CENTER ARCHITECT � ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. NO PART OF THESE DRAWINGS OR SPECIFICATIONS MAYBE COPIED, REPRODUCED OR USED IN CONNECTION WITH ANY WORK, OTHER THEN THE SPECIFIC PROJECT FOR WHICH THEY HAVE BEEN PREPARED, WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN AUTHORIZATION FROM THE ARCHITECT. SEAL AV E DA THE ART AND SCIENCE OF PURE FLOWER AND PLANT ESSENCES 767 FIFTH AVENUE NEW YORK, NY 10153 DRAWING TITLE PARTITIONS AND INTERIOR DETAILS FRE\/ISION AVEDA Westfield Southcenter 2800 Southcenter Space No. 636, Level 1 Tukwila, WA 98188 DRAWING TITLE PARTITIONS AND INTERIOR DETAILS FRE\/ISION 06.28.13 ISSUE FOR LANDLORD REVIEW, PERMIT & BID 06.21.13 ISSUE FOR MILLWORK PRICING NO. DATE REVISION DRAWN BY: DTM CHECKED BY: DTM ORIG. DATE: 06.28.13 REV. DATE: 06.28.13 JOB NO. 1330 SHEET NO. -4 0 ■ BUILDING PERMIT NO.A • • 1 1 L LEAVE CONT. SLOT OPEN FOR RETURN AIR COMM TYP. CLG. SUSP. SYSTEM PAINT P-7 HVAC GRILLE, SEE MECH. DWGS., PAINT P-7 SEE DWG. 1 /SHT. A-2.1 AND DWG.6/SMT. A-4.1 FOR FRAMING, BRACING AND ATTACHMENT TO STRUCTURE DETAILS MIN. TO CLEAR LIGHT TROUGH (110") PITTCON STA -075 OR EQ., MITER @ CORNERS PAINT I P-7 TAPE AND SPACKLE EDGE TRIM 1'-0" TAPE AND SPACKLE P8 4. LOW CEILING EDGE SECTION } SCALE: 3" = 1'-0" GYPSUM BD. CLG. SECURE TO STRUCTURE AND DIAGONALLY BRACE PER DWG. 5 /SHT. A-4.1 -r+ • + J 600S162-43 AT 48" O.C. 14 GA CLIP ANGLES WITH (4) 0.145"0 POWER ACTUATED FASTENERS TO EXISTING JOIST CHORD, TYP. 6008162-43 EACH SIDE OF VERTICAL STUDS 600S162-43 AT 16" O.C. 600S162-43 AT 48" O.C. 362S162-43 AT 16" O.C. TYP. CEILING, SEE DTL. 1G/A-4.2 r ± 40.00° EXIST BAR JOIST, TYP. / • / / / / / / / / / / / i/ ' / // ,// 1 / / / / / /// ,; / / ;/' / / / /// / / // i ••%/ / / 2'-0" (A) PARALLEL TO EXISTING JOISTS SCALE AS NOTED 1 OVERLAP METAL STUDS AND ATTACH WEBS W/ (3) #10 SCREWS TYP., U.O.N. TYP. CEILING, SEE DTL 1G/A-4.2 PARTITION WALLAS SCHEDULED - SEE PLAN CONT. 362T125-68 EA END CEILING FRAMING DETAILS EQ 1' 1'-0" CLEAR TRIM TO TRIM EQ LIGHT TROUGH SECTION DO NOT INSTALL ELEC. J -BOX OR COVER PLATE @ TRACK POWER FEED SCHEDULED SURFACE MOUNTED TRACK, SECURE TO FRAMING @ 2'-0" O.C. MAX. 3628162-43 METAL STUDS PAINT ALL FACES OF TROUGH SCHEDULED TRACK HEAD P-10 SECURE SUSP. SYSTEM TO FRAMING W/ CHANNEL MOLDING, TYP. TYP. CLG. SUSP. SYSTEM GYPSUM BD. CLG. PITTCON STA -075 OR EQ., MITER @ CORNERS EDGE OF TROUGH BEYOND SCALE: 3" = 1'-0" NOTE: NO ATTACHMENT TO THE ROOF DECK IS PERMITTED • EXIST BAR JOIST, TYP. m w EE I 2" (-5/8" SCHEDULED GWB PARTITION CONT. CAULK H.M. JAMB, SHIM AND FASTEN TO STUDS AS REQ'D. DOOR AS SCHEDULED H.M. DOOR BUCK DETAIL SCALE: 3" = 11-0" \ SCHEDULED GWB PARTITION TAPE AND SPACKLE CLOSET 0/-- 2) F.RNING.T. STUDS AROUND ENTIRE hE 'EZYJAMB' FLUSH FINISH DOOR —JAMB W/TAPABLE RETURNS. JAMB MFR. TO PREP JAMB FOR HINGES SOSS HINGES SCHEDULED BASE BELOW TAPE AND SPACKLE MILL STUDS FOR HINGES AS REQ'D. SCHEDULED DOOR 600S162-43 EA SIDE OF VERT STUDS. ATTACH TO BAR JOIST BOT. CHORD WITH (3) 0.145"0 POWER ACTUATED FASTENERS AT EACH STUD 6008162-43 AT 16" O.C. 600S162-43 AT 48" O.C. 3628162-43 AT 16" O.C. TYP. CEILING,il SEE DTL 1G/A-4.2 B PERPENDICULAR TO EXISTING JOISTS SCALE AS NOTED 600S162-43 (FLAT) BETWEEN JOISTS FOR BRACE ATTACHMENT. ATTACH TO JOIST WITH 14 GA CLIP ANGLES AND (4) 0.145"0 POWER ACTUATED FASTENERS TO EXIST JOIST CHORD, TYP. TYP. CEILING, SEE DTL 1G/A-4.2 PARTITION WALLAS SCHEDULED - SEE PLAN OVERLAP METAL STUDS AND ATTACH WEBS W/ (3) #10 SCREWS TYP. U.O.N. CONT. 362T125-68 EA END SCALE:3/4" = 1'-0" SALES AREA FLUSH DOOR JAMB DETAIL t3 --•mob REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED AUG 0 2 2013 City of Tukwila BUILDING DGVISION RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA JUL 022013 PERMIT CENTER ALL LIGHT GAUGE STEEL MEMBERS SHALL BE DESIGNATED USING INDUSTRY STANDARD PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION AS FOLLOWS: 362 S 162 - 43 ra MEMBER DEPTH: IN 1/100 INCHES (eg. 3 5/8" = 362 x 1/100 inches) STYLE: S = STUD /JOIST SECTIONS T = TRACK SECTIONS U = CHANNEL SECTIONS F = FURRING CHANNEL SECTIONS MATERIAL THICKNESS: IN MILS (eg. 0.043 in. = 43 mils = 18 gauge; 1 mil =1/1000 in.) FLANGE WIDTH: IN 1/100 INCHES (eg. 1 5/8" = 162 x 1/100 inches) ARCHITECT DTMARCHITECT Q M g < cps asre �r+� — s Z co 33 f- LL. r128 f tV M _ ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. NO PART OF THESE DRAWINGS OR SPECIFICATIONS MAYBE COPIED, REPRODUCED OR USED IN CONNECTION WITH ANY WORK, OTHER THEN THE SPECIFIC PROJECT FOR WHICH THEY HAVE BEEN PREPARED, WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN AUTHORIZATION FROM THE ARCHITECT. OWNER AV E DA THE ART AND SCIENCE OF PURE FLOWER AND PLANT ESSENCES 767 FIFTH AVENUE NEW YORK, NY 10153 AVEDA Westfield Southcenter 2800 Southcenter Space No. 636, Level 1 Tukwila, WA 98188 II DRAWING TITLE CEILING AND INTERIOR DETAILS SEAL c--, Mc..) jt A\ 05 N OWNER AV E DA THE ART AND SCIENCE OF PURE FLOWER AND PLANT ESSENCES 767 FIFTH AVENUE NEW YORK, NY 10153 AVEDA Westfield Southcenter 2800 Southcenter Space No. 636, Level 1 Tukwila, WA 98188 REVISIONS II DRAWING TITLE CEILING AND INTERIOR DETAILS REVISIONS 06.28.13 ISSUE FOR LANDLORD REVIEW, PERMIT & BID 06.21.13 ISSUE FOR MILLWORK PRICING N0. DATE REVISION DRAWN BY: DTM CHECKED BY: DTM ORIG. DATE: 06.28.13 REV. DATE: 06.28.13 JOB NO. 1330 SHEET NO. ■ BUILDING PERMIT NO.A...4 ANGLE CLIP, MECHANICALLY FASTEN TO STRUCTURE ABOVE, TYP. SPRING CLIP CONNECTING VERTICAL HANGER WIRE AND STRUT AS REQ'D. VERTICAL 12 GA. (B.W.G.) HANGER WIRE @ 4'-0" O.C., ADJACENT TO OR WITHIN COMPRESSION STRUT, W!3) TIGHT TURNS MIN. IN 1 1/2" BOTH ENDS OF WIRE, TYP. NOTE: VERTICAL HANGER WIRES SHALL NOT BE MORE THAN 1 (HORIZONTAL) IN 6 (VERTICAL) OUT OF PLUMB 45° MAX. CROSS TEE COMPRESSION STRUT, ATTACH TO MAIN RUNNER WITHIN 2" OF CROSS TEE NOTE: COMPRESSION STRUTS SHALL NOT BE MORE THAN 1 (HORIZONTAL) IN 6 (VERTICAL) OUT OF PLUMB (4)12 GA. (B.W.G.) SPLAY WIRES, SPLAYED 90° FROM EACH OTHER AND 45° FROM PLANE OF CLG., INSTALL WITHIN 2" OF CROSS TEE INTERSECTION NOTE: RIGID BRACING MAY BE USED AS AN ALTERNATE TO DIAGONAL SPLAY WIRES PER ASCE7 (4) TIGHT TURNS IN 1 1/2", TYP. @ BOTH ENDS OF SPLAY WIRE MAIN RUNNER LATERAL FORCE SEISMIC BRACING ASSEMBLY NOTE: SPLICES AND INTERSECTIONS OF RUNNERS SHALL BE ATTACHED WITH MECHANICAL INTERLOCKING CONNECTORS SUCH AS POP RIVETS, SCREWS, PINS, PLATES WITH BENT TABS, OR OTHER APPROVED CONNECTORS FOR 2x DESIGN LOAD MAIN RUNNER CROSS TEE CROSS TEE SEISMIC JOINT CLIP MAIN RUNNER SEISMIC JOINT CLIP SUSPENDED CEILING SEISMIC ASSEMBLY NOTES REFERENCES AND EXEMPTIONS 1. METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS FOR ACOUSTICAL TILE AND LAY -IN PANEL CEILINGS SHALL BE INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM STANDARDS C635 AND ASTM C636; SEISMIC DESIGN REQUIREMENTS IN IBC SEISMIC DESIGN CATEGORIES D, E & F SHALL BE INSTALLED IN ACCORDANCE WITH ASTM E580, ASCE 7-10 AND CISCA GUIDELINES FOR ZONES 3-4 . 2. CEILING AREAS s 144 SQ.FT. (13 SQ.M.), SURROUNDED BY WALLS OR SOFFITS THAT ARE LATERALLY BRACED TO THE STRUCTURE ABOVE ARE EXEMPT FROM SEISMIC DESIGN REQUIREMENTS. 3. FLAT GYPSUM BOARD CEILINGS THAT ARE SCREW -ATTACHED TO SUSPENSION MEMBERS ON ONE LEVEL AND SURROUNDED BY WALLS CONNECTED DIRECTLY TO THE STRUCTURE ABOVE ARE EXEMPT FROM SEISMIC DESIGN REQUIREMENTS. 4. CEILING AREAS s 1000 SQ.FT. (92.9 SQ.M.) ARE EXEMPT FROM HORIZONTAL RESTRAINT - LATERAL FORCE BRACING REQUIREMENTS. BASIC CONNECTIONS, PERIMETER, AND LATERAL SPLAY BRACING 1. A "HEAVY-DUTY" T -BAR SYSTEM AS DEFINED IN ASTM C635 SHALL BE USED, SEE FINISH SCHEDULE ON SHEET T- 2.0 FOR SPECIFICATION. THE MINIMUM MAIN / CROSS T BAR CONNECTION STRENGTH SHALL BE 180 LBS. 2. HANGER WIRES SHALL BE GALVANIZED SOFT ANNEALED MILD STEEL WIRE AS DEFINED IN ASTM A641 (CLASS 1 COATING). WIRES SHALL NOT ATTACH TO OR BEND AROUND INTERFERING MATERIAL OR EQUIPMENT AND SHALL BE INSTALLED TO PREVENT ANY SUBSEQUENT DOWNWARD MOVEMENT. 3. SEPARATE ALL CEILING HANGER AND BRACING WIRES AT LEAST 6" FROM ALL UNBRACED DUCTS, PIPES, CONDUIT, ETC. 4. THE CONNECTION DEVICE FROM VERTICAL WIRE TO THE STRUCTURE ABOVE MUST SUSTAIN A MINIMUM OF 100 LBS. SUSPENDED CEILING ANCHORS SHALL NOT BE POWER ACTUATED FASTENERS (UNLESS APPROVED AND LISTED FOR SUCH LOADING). 5. SPLAY BRACING CONNECTION STRENGTH SHALL BE 200 LBS OR THE DESIGN LOAD, WHICHEVER IS GREATER. 6. CEILING AREAS > 2500 SQ.FT. (WITH ASPECT RATIO LIMITED TO 4:1) SHALL HAVE A SEISMIC SEPARATION JOINT OR FULL HEIGHT PARTITION WALL (FOR SEPARATION INTO AREAS LESS THAN 2500 SQ.FT.). JOINTS MUST ALLOW 3/4" LONGITUDINAL MOVEMENT. 7. PARTITION BRACING SHALL BE INDEPENDENT FROM CEILING SPLAY BRACING. 8. RIGID BRACING SHALL BE PROVIDED AT CEILING PLAN ELEVATION CHANGES. LIGHT FIXTURE ATTACHMENT 1. ALL LIGHT FIXTURES SHALL BE MECHANICALLY ATTACHED TO CEILING GRID RUNNERS TO RESIST A HORIZONTAL FORCE EQUALTO THE WEIGHT OF THE FIXTURES. SCREWS OR APPROVED FASTENERS ARE REQUIRED. MINIMUM OF (2) ATTACHMENTS ARE REQUIRED PER FIXTURE UNLESS INDEPENDENTLY SUPPORTED. 2. ALL SURFACE MOUNTED LIGHT FIXTURES SHALL BE SECURELY FASTENED TO THE CEILING MEMBERS BY BOLTS, SCREWS, RIVETS OR LISTED CLIPS SPECIFICALLY APPROVED FOR USE WITH THE TYPE OF FRAMING AND FIXTURES. 3. PENDANT HUNG LIGHT FIXTURES SHALL BE DIRECTLY SUPPORTED FROM STRUCTURE WITH (1) 9 GA. WIRE (OR APPROVED ALTERNATE). 4. RIGID LAY -IN OR CAN LIGHT FIXTURES SHALL BE INSTALLED AS FOLLOWS: A) s 10 LBS, SHALL HAVE (1) 12 GA. WIRE HANGER CONNECTED FROM THE FIXTURE HOUSING TO THE STRUCTURE ABOVE (WIRE MAY BE SLACK). B) 11-56 LBS, SHALL HAVE (2)12 GA. WIRES CONNECTED FROM THE FIXTURE HOUSING AT OPPOSITE CORNERS TO THE STRUCTURE ABOVE (WIRES MAY BE SLACK). C) a 57 LBS, SHALL BE INDEPENDENTLY SUPPORTED DIRECTLY TO STRUCTURE ABOVE BY APPROVED HANGERS. SERVICE APPLICATIONS 1. HVAC TERMINALS SHALL BE INSTALLED AS FOLLOWS: A) s 20 LBS, SHALL BE POSITIVELY ATTACHED TO GRID. B) 21-56 LBS, SHALL BE POSITIVELY ATTACHED TO GRID AND SHALL HAVE (2) 12 GA. WIRES CONNECTED AT OPPOSITE CORNERS TO THE STRUCTURE ABOVE (WIRES MAY BE SLACK). C) a 57 LBS, SHALL BE INDEPENDENTLY SUPPORTED DIRECTLY TO STRUCTURE ABOVE BY APPROVED HANGERS. 2. AT CEILINGS WITHOUT RIGID BRACING, SPRINKLER HEADS AND OTHER PENETRATIONS SHALL HAVE A MINIMUM 2" 0 OVERSIZE RING, SLEEVE OR ADAPTER THROUGH THE CEILING TO ALLOW FOR FREE MOVEMENT OF AT LEAST 1" IN ALL HORIZONTAL DIRECTIONS. ALTERNATIVELY, A SWING JOINT MAY BE PROVIDED AT THE TOP OF THE SPRINKLER HEAD EXTENSION THAT CAN ACCOMMODATE 1" OF CEILING MOVEMENT IN ALL HORIZONTAL DIRECTIONS. 3. CABLE TRAYS AND ELECTRICAL CONDUITS SHALL BE SUPPORTED AND BRACED INDEPENDENTLY OF THE CEILING. SEISMIC CEILING DETAILS SEISMIC JOINT CLIPS LATERAL FORCE COMPRESSION STRUTS SHALL BE OF EMT CONDUIT, METAL STUD, OR OTHER APPROVED STRUTS MAXIMUM HEIGHT MATERIAL UP TO 3'-11" 1/2" 0 EMT CONDUIT, 0.042" WALL THICKNESS UP TO 5'-1" 3/4" 0 EMT CONDUIT 0.049" WALL THICKNESS UP TO 6' 6" 1" 0 EMT CONDUIT 0.057" WALL THICKNESS UP TO 7'-0" 362S125-43 MTL. STUD UP TO 8'-6" 1-1/4" 0 EMT CONDUIT 0.065" WALLTHICKNESS UP TO 9'-10" 1-1/2" 0 EMT CONDUIT 0.065" WALL THICKNESS UP TO 10'-0" 1 5/8" x 16 GA. P2000 UNISTRUT CHANNEL COMPRESSION STRUT SIZING ATTACHED UNATTACHED FACE OF PARTITION GRID PERIMETER RIVETED COMPRESSION STRUT, MAX. 6'-0" FROM WALLS AND MAX. 12'-0" O.C. EACH WAY, SEE DTL. A (4) SPLAY WIRES WITHIN 2" OF STRUT VERTICAL HANGER WIRE, MAX. 8" FROM WALLS AND MAX. 4'-0" O.C. EACH WAY WALL ANGLE, TYP. STABILIZER BAR @ UNATTACHED SIDE, MAX. 8" FROM WALLS, TYP. MAIN RUNNER @ 4'-0" O.C., TYP. 4' 0" CROSS TEE @ 2'-0" O.C., TYP. 2' 0" CROSS TEE @ 4'-0" O.C., TYP. TYPICAL LAY -IN CEILING GRID LAYOUT NOT TO SCALE 0 0 0 0 0 0 4-0" O.C. �)r FACE OF PARTITION NOTE: MINIMUM MAIN /CROSS T -BAR CONNECTION STRENGTH SHALL BE 180 LBS. GYPSUM BOARD CLG., PROVIDE CONTROL JOINTS @ EVERY 30'-0" / 900 SQ.FT. VERTICAL 8 GA. (B.W.G.) HANGER WIRE, MAX. 6" FROM WALLS AND MAX. 4'-0" O.C. EACH WAY MAIN BEAM @ 4'-0" O.C., TYP. CROSS TEE @ 2-0" O.C., TYP. ARMSTRONG HEAVY DUTY DRYWALL SUSPENSION SYSTEM RATED FOR SEISMIC ZONES A -F WITH HEAVY DUTY MAIN RUNNERS @ 48" O.C. MAX. PROVIDE #8 VERTICAL HANGERS WITH SADDLE TIE AND (3) TIGHT TURNS @ 48" O.C. EACH WAY PER IBC. ATTACH GYP. BD. WITH 1" HI - LO TYPE'S' BUGLE HEAD SCREWS @ 12" O.C. MAX. AND 3/8" MIN. EDGE DISTANCE. PROVIDE HIGH RECYCLED CONTENT (HRC) COMPONENTS WHERE AVAILABLE. TYPICAL DRYWALL CEILING GRID LAYOUT NOT TO SCALE NOTE: ACOUSTIC CLG. TILE PANELS AND COMPRESSION STRUTS NOT SHOWN APPROVED ANCHORS, MECHANICALLY FASTEN TO STL. BEAMS OR TOP CHORD OF BAR JOISTS, TYP. 12 GA. x 3/4"W MIN. METAL ANGLE, TYP. @ VERTICAL WIRES 12 GA. x 1"W MIN. METAL STRAP, TYP. @ SPLAY WIRES 8" MAX. J, OR 1/4 LENGTH OF END RUNNER, WHICHEVER IS LESS id y3/4" GAP STABILIZER BAR TO PREVENT SPREADING OF RUNNERS 2" MIN. WALL ANGLE, DO NOT ATTACH TO RUNNER, CLG. GRID SHALL BE FREE TO SLIDE ON ANGLE FACE OF PARTITION VERTICAL HANGER WIRE SPLAY WIRES 4, 8" MAX. OR 1/4 LENGTH OF END RUNNER, WHICHEVER IS LESS CROSS TEE 2" MIN. WALL ANGLE @ OPPOSITE WALL, ATTACH TO RUNNER W/ POP RIVET MAIN RUNNER LAY -IN CEILING PERIMETER SECTION APPROVED ANCHORS, FACE OF PARTITION MECHANICALLY FASTEN TO STL. BEAMS OR TOP CHORD OF BAR JOISTS, TYP. 12 GA. x 3/4"W MIN. METAL ANGLE, TYP. @ VERTICAL WIRES VERTICAL HANGER WIRE MAIN BEAM NOTE: PROVIDE TRAPEZE OR OTHER SUPPLEMENTARY SUPPORT MEMBERS AT OBSTRUCTIONS TO TYPICAL HANGER SPACING CROSS TEE 1 1/4"x 1 1/4" CONT. ANGLE W/ #10 SMS @ EA. STUD, TYP. 5/8" TYPE 'X' GYPSUM BOARD SCREWED TO SUSPENSION MEMBERS, TYP. SUSPENDED DRYWALL CEILING SECTION SCALE: 3" = 1'-0" NOTE: DO NOT ATTACH TO ROOF DECK, ATTACH TO STRUCTURAL STEEL OR TO TOP CHORD OF BAR JOISTS. PROVIDE ADDITIONAL FRAMING BETWEEN BAR JOISTS AS REQUIRED PER DWG. 5 / SHT. A-4.1 REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED AUG 0 2 2013 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA JUL 022013 PERMIT CENTER ARCHITECT DT MARC HITECT ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. NO PART OF THESE DRAWINGS OR SPECIFICATIONS MAYBE COPIED, REPRODUCED OR USED IN CONNECTION WTHANY WORK, OTHER THEN THE SPECIFIC PROJECT FOR WHICH THEY HAVE BEEN PREPARED, WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN AUTHORIZATION FROM THE ARCHITECT. AV E DA THE MT AND SCIENCE OF PURE FLOWER AND PLANT ESSENCES 767 FIFTH AVENUE NEW YORK, NY 10153 DRAWING TITLE SEISMIC CEILING DETAILS FR.aviicDmiS AVEDA Westfield Southcenter 2800 Southcenter Space No. 636, Level 1 Tukwila, WA 98188 DRAWING TITLE SEISMIC CEILING DETAILS FR.aviicDmiS 06.28.13 ISSUE FOR LANDLORD REVIEW, PERMIT & BID 06.21.13 ISSUE FOR MILLWORK PRICING NO. DATE REVISION DRAWN BY: DTM CHECKED BY: DTM ORIG.'DATE: 06.28.13 REV. DATE: 06.28.13 JOB NO. 1330 SHEET NO. A...4.2 BUILDING PERMIT NO. MALL CORRIDOR LINE ACCESSIBLE TOILET RM. STOCK ROOM LIGHTING GENERAL NOTES A. EXIT SIGNS, EMERGENCY AND NIGHT LIGHTS SHALL BE CONNECTED TO AN UNSWITCHED LIGHTING CIRCUIT, NOT CONTROLLED BY ANY OCCUPANCY SENSORS, SWITCHES OR CONTACTORS. B. REFER TO "RECESSED LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT DETAIL," ON THIS SHEET FOR INFORMATION ON SUPPORT OF ALL 2' X 4' RECESSED LIGHT FIXTURES. C. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL REFLECTED CEILING PLAN AND DETAILS FOR THE EXACT LOCATION OF ALL LIGHTING FIXTURES AND ANY OTHER EQUIPMENT INSTALLED IN THE CEILING SYSTEM. VERIFY EXACT MOUNTING HEIGHTS AND FINISHES WITH ARCHITECT PRIOR TO ROUGH—IN. D. REFER TO THE POWER PLANS FOR LOCATIONS OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT. ADJ. TENANT ART OF SHAVING LIGHTING PLAN CODED NOTES Q1 LOCATION OF LIGHTING CONTACTORS AND TIME CLOCK. Q2 EXISTING RESTROOM LIGHTING TO REMAIN. RECIRCUIT AND PROVIDE NEW SWITCH AS INDICATED. ❑3 LOCATION OF LIGHTING CONTROL SWITCHBANK. REFERENCE DETAILS ON THIS SHEET FOR MORE INFORMATION. ® CEILING MOUNTED EXHAUST FAN TO BE INTERLOCKED WITH SWITCHED LIGHTING CIRCUIT. • PROVID:O —TRACK CURRENT LIMITER. E REFER TO IETAIL 02/E-2.0 FOR UNDER—SHELF LIGHTING POWER. ❑7 PROVIDE 5A N—TRACK CURRENT LIMITER. ® LOCATION OF SECURITY/SOUND SYSTEM DEVICE. PROVIDE JUNCTION BOX ABOVE CEILING. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION AND REQUIREMENTS WITH SECURITY AND MUSIC SYSTEM VENDOR. • EXISTING EXIT SIGN TO REMAIN. `a. k ::,\ .;:.;: ;::...:ter:: \� TD, TYP. r TB -1 TO SWITCHE 'a' & 'b' TD, TYP. TB TORK MODEL NUMBER DW200B 2—POLE 7—DAY FORMAT WITH 365—DAY ADVANCE HOLIDAY SCHEDULING LIGHTING DIGITAL TIME CLOCK OR APPROVED EQUAL. NEUTRAL SWITCH "BPI" r ---I I �® I _J TIME CLOCK OVERRIDE SWITCH WITH 2 HOUR MAX. TIME SETTING 02 FRONT LIGHTS — I I REFER TO PANEL SCHEDULE FOR II--- REQUIRED NUMBER OF POLES SALES LIGHTS REFER TO PANEL SCHEDULE FOR I- REQUIRED NUMBER OF POLES DISPLAY LIGHTS REFER TO PANEL SCHEDULE FOR REQUIRED NUMBER OF POLES MINIMUM INTERRUPTING RATING FOR ALL RELAYS AND CONTACTORS SHALL BE 10,000 A.I.C. LIGHTING CONTROL DIAGRAM NOT TO SCALE BY— PASS SWITCH 'BP1' 'a' 'c' PLAN 's' 01 SALES LIGHTING SALES UGHnNG 0 DISPLAY UGHTING 0 STOCK LIGHTING 0 O 0 0 FINISHED FLOOR SWITCH 'a' 'b' 'c' 'BP1' 's' CONTROL ZONE SALES LIGHTING SALES LIGHTING DISPLAY LIGTHING BY—PASS SWITCH STOCK ROOM NOTES: 1. ENGRAVE COVERPLATE PER CONTROL ZONE. 2. ALL TOGGLE SWITCHES TO BE PILOT LIGHT SWITCHES TO INDICATE WHEN THEY ARE IN THE ON POSITION. LIGHTING PLAN 3/8" = 1'-0" R -1D2 #12 SAFETY WIRE TIED TO SAFETY WIRE SUPPORT HOLES & FASTENED TO BLDG. STRUCTURE. MINIMUM (2) SAFETY WIRES PER LIGHT FIXTURE PLACED AT DIAGONAL CORNERS. IF CEILING SYSTEM IS FIRE RATED, WIRES ARE TO BE DISTINGUISHABLE EY COLOR OR TAGGING PER NEC 300.11(1) LIGHT FIXTURE SAFETY WIRE SUPPORT HOLE, TYPICAL STRUCTURE ADJ. TENANT HILTI CC27 CLIP OR EQUAL EXPOSED T—BAR CEILING SUPPORT RESTRAINT CLIP MINIMUM (4) PER LIGHT FIXTURE, SECURELY ATTACHED TO CEILING GRID PER N.E.C. 410.16(C) NOTE: ALL WIRES ARE TO BE TAUT WITH A MINIMUM OF 3 TIGHT TURNS AROUND SELF — TYPICAL Oit LIGHTING CONTROL SWITCHBANK 0 A RECESSED LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT DETAIL NOT TO SCALE NOT TO SCALE NOTE: FIXTURE INSTALLATION TO COMPLY WITH ASTM C636-96 AND U.B.C. SECTION 25.213. 1 D13 -fib SEPARATE PERMIT AND APPROVAL REQUIRED RECEIVED CITY OF TUKWILA JUL`3 1 2013 PERMIT CENTER ENGINEER THIS SHEET IS PART OF THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS, OTHER SHEETS INCLUDING SPECIFICATIONS APPLY. THAT SHOWN HEREON IS SCHEMATIC IN NATURE AND NOT TO BE USED AS A SHOP DRAWING; THEREFORE, INCLUDE ALL MODIFICATIONS REQUIRED TO CONFORM TO SITE CONDITIONS AND THE EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL USED. VERIFY LOCATIONS AND DIMENSIONS OF ALL ARCHITECTURAL AND STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS AS SHOWN ON THEIR RESPECTIVE DOCUMENTS, THESE ELEMENTS ARE SHOWN FOR REFERENCE AND SHALL BE VERIFIED PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION AND THE ENGINEER ASSUMES NO LIABILITY FOR THE ACCURACY OF THESE ELEMENTS. NO DESIGN RESPONSIBILITY IS ASSUMED FOR ANY PORTION OF THE WORK THAT THE PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER HAS NOT SIGNED AND SEALED PER STATE REQUIREMENTS. Larson Binkley, Inc. 310 W 20th Street, Suite 200 Kansas City, MO 64108 Washington Certificate of Authorization Number C1288 T 816-997-9601 F 816-997-9602 lorson bin kl ey.co m Copyright 2013 OWNER AVEDA THE ART AND SCIENCE OF PURE FLOWER AND PLANT ESSENCES 767 FIFTH AVENUE NEW YORK, NY 10153 0120130011F20.dwa 07-29-13 10:45 scott.vouna AVEDA Southcenter Mall 2800 Southcenter Space No. 636, Level 1 Tukwila, WA 98188 DRAWING TITLE LIGHTING PLAN REVISIONS 07.26.13 CODE RESPONSE 06.28.13 ISSUE FOR LL REVIEW/PERMIT/BID NO. DATE REVISION DRAWN BY: RSY CHECKED BY: TWD ORIG. DATE: 00.00.00 REV. DATE: 00.00.00 JOB NO. PROJECT NO. #### SHEET NO. E2•0 BUILDING PERMIT NO. rite #"..t=Iii ingpuma LT -SUM =12aaate::H'tsrrgy'>_.r.RieconpIarRe_' Forma ea Corm/wain RI, and.-3stay 2aril. R3 kt.i..l J... 2117 Project Info R.1ectAW>ss's w..If..tEa.11.12..is...1.. eche 7/a6f2isi3 211 Southcenter Space 6636 ill s .. It...2.. s.... EE3t Fa Building De tmer:t Lae A polo: ant Nares: AVEDA T.1�i..Yi ,4pp:i 'xrtt t•,Nn'S: r r c ► r Appdloa:t s, aeaa: Appltant R•torE: --•�� Project Description 0 fk pz ',atom J Fi4 ltbn 0 t`s.',Te•atton Q € omiitrtes. Watts Mow ed (wattsift2xarea) Li ,hfirtg Compliance Path(,6) Light ry'sae.s Cera it4 alci3#Ht a S.„? Ibmi gici g: Pt±a'far nce :-Y t 9 t"ff ie>sp ar;.' PerZw,rat ; efi rtalyt..Cx r C•.€+'nesfrew ` interior LigixtFlrt.g 0 see.Wrg -".eat< ted: , :eve•..` -a ca:`eikettt o ...- c Co.ntpR.anee:Option 573 Interior Lighting System General sales ticrs3e1ttc#n>itlatlan::fteitbeachtekiedb,'recessed t -f EJ it ii. head LED Description yla°tures<canlrattedautomatically byatfrrteclocic,andtaxtaseparate tante switches toachieVeS.CT I€ghtredLit-ton, :.Z track heads it1beusedfor Errel cteacs elilobtr dtsplagIlluminati o .andsh,eilbeasrts rr'seticaltycantrc.led b*3atln eclack,w€the stts lent t d teatzates. t: rile::witch£csrmanualstrerrlda.Thestockrcom,r'etitraanttand:wfi`lceareaa are to be lit by fluorescent x ixt urs so an s» cotntroI led by Pow pan Cf Be nscrt :. 600 Additions and Change of Space use (C1.01.43 .yi. t e Citi ..4.4) SALES J AtZtMe:: ar8:3Lir C#ta11 5p'r.seL.e a_atea=Ties anallasa•t?Ic3:L`IL' ct"Ctt€ti Ori .ax a;amla51e rwject a><3r^vi0Y1: o..raxo C'F`1.0c... e ofspar::e tree area a 1.:,'Ti`ried:ac ineXi§-l01ODa:long wars, 0 .0 L.ns to s;'`e 1onat£ate o ?gman3:e c5 Lh;all aFi>lk able ix Prcx/ieat. .`iT Area edeIIT?5X::(1.s Gs t'S 1-• wt:.7 LIT' Space-. it` Space < rel a --i ./1t>'7'- S :Al t Cc* 1p#a>oce.:Faint. Di1Ci:.l:; '?T.a iSt>l ori 3111os oe a nti:`.8'Y„i,"11r Ss -(6i3Gir.Cf` 01 aril : frappe atgAiygne.1.7 ". 't ••r 4,...c•Z 0O'1 or avow uni't'e scope Jg"c51.>. E ?,':.Y3r:.dab Hiro a'>'i'it<x'Eiv'k.lcva 100r CSI,•.'`.. 2 aV3' r'V 1s1Or 1OO e.M"e.s rD COrttr$s ser C41.75 53. 1 .Alteration, Renovations and Repairs (CI.OL..$.3.i) 240 cm 65% ar nil E •of lttni ':3eE.s 8.: 5 IA.4t:„.e (rept& e< . :r'FJ,,rea.e0:rett`,s(La''d•FiJ7-a.p,:zk--.vx€k::e-4,O1 e4.4e$FL,O;i_iG-t:1 T.S1rACE)CO ,F7:i. m...eForm. Daaotert iiir...t a:17}:6r C.z (fsr;3XY.t'3 je;>3t3,'•i.t" 05givx3 e0lk." e protti, stS.C.q-e Automate time 5w itch controls Pz (`toteEaSe`F ftt.53;<lo.1Rt (l Less € rlart60% K1 IL,mPak'Es 11:a: eere;"t0000 F�>"i~3 roe 4-tace- ay •at e ifide 8Or1 (2. TS -AP T'• SP.$C ,3. cSer?,La' erria. FCX:rtr. L'1cobrie•3t existirtg raw t erl iia Space afro pa-Lp'.^.S a/ ( r'ti`aarfo' obis(.€l1Y,,.L• ffses ts(1, ts:,sc :ecF•Vest Scwv`.'s CODE RESPONSE r( Lartr. ar l::vr 53:ias1 repiaoeoert T Vrk:eds 'ttr.gl rrilal1e.i cooly _. e>.t6th Ectal t<:terkl`.yam cb 3tt3;9.e0t^:L41r1C eZ 4'o 'R'-: I (l '> 00* w tang 8.0tattelloseX ea*aeo ,stsr•es ean`T-t„r:or flXt1Ses 3'eEcc9ta^.::tom r5E'cl ci'c.,,.. F'n,•P c' ,a,.irt11>°'1e r,tttYz-:a: ilgett,rg co.it r`C4.)5 2 i;E, -crab z 'erslYy s£dlOce'S 1C4C1 2:2.4„ <tsf/i7g*'.ziori?+ CoasS'c s jC405.2. V. .;'ec.5c res ban cc trLYS(C :lie 2 c2. ai:Vaaval.€.So :p.risle ro1",Y Pei cz' :0'o`0 ps-C4C 4.3 Schedule 11 ith locations served - no slnple override s;ii #ton exceeds an area of > 5,000 SF © Na* a moved lE hti. ,i: panel: . r'S se.ilYeatfa, aII:a:etetViSktgccei0'oo as oeotcrAiekv itttrlg,air-matt tffsests.Ec;'3O;o0lm4s(C4)2S.2.2. % &totsani71itf.Ssriaga' HgalfV.contmksperC4t fa © la risooringlisai• Ivrin trees i.3Wrangeuot rowel ',>".sty Pflve at, 9ceSteft111n cost osasnaed-tOrf'tew`a�etrf rssr,ofco s.fMs.`,^."&T1.' c.ft 1912'.£:,gc".d`.t11FolsperC$5.5la b �`+ ass Ye,i.7".•:•:,',C40 © .T,z crtar!g s WE3:8ErMgrtea:E' P3 me mtertf.f Et 1-19 airdsparmuservnerangEo. Occupancy sensors It1t-toe L'h#in Summa" Space -by -Space -S ace> LTG -INT -SPACE 2012 WashingonStateErergrCoc ComdiarceForms for CommerciaLGroupRl,and > 3story R2erdR3 Project Info Project Address Westfield Mall at Southcenter 211 Southcenter Space 8636 Tukwila, WA 98188 Applicant flame: AVEDA Maximum Allowed Lighting Wattage Re•visedJGne 2013 Date 7/26/2013 Fa Building Department Use Local( n Wan 4, room #. 1-}r ALL) Space Type.` AtD ed Watts pe -ft.= Gross Interior Area :n ft= SALES FLOOR Retail_ Sales area 1.68 573 Watts A bow et i, at:sd5 x.. area) 963 STOCK ROOM Warehouse: Mediumibulkymaterial 0.58 196 114 Artum Ent' Relight'.; RetailD2spiaq ANowarti from lnT INT DISPLAY 1 " Select Table C405.5,42) caego.y from (f cpcttx;??menu. For atflLfl)S lndtcale he! a/itAllowed wattage ir ?)rst$O?laet to Sot) 140.. .ht., above 40 tells 0.02 W47. N. Proposed Lighting Wattage Total Area 1302 Allcz ed Watts 2379 769 Location (plan #, room #, or ALL) F is<ture Description (1s1G?ude exempt equipment per 1. ole 3) Number of FD: butes Watts, Fixture RESTROOM 'TN' - EXISTING 2X2 FLUORESCENT LAY -IN 1 33 1.00115 Repos:&, 33 STOCK 'THA' -1X4 SHALLOW WRAP FLUORESCENT 3 65 195 STOCK 'TE -4' FLUORESCENT STRIP 1 28 SALES 71-2' - RECESSED 2 -LAMP LED 4 34. SALES 'R-102' - RECESSED FLUORESCENT WALL -WASHER 1 32 28 136 32 Retail Display Lighting Fratrt LCT -INT -DISPLAY 1340 Total Proposed Watts .'na> riot exceed Total Allowed Watts for / rtte`ior L :gall ins Total Proposed Watts 2264 Notes: 1. Fox .i`raedFix lure Rziicate fix ice type., bsrr 4pe(e.q.T-8'=. i1LiR'.'JZSoflett;0&.`?:s,rie''> tare, sand Doi!aar tt'i..e. Of ,L ,L . Y FF ., inclode,`li. For tracK/f9 5 ( Ote`1p, lCltMelen"th o f Me Ira01< to fee1)irfad itio,n<to me f/.rive temp and baitasI inlc.rmat:on, 2. Forproposed Flfatts/Fii;turs, use,:it marrufacits- est tstedmax icn moot 5.0ttagee tberf>ixi>.xe (hots mp'ytne. ?amp wattage) and rr;trG°xie!ra as specified n Scti C•Sf For tine cottaQs track lign.tng, list megreatCrrfactuot in• areaats eor/egtlo r , ` r ,' .-,pli ,>t> .f urr t;; . ...;'vii - p , 'F r" ort't"'t transformer. Ft;, :C43>c-..n^r E�.^d0%fl%O�itr:i %fSt tnactX.l.,sLr�.,ed by50, oras applicable, the c, c.., len, ., .,<s,e/devices.< ,: Et , s.., , .e.. ,g a toe tr ansfcsaF1e' ratedwattac, je. 3. i-Stai, fixtures. FGiigit^ot equipnent et_3:efuexe,rpitnrzrr34155.5.note except/al rsxonbera,dlea e Fa s:Frture bank ase„•* rF t r .sot, .saw { ,.ets,s ,xr ...:xarteB t,. £ x m� xt'tivre� eazx^ s: a e t,i' z ,ww g aSSMw Inte,nor�Dis Ia L t htiin f °Space -by -Space P Y 9 R LTG -INT -DISPLAY 2012 Wa shir rilo n Rate EnergyCo de Comrltarce Forms for Commercial, Group R1, and> 3 sto ry R2 and R3 Revised Ju -ie 2013 Project Info Y'c I AJd.tss Westfield Mall at Southcenter Dale 7/26/2013 211 Southcenter Space 6636 For E.cr deg Department Use Tukwila, WA 98188 A polo: ant Nares: AVEDA Maximum Allowed Display Lighting Wattage Lcx ab:rn (Van ii. room #,orALL) Space Type" Mow ed Watts per fit`" . Gross interior Area MTV, Watts Mow ed (wattsift2xarea) SALES FLOOR Relail 3: furniture. clo1hing,cosmetics, artwork 1.40 573 802 600 600 SALES DISPLAY TRACK (2A CURRENT LIMITER) 1 240 240 t ; 54552.2.1 Automate time 5w itch controls Lgnting systems automatic shut-off capablit - indicate method and location served on pians. Note Sc awns w here automatic shutoff is provided by other method (occupancy sensor, daytight controls, etc) E2 CODE RESPONSE Yes 'R'-: I ' Only areas wit -in re:aissales areas that cont:in.seoa:ate:ycontrossedd`s sas'lrg.tr may be enter edc e:' Torn; e 6405.5.2(2) : botnoteA 'Front Table ✓415 z 2(2) footnote A. Proposed. Display Lighting Wattage Total Area Area Watts 573 802 Deploy Allow once Only separately controlled display fixtures complying with 5405.5.2(2) footnote A may entered here 1302 Lix aten (plan C. room Ii, or ALL) DSp!ay Fixture Description Number of Fixtures Watts/ Fixture Watts Proposed SALES SHOW WINDOW TRACK (119 WA TTS, 8') 1 400 400 SALES DISPLAY TRACK (5A CURRENT LIMITER) 1 600 600 SALES DISPLAY TRACK (5A CURRENT LIMITER) 1 600 600 SALES DISPLAY TRACK (2A CURRENT LIMITER) 1 240 240 t ; 54552.2.1 Automate time 5w itch controls Lgnting systems automatic shut-off capablit - indicate method and location served on pians. Note Sc awns w here automatic shutoff is provided by other method (occupancy sensor, daytight controls, etc) E2 CODE RESPONSE Yes 'R'-: I OVerride5N, itchingz2 Schedule 11 ith locations served - no slnple override s;ii #ton exceeds an area of > 5,000 SF DATE REVISION Ye,i.7".•:•:,',C40 .2.2.2 Occupancy sensors Schedule of locations served E2 JOB NO. PROJECT NO. #### NA. , C40e.2.23 Daylight zones :: <•A. R ; Vertical fenestration Pirnary and secondary daylight zone areas inricated on pians N.A. 'R Skytl4hi5 Slay€sight daylight zone areas ridicated on plans N.A. ,r; `.r,. ,: ,, 3 , • 't MYaght zone controls 1ightng catntrol schedule with d nn:ng iTethrxi and locations served -nro single daylghtcontrolzone exceeds 2,500 SF Total Proposed Watts 1840 r<F.. s -r:' , w08 er.y. am..•t T- ,p; b damp ntrp t7 t'r an h f, =e.. F'v'trfo;;G,.E:t ,�rSi:lah'F`>itltnE L?escr ...@'i ,?fitCBi,, :,h.lfre type, .rot., ,rtirpE E'. $ ,.Ji:,iE"G.,c,: S,r, the a..d'.,. a.,aSrt e .. l,ttde•:i. Far .,3eY,dr,'Fti,"t:t list _ r.<.�...7?,.an:i<'.n._,,,,.,,ad:s:... to ..z.,...,, afi.iuz.>a€::t,crtn:�icn. tit' ) � 3 t lamp, proposed#F`atts!Fbilure, use ianu:a ut watt of r:>t. (, simply ;detain( wattage/and 2 For.J CtGiFC.'.=. ti�c'df:rGX?;i ;tt'F t ,. u, wattage ..rix .,X,.1:'e (riot ri?Nl° ..tin, . iiia>.a e a?d rs s� t t 0 � t>- r.p e fi -6405.5- t: r' ,t, l,> prr: •^t+ G.:r?fC+Fe.`f3a.S,.££�:&-1».�..0>. G`i �t ForG'?rr}ere.::a �e.l ask>tG4..a'Y.? S<.�tE fP,3iE'C'aGilt3: ,L R.:,.arre wattage ie, ,iFG/ ,. c: mutt. piled ,„at ..� app'?c . 0 ;, t;. eo t 1Nog sor. f the flighting i. a.><. .,at;>j ,.. c, �., az.<..,�9,-::FE;xa>.a�-�fcurvent.,r-de:spa'_ �, a, t,Fetrans.orrt;e� For foe �.,iiaaz track <ist . tionsfomer'rated wattage. List air ori .'r tures Lighting,Motorand � on StateErer t e t LTG -CHK Transformer Perm Plans ,Checkl�s 2012 Washin CoctCom ianceFormsforCommercia Greu Rtand>3stor � d L P y R2and R3 Revised Are 2013 Project Address Westfield Mall at Southcenter Date 7/26/2013 The follow log information is necessarytochecka permit appf�at€on for conpplancew ith the fighting, motor, and transformer requirements in Cm 2012 Washington State Nonresidential Energ Cade. Applicability (yes, no, n.a.) Code Section Component information Required Location on Flans Building Department Notes LIGHTING CONTROLS (Section 0405.2) Yes •: e^.505.21 Manualitghtitg controls Lig;Ftngcontrolscnedutewithtype,locations served,50% lighting reduction method E2 ---. Yes t ; 54552.2.1 Automate time 5w itch controls Lgnting systems automatic shut-off capablit - indicate method and location served on pians. Note Sc awns w here automatic shutoff is provided by other method (occupancy sensor, daytight controls, etc) E2 CODE RESPONSE Yes 'R'-: I OVerride5N, itchingz2 Schedule 11 ith locations served - no slnple override s;ii #ton exceeds an area of > 5,000 SF DATE REVISION Ye,i.7".•:•:,',C40 .2.2.2 Occupancy sensors Schedule of locations served E2 JOB NO. PROJECT NO. #### NA. , C40e.2.23 Daylight zones :: <•A. R ; Vertical fenestration Pirnary and secondary daylight zone areas inricated on pians N.A. 'R Skytl4hi5 Slay€sight daylight zone areas ridicated on plans N.A. ,r; `.r,. ,: ,, 3 , • 't MYaght zone controls 1ightng catntrol schedule with d nn:ng iTethrxi and locations served -nro single daylghtcontrolzone exceeds 2,500 SF Yes I, `.1rxii C40.J:23 Specific plc ani st conttrols Specific application l€ohidno controls are independent of general area lgntog and controls for other killing applications E2 fes "...--- i -ii, -ii,jMeans i-,- N..,I€i<ghthgg of egress Lighting control schedule v. ith method and locations served. Note luminaires that function as both normal and egress. 82 To r s Display i lilting Lighting control schedule ac ith type and locations served 1s2 Yes i 'v Accent n'ght€ng Lioitng control schedule w Rh type and €ocatkons served E2 N.A. * ? i Hctetmotel guest room Li-rhtinq c. sit: ctl schedules Rh type and locations served NA,„'< Supplemental task ik-4fiting lion-etemptlLghtng equipment Lighting cant 01 schedules ith type and lotations served Lp'it ng 00111 01 Sc 'iedule s 5 h type appleations served and locations No ..ti..6., ,. Non-exempt lighting egtepment Lighting controlscnedulevt ith type, appli:atonsservedand locations 5485.24 Exterior !gating controls Lgnting control sctoedulew th type. textures and location served INTERIOR LIGHTING POWER (Seciion 0405.6) Ye; • is 5405.51 j Total connected Ii htinfixture 3 g pow Crer Schedule au lilt fixture types. lamps, balasts: watts per f x>El>e E4 N.A. Space exceptions b F Spa. e exceptions taken noted on clans or:: or lonce form i• � N.A. Lighting equipment exceptions Equipment exceptions talean rooted on plans or compliance fomn Yes C405.5.2 Lighting Pr:ka er calculations E5 ND Bui€dltg Area Method Ca . lance €rr'n completed - proposed ;t alta per bu€slin area does not exceed maximum aloe ed wattage yes Space -By -Space Method Compliance form completed - total proposed wattage does not ext end n X Mon aloe ed wattage E 5 Yes 'rli 5405.4 Ex t signs All internally i:€urinated ex its sign are <5 av atts per side E2 EXTERIOR LIGHTING POWER (Section C405.6) 3 •A. '* <> 5405.5.2 ` Total connected I' fain •pas er Sctedule w inn fixture types. lamps, hatreds,watts per. fixture ,E, yj I l E3lercr apple at€on ex, ept:ens - Lghthg pair er Calc cations Exterior EWE except Ons takesn noted on plank or comp€sanc6 tonne Conitalance form completed - proposed wattage for exterior lighting plus hose site allw ed does not exceed max. allow ed - NA, E N.A. .......;'l C40561 Exterior building grounds tghtng Schedule au nth fixture types, lamps, ballasts, :c alts per fixture; lumens per>Y att for fixtures > 100 is alts ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEMS (Sections C405.7 ,C405.9, 5405.12, C409.2.1) Yes 5.09.2.1 Electrical energy consumption - e hole bulking Meters provided for ei hole building electric energy usage 131 NA, 5405.7 Electrical energy r:onsunpt oon - dwelling units individual Ow ellilg wit electricity meters provided N,A, • ; C485.9 Transf owners indicate transformer size and of riciency on plans N,„, e 5105.121 Variable speed escalators' and moving w alts Variable speed c ontr;,Isprovided <.•A• - 51c05.122 I Re"Enerat€ve d=,;fives Val tall,- frequency regenerative drives provided €c,r escalators COMMISSIONING (Sections C405.13, C408.3, 0409.4.4) nip - ) =A, „� ". I..eYr l:i>. S:i d i Commissioning Gan><ntssioning procedure developed fa" all applc e systems P'i,A. C403 3 Lght'aig controls Cono-ussionng plan and functional test procedure developed P-i,A, �'; 5409.4.4 ...-...__._=.::;j Electrical energy consunoton elevens Correissoning plan and functional test procedure developed N.A. •T,, Eseata4:its & moving au alks Col-. ossbning plan and functional test procedure developed REVIEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE APPROVED AUG 022013 City of Tukwila BUILDING DIVISION RECEIVED CITY OF TUKINIt A JUL 3 1 2013 PERMIT CENTEF, ENGINEER THIS SHEET IS PART OF THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS, OTHER SHEETS INCLUDING SPECIFICATIONS APPLY. THAT SHOWN HEREON IS SCHEMATIC IN NATURE AND NOT TO BE USED AS A SHOP DRAWING; THEREFORE, INCLUDE ALL MODIFICATIONS REQUIRED TO CONFORM TO SiTE CONDRiONS AND THE EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL USED. VERIFY LOCATIONS AND DIMENSIONS OF ALL ARCHITECTURAL AND STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS AS SHOWN ON THEIR RESPECiIVE DOCUMENTS, THESE ELEMENTS ARE SHOWN FOR REFERENCE AND SHALL BE VERIFIED PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION AND THE ENGINEER ASSUMES NO LIABILITY FOR THE ACCURACY OF THESE ELEMENTS. NO DESIGN RESPONSIBILITY IS ASSUMED FOR ANY PORTION OF THE WORK THAT THE PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER HAS NOT SIGNED AND SEALED PER STATE REQUIREMENTS. Larson Binkley, Inc. 310 W 20th Street, Suite 200 Kansas City, MO 64108 Washington Certificate of Authorization Number C1286 T 816-997-9601 F 816-997-9602 Iarsonbinkley.com Copyright 2013 OWNER AV DA THE ART AND SCIENCE OF PURE FLOWER AND PLANT ESSENCES 767 FIFTH AVENUE NEW YORK, NY 10153 AVEDA Southcenter Mall 2800 Southcenter Space No. 636, Level 1 Tukwila, WA 98188 DRAWING TITLE ENERGY CODE COMPLIANCE FORMS REVISIONS 07.26.13 CODE RESPONSE 06.28.13 ISSUE FOR LL REVIEW/PERMIT/BID NO. DATE REVISION DRAWN BY: RSY CHECKED BY: TWD ORIG. DATE: 00.00.00 REV. DATE: 00.00.00 JOB NO. PROJECT NO. #### SHEET NO. E 5 . 0 BUILDING PERMIT NO.